See other formats

Full text of "The geographical and historical dictionary of America and the West Indies"

THE 

GEOGRAPHICAL 

AND 

HISTORICAL 

DICTIONARY 

OF 

AMERICA AND THE WEST INDIES. 

CONTAINING 

AN ENTIRE TRANSLATION OF THE SPANISH WORK 

-OP 

COLONEL DON ANTONIO DE ALCEDO, 

CAPTAIN OF THE ROYAL SPANISH GUARDS, AND MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ACADEMY OF HISTORY: 

WITH 

I JUrge 3U>Dition anb Compilations 

FROM MODERN VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, 

AND FROM 

ORIGINAL AND AUTHENTIC INFORMATION. 



G. A. THOMPSON, ESQ. 



IN FIVE VOLUMES. 



UNIVERSITY 




Magna modis mtiltis miranda videtur 



Gentibus humanis regio, visendaque fertur, 

Rebus opima bonis. LUCRETIUS, lib. I. line 727. 



lonuon : 

PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR, AND PUBLISHED BY 

CARPENTER AND SON, OLD BOND-STREET; LONGMAN, HURST, REES, ORME, AND BROWN, PAT^UNOs TER-ROVT; WHIT E,COCHRANE, 
AND CO. FLEET-STREET, AND MURRAY, ALBEMARI.E STREET, LONDON; PAKKEK, OXFORD; ANU DEIGHTON, CAMBRIDGE. 

1814. 



. 



THE 



GEOGRAPHICAL AND HISTORICAL 



DICTIONARY 

Lrj.YyJ.J.vn-n.AVl . *" OF THfc T 4*^ 



OF 




AMERICA AND THE WEST INDIES, 



P A B 

, a settlement of the Nuevo Reyno 
de Leon in N.America; situate w. of the garri 
son of Santa Engracia. 

PABLO, S. or SAO PAULO. See PAULO. 

PABLO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimicnto "of Lipes in Peru, of the arch* 
bishopric of Charcas. It was also called Santa 
Isabel de Esmoruco, and was the residence of 
the curate. 

PABLO, another, of the province and corregi- 
miento of Otavalo in the kingdom of Quito, at 
the foot of a small mountain, from which issues a 
stream of water abounding in very small fish, 
called prenadillas, so delicate and salutary even 
for the sick, that they are potted and carried to 
all parts of the kingdom. 

PABLO, another, of the head settlement of the 
district of S. Juan del Rio, and alcaldia mayor 
of Queretaro, in Nueva Espana; containing 46 
families of Indians. 

PABLO, another, of the province and corregi- 
miento of Tinta in Peru ; annexed to the curacy 
of Cacha. 

PABLO, another settlement or ward, of the 
head settlement of the district of Zumpahuacan, 
and alcaldia mayor of Marinalco in Nueva Es 
pana. 

PABLO, another, of the head settlement of the 
district, and alcaldia mayor of Toluca in the same 
kingdom, containing 161 families of Indians; at 
a small distance n. of its capital. 

PABLO, another, a small settlement or ward 

VOL. IV. 



P A B 

of the alcaldia mayor of Guanchinango, in th 
same kingdom ; annexed to the curacy of the 
settlement of Pahuatlan. 

PABLO, another, and head settlement of the 
district, of the alcaldia mayor of Villalta, in the 
same kingdom ; of a cold temperature, and con 
taining 51 Indian families. 

PABLO, another, of the missions which were 
held by the Jesuits, in the province of Topia and 
kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya; situate in the middle 
of the sierrtt of Topia, on the shore of the river 
Piastla. 

PABLO, another, of the province of Barcelona, 
and government of Cumana ; situate on the skirt 
of a mountain of the serrania, and on the shore 
of the river Sacaguar, s. of the settlement of 
Piritu. 

PABLO, another, a small settlement of the 
head settlement of the district of Texmelucan, 
and alcaldia mayor of Guajozinco in Nueva Es 
pana. 

PABLO, another, of the district of Chiriqui, in 
the province and government of Veragua, and 
kingdom of Tierra Firme: a league and an half 
from its head settlement, in the high road. 

PABLO, another, of the missions held by the 
Portuguese Carmelites, in the country of Las 
Amazonas, and on the shore of this river. 

PABLO, another, of the missions which were 

held by the French Jesuits, in the province and 

government of French Guayana : founded in 

1735, on the shore of the river Oyapoco, and 

B 



2 PAC 

consisting of Indians of many nations converted 
to the Catholic faith. 

PABLO, another, of the province and alcaldia 
mayor of Chiapa, in the kingdom of Guatemala. 

PABLO, another, of the province and alcaldia 
mayor of Los Zoques, in the same kingdom. 

PABLO, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Moxos in the kingdom of Quito ; situate 
on the shore of the river Santa Ana. 

PABLO, another, formerly of this name, in the 
same province and kingdom, but which was en 
tirely ruined by an epidemical disease. 

PABLO, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Sonora : situate in the country of the 
Cocomaricopas Indians : founded in 1699 by the 
Jesuits, on the shore of the river Grande de (jrila. 

PABLO, a lake of the province and corregimi- 
ento of Otavalo in the kingdom of Quito, close to 
the settlement of its name ; a league long, and 
half a league wide, abounding in geese, widgeons, 
and other aquatic fowl, and surrounded with reed 
called there totoras. It receives its water from 
the mountain of Mojanda, and from it issues an 
arm, which is the river Blanco. On the e. side 
of it is an estate called Caxas. 

PABLO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Veragua in the kingdom of Tierra Firme, 
which rises in the sierras of Guanico, on the 5. 
and empties itself into the Pacific. 

PABLO, another river, having the surname of 
Los Paeces, in the province and government of 
Buenos Ayres. It runs w. and enters the Jacegua 
between the Joseph Diaz and the Paso delChileno. 

PABLO, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Choco, in the NuevoReynode Granada. 
It rises from a lake and joins the river Quito, 
which rises from another lake, and these toge 
ther form the Atrato. 

PABLO, an island in the strait of Magellan, 
near the e. coast, opposite cape Monmouth. 

PABLO, another, a small island of the S. sea, 
in the bay of Panama, opposite the gulf of San 

- - i A 

Miguel. 

[PABO, the Mickmac name of a river, on the 
n. side of Chaleur bay, about six leagues from 
Grand Riviere, w.n.w. of cape Despair.] 

PABON, a small river of the province and 
government of Buenos Ayres, which runs n.n.e. 
and enters the Parama, between that De en 
Medio and the Caracanal. 

PABON, another, also a small river, in the 
same province, which runs s. and enters the Plata 
at its mouth, on the side opposite the capital. 

PAC, a small lake of the province and govern 
ment of Yucatan, 



PAG 

PAC, a small river of the province and govern^ 
ment of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia. It rises 
in the country of the ferocious Caribes Indians, 
and enters the Caroni, just after it is entered by 
the abundant stream of the Arui. 

PACABARA, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Moxos in the kingdom of Quito, 
which runs n. and enters the Beni. 

PACAIPAMPA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Piura ; annexed to the cu 
racy of Frias. 

PACAJAS, a river of the country of Las Ama- 
zonas, which runs n. between those of Jacunda 
and Guanapii, or Uanapu, and enters the Ma- 
ranon, or Amazon, in the arm formed by the 
island of Joanes. This river gives its name to a 
nation of Indians but little known, who dwell on 
the n. shore of the Maranon, nearly 80 leagues 
above the Paranaiba. 

PACAJES, a province and corregimiento of 
Peru; bounded by the province of Chucuito on 
the n. w.-, n. by the great lake of Titicaca; n.e. 
by the province of Omasuyos ; e. by the city of 
La Paz and province of Cicasica ; s. c. by the 
corregimiento of Oruro and province of Paria ; 
s. by the province of Charangas, and s.w. and w.. 
by the jurisdiction of Arica, the cordillera inter 
vening. Its length from the bridge of the river 
of the Desaguadero, which divides it from the 
province of Chucuito, as far as the province of 
Paria, is 56 leagues, and its greatest width 40. 

From the loftiness of its territory, and the 
proximity of the Cordilleras, its temperature is 
unpleasantly cold, and it is comparatively barren. 
Its productions are sweet and bitter papas, of 
which is made the chuno, or bread. There i& 
also grown here an abundance of the grain, 
called canahua, serving as food, and for making 
chicha drink. They cultivate some bark, and 
breed many flocks of native sheep, alpacas, vi 
cunas, and vizcachas. Here are many estates or 
pastures of sheep, of the milk of which they 
make well-flavoured cheese, killing every year 
some of the ewes for meat, which being salted 
and hardened by the frost, they call chalonas; and 
these, with a considerable portion of the chuno, 
they carry for sale to the coast ; where they take 
in exchange wine, brandy, and cotton ; and from 
the province of Cochabamba, maize, wheat, and 
other seeds. 

This province was formerly very rich in mines, 
those of Verenguela, San Juan, and Tampaya, 
being the most celebrated; but these, together 
with another mine of emeralds, are no longer 
worked. Near the first of these mines, in which 



P A C 

were discovered 700 veins of metal, and from 
whence an immense quantity was extracted, there 
was a large population of Spaniards, at least as 
far as the remains and ruins of a large town tes 
tify. This province has also a mine of very 
white and transparent talc, which furnishes the 
whole of Peru for glasses of windows, both in the 
churches and houses. 

The corregidor used to collect a repartimiento 
of 96,505 dollars, and it paid an alcabala of 772 
dollars yearly. Its population consists of the 
following settlements : 

Caquiaviri, Asiento de San Juan 

Viacha, ^ Berenguela, 

Tiahuanaco, Calacoto, 

Huaqui, Caquingora, 

S.AndresdeMachaca, Callapa, 

Jesus de Machaca, (in Carahicara de Pacages, 
which is a Beataria Hulloma, 
with 12 nuns,) Achocalla, 

Santiago de Machaca, S. Pedro del Desagua- 

dero. 

PACAMOROS YAGUARSONGO, or SAN 
JUAN DE SALINAS, a province and government, 
vulgarly called De Bracamoros, in the kingdom 
of Quito, to the *.; antiently called Silla and 
Chacainga, and now San Jean, from its capital ; 
bounded n. by the territory of Zamora and the 
province of Loxa, w. by the province of Piura, s. 
by the river Maranon, or Amazon, and e. by the 
woods and territories of the Xibaros Indians. 
Its population is included in the cities of Loyola, 
Valladolid, Jaen, and Santiago de Las Montanas, 
which is entirely destroyed; the others being 
also reduced to miserable villages, having no 
thing more about them of a city than the name. 
This province is watered by the rivers Guanca- 
bamba, Chinchipe, Paracasa, Tururnbasa, Num- 
balle, Palanda, Simanchi, Sangalla, and San 
Francisco, the which divides the bishopric of 
Quito from that of Truxillo. 

It has rich gold mines, but not of the best 
quality, and it is but thinly peopled, and with 
out any commerce. .The pastures are excellent, 
and there is very good tobacco, wild wax, and 
cotton, and the very finest cacao, though not in 
abundance. It is very subject to invasions from 
the Xibaros Indians, who dwell in the woods on 
the e. 

It is governed by a governor, who resides either 
in Jaar the capital, or in the settlement of Tome- 
pen da. 

PACANA, or PACAXA, a river of the province 
and country of Las Amazonas, which runs/?, pass 
ing through the country of the Yurunas Indians, 



P A C 3 

and enters the Xingu in the great bend which it 
makes before it enters the Maranon or Amazon. 

PACANAS, Indians of N. America. They 
are a small tribe of about 30 men, who live oh 
the Quelqueshoe river, which falls into the bay 
between Attakapi and Sabine, which heads in a 
prairie called Cooko Prairie, about 40 miles 
s. w. ofNatchitoches. They are known to have 
emigrated from West Florida, about 40 years 
ago. Their village is about 50 miles s. e. of the 
Conchattas ; they are said to be increasing a 
little in number; to be quiet, peaceable, and 
friendly people. Their own language differs 
from any other, but they speak Mobilian. 

PACANTIRO, a small settlement of the head 
settlement of the district of Xacona, and alcaldia 
mayor of Z amoria in N ue va Espaiia. It contains 
eight families of Mustees, and as many of Mula- 
toes, exercised in agriculture; three leagues from 
its head settlement. 

PACARAN, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Canete in Peru. 

PACARAOS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Canta in Peru, annexed to the 
curacy of Pari. 

PACARICTAMBO, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Piura in Peru, annex 
ed to the curacy of Frias. 

PACARNI, a settlement of the government of 
Neiba,in theNuevo Reynode Granada; annexed 
to the curacy of its capital : of an hot tempera 
ture, and abounding in gold mines, vegetable 
productions and cattle. 

PACAS, MELXORDOS, a settlement of the 
province and captainship of Para in Brasil; in 
the island of Caviana. 

PACASMAYU, a river of the province and 
corregimiento of Saria in Peru. It flows down 
from the mountains of Caxamarca, runs w. and 
laves the territories of San Pedro de Lloco, 20 
leagues from Lambayeque. Its shores are very 
delightful and charming, and it runs into the 
Pacific sea forming a bay, in which is caught 
excellent fish. Its mouth is in lat. 7 24 s. 

PACAYAAS, a settlement of the province and 
captains/lip of Para in Brasil; situate at the 
mouth of the river Tocantines. 

[PACAYITA, a volcano in Guatemala, in 
New Spain. In 1773, the lava which issued 
from it destroyed the city of St. Santiago, which 
was situated in the valley of Panchoi.J 

PACCHA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Cuenca in the kingdom of Zui- 
to ; from which capital it is 56 leagues distant. In 
its district to the s. is an estate called Cuanacauri. 

B2 



4 P A C 

PACCHA, another settlement, in the province 
and corregimiento of Yamparaes and archbishop 
ric of Charcas in Peru. 

PACCHA, another, of the province and corre 
gimiento of Huanta in the same kingdom, annex 
ed to the curacy of Tiellas. 

PACCHA, another, of the province and cor 
regimiento of Loxa in the kingdom of Quito, 
near the river Tumblez. 

PACCHO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Chancay in Peru. 

PACHABAMBA, a settlement ofthe province 
and corregimiento of Guarucco in Peru ; annexed 
to the curacy of Santa Maria del Valle. 

PACHACAMAC, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Cercado in Peru, annexed to 
the curacy of Lurin : founded in the celebrated 
valley of its name, signifying in the Quechuan 
language Omnipotent, or Creator Preserver of all. 
Here the Indians had a magnificent temple 
dedicated to the invisible, supreme Being^, whom 
they acknowledged and adored. The Emperor 
Pachacutec, who was the tenth monarch of 
Peru, conquered this place with all its delightful 
and fertile territory, and founded there a house 
for Virgins, dedicated to the culture ofthe deity 
Pachacamac. Francisco Pizarro, when he con 
quered the kingdom, plundered this temple and 
the whole settlement of immense wealth, not 
withstanding the Indians had removed a great 
deal. In its vicinity is a small mountain, and a 
rivulet still keeping the same name. At the 
present day there is nothing remaining of the 
temple and the town but a few ruins. The 
illustrious Senor Don Bernardino de Almanza, 
Bishop of Santa Fe, had the honor of being curate 
here. It is 22 miles s. bv e. of Lima, in lat. 12 
19 s. 

PACHACHAC, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Guarochiri in Peru, annexed 
to the curacy of Yauli. 

PACHACHACA, a river of the kingdom of 
Peru, which rises in the province of Aimaraes, 
runs n. traversing the province of Abancay, and 
enters the Apurimac : on it are more than 40 
bridges of cords and willow-twigs. 

PACHACONAS, a settlement ofthe province 
and corregimiento of Aimaraes in Peru. 

PACHACOTO, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Guanuco in the same king 
dom as the former ; annexed to the curacy of 
Santa Maria del Valle. 

PACAMA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Arica in Peru : annexed to the 
curacy ofCopta. 



P A C 

PACHANGARA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Caxatambo in Peru ; annex 
ed to the curacy of Churin. 

PACHAS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Guamalies in the same kingdom 
as the former, to the curacy of which it belongs. 
It is in the centre ofthe province, near the river 
Maranon, which is called Quivilla, and is the 
residence ofthe corregidor. 

[PACHEA, the most . ofthe islands called 
the Pearl or King s Islands, all low and woody, 
and about 12 leagues from Panama. Within 
a league of this island there is anchorage in 17 
fathoms.] 

PACHECA, a small island ofthe S. sea, in the 
gulf and bay of Panama : in which the inha 
bitants of this capital have some plantations of 
maize and other grain for the food ofthe Negroes 
employed in the pearl fisheries on those coasts. 
[This is one ofthe beautiful islands within the 
semicircular bay from Panama to point Mala. 
These islands yield wood, water, fruit, fowls, 
hogs, &c. and afford excellent harbour for ship 
ping, in lat. 8 3 n.l 

(TACHEGOIA, a lake of New South Wales, 
in N. America, in lat. 55 w.] 

PACHIA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Arica in Peru, annexed to the 
curacy of Tacua. 

PACHICA, a settlement ofthe same province 
and corregimiento and kingdom as the former ; 
annexed to the curacy of Copta. 

PACHICA, another settlement, in the same 
province and kingdom ; annexed to the curacy of 
Cibaya. 

PACHICA, a river of the province and corre 
gimiento of Pataz in the same kingdom. It 
rises in the sierra., runs n- n. c. and enters the 
Ucayale. 

PACHINA, a lake ofthe province and govern 
ment of Moxos and kingdom of Quito ; in the 
territory of Massamaes Indians, between the 
rivers Maranon or Amazon and Napo. 

PACHINI, a settlement . of the province and 
corregimiento of Caxamarquilla in Peru. 

PACHITEA. SEEMANOA. 

PACHO, a settlement of the corregimiento of 
Zipaquira in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada; of 
an hot temperature, abounding in vegetable pro 
ductions. In its vicinity the Jesuits had one of 
the finest estates in the kingdom. It contains 200 
house-keepers, and lies at the back of the settle 
ment of Zipaquira, 14 leagues from Santa Fe. 

PACHUCA, a town and capital ofthe jurisdic 
tion and alcald m mayor of its name in Nueva 



P A C 



P A C 



3 



"Espafia : of a cold temperature, but beautiful to 
behold on account of the symmetry of its streets, 
publicplaces, and edifices, particularly of its parish 
church, which is most magnificent. It has like 
wise a convent of the missionaries of the bare 
footed Franciscans, another called the Hospital 
de San Juan de Dis, and an house of entertain 
ment of the monks of La Merced and several 
hermitages in the wards of the Indians, where 
mass is said. 

It was once more opulent, owing to its mines, 
which are now in a state of great decay, from 
their being partly filled with water which has 
flowed down from the sierra. Gemeli says 
that in the space of 60 leagues he counts more 
than 1,000 mines, and that from one only, called 
La Trinidad, were extracted in the course of 
10 years, 40 millions of dollars. In this town 
are the royal coffers, where the treasurer and 
accomptant reside, taking for the king one fifth 
of all the silver produced here. The trade of 
this metal is the principal of the place, although 
some of the Indians employ themselves in agri 
culture, sowing maize, French beans, and other 
seeds. Its population consists of 900 fami 
lies of Spaniards, Mustees, and Mulatoes, and 
120 of Indians, with a special governor subject 
to the alcalde mayor, but who resides in another 
town called Pachuquilla. The jurisdiction con 
tains the following settlements : 

Real del Monte, Zapotlan, 

Tezayuca, Acayuca, 

Huaquilpa, Tolayuca. 

[Pachuca and Tasco are the oldest mining- 
places in the kingdom of Mexico : and the neigh 
bouring village Pachuquillo, is supposed to have 
been the first Christian village founded by the 
Spaniards. The height of Pachuca is 8,141 feet, 
and it is 45 miles n. e. of Mexico.] 

PACHUCA, a lake formed to drain the waters 
from the heights of the above province ; in which 
there is a sluice, by which the waters may on 
occasion be turned into the lake Zumpango ; the 
said sluice having been made in 1628, and lately 
much improved. 

PACIFIC Sea, a name improperly given to the 
S. sea, as every one will maintain who has navi 
gated it : for, although the part between the tro 
pics may justify the name, the rest of it does not 
merit such a title, as being subject to violent 
tempests, in lat. 20 and 23, equally strong as 
any in Europe. The first Spaniards who navi 
gated this sea gave it the name of Pacific for the 
serenity and gentle gales which they experienced 
in their first voyages, persuading themselves 
that it was equally calm all over it ; but the fury 



of the tempests in the winter, and the dreadful 
agitation of its waters, declare it well worthy 
of another name. 

The pilots of this sea have constantly observed 
that when a n. wind is about to blow, there will 
appear one or two days previous to hover round 
the ships a marine bird, which they callquebranta- 
huesos (break-bones), and which is seen on no 
other occasion ; neither do they know to where 
it resorts. This bird is of a very singular figure, 
and a sure omen of bad weather. 

[PACKERSFIELD, a township of New 
Hampshire, Cheshire county, e. of Keene, on 
the head branches of Ashuelot river. It is 56 
miles w. of Portsmouth, was incorporated in 
1774, and contains 721 inhabitants]. 

PACKOLET, a river of the province and 
colony of S. Carolina, which runs s. e. and 
unites itself with Large river. 

PACLAS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Luya and Chillaos in Peru ; 
annexed to the curacy of its capital. 

PACLLON, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Caxatambo, in the same kingdom 
as the former ; annexed to the curacy of Man- 
gas. 

[PACMOTE, a bay on the e. side of the island 
of Martinica, between Vauclin bay on the n. and 
Fere A nee or Creek on the s.] 

PA CO, a small island in the lake Umamarca, 
of the province and corregimiento of Omasuyos 
in the kingdom of Peru. 

PACOCHA, a port of the coast of the S. sea, 
in the province and corregimiento of Arica in the 
same kingdom. 

[PACOLET, a small river of S. Carolina, which 
rises in the White Oak mountains, and unites 
with Broad river, 32 miles above Tiger river, 
and 8 s. of the N. Carolina line. Its course is 
about s. e. and on it are the celebrated Pacolet 
springs, 17 miles above its confluence with. 
Broad river.] 

PACOMARCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Chilques and Masques, in 
the same kingdom; annexed to the curacy of 
Pampacucho. 

PACORA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Sana, in the same kingdom as 
the former : situate in the road of Valles, leading 
to Lima. 

PACORA, another settlement, in the province 
and kingdom of Tierra Firme and government 
of Panama, situate in a beautiful and extensive 
valley, which gives it its name, and through 
which a river runs. It is very fertile and of a, 
pleaiant temperature, and so healthy that all the 



6 PAD 

people of the neighbouring places come here to 
recruit their health. It abounds also in cattle, 
having excellent pastures; eight leagues from 
the capital. 

PACORA, the river which waters the valley 
aforesaid, runs s. until it enters the sea in the 
bay or gulf of Panama. 

PACTLICHAN, a settlement of the head set 
tlement of the district of Ancantepee, and alcaldia 
mayor of Tlapa, in Nueva Espana. It contains 
90 families of Indians, who employ themselves in 
cultivating and dressing cotton, and is of an hot 
temperature. 

PACA, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Buenos Ayres in Peru. It runs nearly 
due s. and enters the Plata, near the mouth where 
the Uruguay enters. 

PADAGUEL, a large lake of the kingdom of 
Chile, in the province and corregimiento of San 
tiago. It is formed of the rivers Colina and 
Lampa, the which, after a course of more than 
20 leagues, unite. This lake is more than two 
leagues long, is very deep, and in it are excel 
lent trout and bagres. The shores are very plea 
sant, covered with herbage and trees. It is at 
no great distance from the city of Santiago. 

PADAMO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Guayana, which rises in the interior of 
the same, between the rivers Caura and Orinoco, 
and forming a curve to thes. enters the latter. 

PADDAVIRI, an arm of the river Parime or 
Paravillanas, one of the four into which it is di 
vided, and the second which enters the Negro. 

PADILLA, a town of the province and govern 
ment of Sierra Gorda in the bay of Mexico, and 
kingdom of Nueva Espana, founded in 1748 by 
the count of that title Don Joseph de Escandon, 
colonel of militia of Quereturo, who gave it this 
name of Dona Antonia de Pedilla, wife of the 
viceroy, who was then Count of Revillagigedo. 
It is small and poor, and has not increased in po 
pulation as was expected. 

PADOUCAS, or PADUCAS, a settlement of the 
province and government of Louisiana in N. 
America, on the shore and at the source of the 
river of its name, where there are also different 
villages of Indians of this name. 

[This once powerful Indian nation (of which 
our author speaks) has, apparently, entirely dis 
appeared; every inquiry made after them has 
proved ineffectual. In the year 1724, they resided in 
several villages on the heads of the Kansas river, 
and could, at that time, bring upwards of 2000 
men into the field. (See Mons. Dupratz History of 
Louisiana, page 71, and the map attached to that 



PAG 

work). The information that we have received 
is, that being oppressed by the nations residing 
on the Missouri, they removed to the upper part 
of the river Plate, where they afterwards had but 
little intercourse with the whites. They seem to 
have given name to the n. branch of that river, 
which is called the Paducas Fork. The most 
probable conjecture is, that being still fur 
ther reduced, they have divided into small wan 
dering bands, which assumed the names of the 
subdivisions of the Paducas nation., and are known 
to us at present under the appellation of Wete- 
pahatoes, Kiawas, Kanenavish, Katteka, Dotame, 
&c. who still inhabit the country to which the 
Paducas are said to have removed.] 

The aforesaid river runs s. e. then e. and enters 
the grand river Misouri. 

PADRE, PUNTA DE, an extremity of the n. 
coast of the island of Cuba, between port Ma- 
lagueta and the bay of Xavara. 

PAECES, a nation of barbarous Indians of the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada, who dwell in the 
woods near the cities of Cartago and Timana. 
They were ferocious and cannibals, and routed, 
in 1540, the Spanish troops of Aiiasco and Juan 
de Ampudia ; but they began to be reduced to 
the faith, together with the nation of the Yalcones 
in 1634. At present their numbers are much 
diminished. 

PAECES, a city of the province and govern 
ment of Popayan, in the kingdom of Quito, 
founded by captain Domingo Lozano, on the 
shore of the river Grande de la Magdalena in 
1563, in the valley of S. Saldana. It is nearly 
depopulated, since that it was destroyed by the 
Indians in the middle of the 16th century ; 60 
leagues from the city of San Juan de los Llanos. 

PAEZ, a river of the same province and go 
vernment as the former city. It rises in the 
valley of its name, passes .opposite the city of 
La Plata, and enters the Grande de la Magdalena 
at a small distance from this city. 

PAGAN, a small river of the province and 
colony of Virginia in N. America, and of the 
county of S. Isle of Wight. It runs e. and enters 
the sea at the mouth of the river John. 

PAGANAGANDI, a river of the province and 
government of Antioquia in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. It rises at the foot of the sierras of 
Choco, and running n. w. enters the sea in the 
bay of Candelaria of the gulf of Uraba. 

[FACET S Port, a small harbour within the 
great sound of the Bahama islands, and in the 
most e. part of the sound.] 

PAGUAROS, a nation of Indians but little 



P A I 



P A 1 



Known, inhabiting the s. part of the river Ma- 
ranon, a little above the mouth of the Madera. 

PAGUILLAS, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Atacama in Peru. 

[PAGtJISA, or PAQUISA, on the w. side of S. 
America, in lat. 21 55 5. and 10 leagues n. of 
the harbour of Cobija, in the bay of Atacama. 
Aguada de Paguisa, or the watering place of Pa- 
guisa, is 15 leagues from Cobija. The whole 
coast between is high, mountainous, and rocky, in 
the direction of n. n. e.~] 

PAHUATLAN, a settlement of the head set 
tlement of the district and alcaldia mayor of 
Guauchinango in Nueva Espaiia. It contains a 
convent of the order of San Agustin, and 490 
families of Otomies Indians, amongst which are 
included those of the wards of its district ; six 
leagues n. of its capital. 

PAICABI, a settlement of Indians of the king 
dom of Chile, situate on the coast, at the mouth 
of the river Tucapel, near the spot where the 
Indians put to death Pedro de Valdivia, conqueror 
of this kingdom. 

PAICANOS, a nation of Indians, of the pro 
vince and government of Santa Cruz de la Sierra 
in Peru, from which capital it is 20 leagues to the 
s. e. These Indians are poor, docile, and humble : 
the territory abounds in sugar-canes and cotton, 
and the climate is hot, save when the s. wind 
blows, which passing through the snow-clad 
mountains of the Andes, brings with it a refresh 
ing coolness. 

PAICO, a settlement of the province and cor 
regimiento of Lucanas in Peru. 

PAICO, a lake of the kingdom of Chile, be 
tween the rivers Valdivia and Callacalla. It is 
formed from the waste water of the Quillen. 

PAICOLLO^ SAN LUCAS DE, a settlement of 
the province and corregimiento of Pelaya and 
Paspaya in Peru. 

PAlJAN, or PAISAN, SAN SALVADOR DE, a 
settlement of the province and corregimiento of 
Truxillo in Peru, situate in the valley of Chi- 
in the hiffh road on the coast leading: to 



cam a, 



rom 



Quito, 30 miles from its capital, and eight 
the port of Malabrigo. 

PAILAS, a port of the river La Plata, in the 
province and government of Santa Cruz de la 
Sierra in Peru, n. of the capital. 

PAIME, a settlement of the jurisdiction of 
Muzo and corregimiento of Tanja in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada. It contains 150 house 
keepers, who live by cultivating sugar-canes, 
cotton, and other fruits of a warm and mild 
climate.. 



[PAINTED Post, a station, so called in New 
York state, inTioga county on then, side of Tioga 
river, between Bath and Newtown, 40 miles 
n. w. by w. of Lockhartsbrough, 45 s. e. of Wil- 
liamsburg on Genesse river, and 163 n. w. of 
Philadelphia. A post-office is kept here.] 

(^PAINTED Rock is on French Broad river, by 
which the line runs between Virginia and Ten 
nessee.] 

[PAINTER S Harbour, on the w. coast of Cape 
Breton island, is nearly due e. of East Point in 
the island of St. John s, lat. 46" 22 n. long. 
61" 16 ..] 

PAIPA, a settlement of the same province and 
corregimiento and kingdom as the former, situate 
near the road which leads to Santa Fe> between 
its capital and the lake of Toca or Totta. It 
was very large and populous in the time of the 
Indians, and was taken by Gonzalo Ximinez de 
Quesada in 1537. It is at present reduced to a 
miserable village, 15 miles n. e. of its capital. 

PAIPIRU, SIERRAS DE, some mountains of 
the province and captainship of Rey in Brazil, 
which run from w. toe. following the same course 
from the river Lavacuan to the brink of the 
great lake of Los Patos. In these mountains 
the Portuguese have some rich gold mines, to 
which they give the same name. 

PAIRA, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Quixos and Macas, in the kingdom 
of Quito, belonging to the district of the second. 

PAIRACA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Aimaraes in Peru. Annexed to 
the curacy of Chuquinga. 

PAIRAPUPU, a small river of the province 
and colony of Surinam, or part of Guayana, 
possessed by the Dutch. It rises in the sierra 
of Usupama, and enters the Cuyuni. 

PAITA, a small city of the province and cor 
regimiento of Piura in Peru, situate on the coast 
of the S. sea, with a good port, and well fre 
quented by vessels from the kingdom of Tierra 
Firme, Acapulco, Sonsonate, &c. Although this 
part, strictly speaking, is nothing more than a 
bay, it is considered one of the best in that coast, 
from the safety of its anchorage. It is the place 
where passengers disembark to go by land to 
Lima, and the other provinces of Peru, and 
where ships bound to Callao touch to take in 
provisions, &c. ; since, without this precaution, 
it would be almost impossible to make that 
voyage, so tedious by the usually contrary winds. 

The town is situate on a> sandy soil, which pro 
duces neither a sprout of herbage, or drop of 
fresh water. This is, therefore, brought from ; 



8 P A I 

the settlement of Colan, and though of a whitish 
and unpleasant look, is, nevertheless, accounted 
wholesome, and supposed to be impregnated with 
the medicinal virtues of sarzaparilla, through a 
wood of which trees it passes. They bring it in 
balzas or rafts, on which they also carry maize 
and other productions to the ships ; but they 
have no other cattle than goats, though plenty 
of fish, and particularly the sea-cats, which they 
catch in abundance, and carry for sale to the 
other provinces, when dried, and where they are 
used in the same manner as dried cod-fish. 

The houses are low, and the walls of earth and 
cane, with the exception of the house of the cor- 
regidor., the parish church, and a convent of the 
order of La Merced, which are all of stone ; but 
the slight structure of their buildings is only 
adapted to this climate, where it is something 
wonderful to rain ; and thus, when a considerable 
shower fell in 1728, the greater part of the houses 
were quite demolished. 

The climate is dry and hot, though healthy. 
There is a small castle for the defence of the 
fort, on the top of a small mountain, called the 
Silla de Paita. The English admiral George 
Anson, took, burnt, and destroyed this city in 
1741. It is 494 miles n. by w. from Lima, and 
192s. by w. of Guayaquil, in long. 80 50 w. 
lat. 5" 5 . 

PAIRAPUPU, a point of land of the coast of 
Peru, in the same province and corregimiento. 

PAITANABA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Copiapo in the kingdom of 
Chile, on the shore of the river Huasco, not far 
from the junction of the two rivers which form 
this. 

PAITILLA , a point in the bay of Panama, on 
the coast of the S. sea, one league from that capital. 
It forms with the point of Chiriqui, a small road, 
which is dry at ebb-tide, and is the place where 
the canoes come to carry on the traffic of the 
place. 

PAITITI, GRANO, a province and extensive 
country of the kingdom of Peru, little known as 
being inhabited by infidel Indians ; among w r hom 
there are, however, some of the missions of the 
monks of San Francisco. 

PAIX, PORT DE. See PORT DE PAIX. 
PAI-ZAMA, a large rock of the province and 
government of Buenos Ayresin Peru, near the city 
of Ascension, in the road leading to Brasil; on the 
top of which rock are to be seen in the stone the 
marks of a man s feet, which, according to the 
tradition of the Indians, were of a certain person, 
who preached to their ancestors after the Deluge, 



PAL 

and whose name was Paizuma, the same which the 
rock still retains. Some historians pretend to 
prove, that it was the apostle S. Thomas, sup 
porting their argument by the tradition of similar 
phenonmena in various other parts of America. 

[PAJARO, PAJAROS, or PAXAROS, islands on 
the coast of Chile, on the S. Pacific ocean. These 
are three or four rocks, the largest of which is 
called Pajaro Ninno, or Paxaro Ninno, and two 
miles n. w. by n. from the southernmost point of 
the main or point Tortugas, that closes the port 
of Coquimbo.] 

[PAJAROS, LES, or ISLANDS OF BIRDS, a clus 
ter of small islands on the coast of Chile, 29 
miles n. n. w. of the bay of Coquimbo, and 66 
5. s. w. of the harbour of Guasco or Huasco. 
The island of Choros is four miles n. of these 
islands, towards the harbour of Guasco.] 
[PAJAROS. See PAXAROS.] 
[PAKANOKIT,the seat of Masassoit, the fa 
mous Indian chief, was situated on Namasket 
river, which empties into Narraganset bay.] 

PAKEBSEY, orPouGHKEEPSiE, a city of the 
province and colony of New York, e. of the river 
Hudson, and 62 miles n. of the city of New York. 
[See POUGHKEEPSIE.] 

PALACE, an ancient province of the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada, now united to the pro 
vince of Popayan ; discovered by Sebastian de 
Benalcazar in 1536. Its natives are cruel and 
ferocious, and descendants of the Paeces. It is at 
present without inhabitants, although it has some 
gold mines not worked. 

PALACIO, a river of the province of Sucum- 
bios, in the kingdom of Quito, which runs from 
w. to e. and unites itself with the river which 
rises from the lake Mocoa, in lat. l u n. 

PALAGUA, a lake of the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, in the province of Muzo or of Los 
Marquetones ; formed from a waste water of the 
river Grande de la Magdalena. 

PALANCA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Chochapoyas in Peru ; annexed 
to the curacy of Soritor. 

PALANDA, an ancient province of the king 
dom of Quito, belonging partly to the province 
of Jaen and partly to that of Piura, although 
the settlement remains in a very dilapidated state ; 
of the same name, and situate on the bank of a 
river, w. of the city of Loyola, in lat. 4 48 s. 

PALANDA, the aforesaid river, runs s. e. rising 
near the city of Valladolid ; waters the province, 
and enters the Chinchipe. 

PALANIZUELA, a settlement of the head 
settlement of the district of Juguila and akaldia 



V A L 

mayor of Xicayan in Nueva Espana. It contains 
24 families of Indians, and is 20 leagues e. of its 
head settlement. 

PALANTLA, a settlement of the head set 
tlement of the district of Zitlala and alcaldia 
mayor of Chilapa, in the same kingdom as the 
former. It contains 42 families of Indians, and 
is two leagues s. of its head settlement. 

PAL AT A, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Tucuman in Peru, and of the district 
and jurisdiction of the city of Salta. Its shores 
abound with the pasture of simbolar, resembling 
the cane, and with leaves like barley, and on 
which the mules thrive and fatten. It is also 
used by the natives for interweaving the heads 
of the carts used for transporting merchandize to 
Buenos Ayres. It runs e. and enters the Pasage. 

[PALATINE, New York. A part of this town 
was erected into two new towns by the legisla 
ture in 1797.] 

[PALATINE, or PALENTINE, a township in 
Montgomery county, New York, on the n. side 
of Mohawk river, and w. of Caghnawaga. In 
1790 it contained 3404 inhabitants, including 
192 slaves. In 1796, 585 of the inhabitants were 
electors. The compact part of it stands on the 
bank of the Mohawk, and contains a Reformed 
Dutch church, and 20 or 30 houses. It is 36 
miles above Schenectady.] 

[PALATINE Town, in the state of New York, 
lies on the e. bank of Hudson s river, and n. 
side of the mouth of Livingston river, which 
empties into the former; 10 miles n. of Rhyn- 
beck, and 14 southerly of Hudson s city.] 

PALATOS, a settlement of the jurisdiction 
and corregimiento of Bogota in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada. 

PALCA, a settlement of the province and cor 
regimiento of Angaraez in Peru ; annexed to the 
curacy of Acoria. 

PALCAMAYO, a river of the province and 
corregimiento of Pataz in Peru, which runs n. in 
the district of the missions of Caxamarquilla for 
many leagues, and then unites with the Pangon 
to enter in a very abundant stream the Ucayale. 

PALCAMAYO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Tarma in Peru ; annexed to the 
curacy of Acobamba. 

PALCARO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Cotabambas in Peru. 

PALCIPA, a lake of the province and go 
vernment of Tucuman in Peru, formed from the 
river Andahuilas in the confines of the kingdom 
of Chile. On its shore is a fort for defence 
against the Infidel Indians. 

VOL. IV. 



PAL 



9 



PALCIPA, an extensive, fertile, and delightful 
valley of the same province. 

PALCO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Lucanas in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Otoca. 

PALCO, another settlement, in the province 
and corregimiento of Concepcion in the kingdom 
of Chile, on the shore of the river Biobio. 

PALENA, a settlement of the province and 
government of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; on the shore of the river S. Do 
mingo, to the s. of the city of Barinas Nueva. 

PALENQUE, a settlement of the province 
und kingdom of Tierra Firme, situate on the n. 
coast, in the jurisdiction of the city of Porto 
Bello, where terminates the jurisdiction of the 
province, and where that of the province of 
Darien begins. It is composed of negro refugee- 
slaves, who have, for the sake of better security, 
selected a place craggy and difficult of access on 
the shore of the river Sardinas. Many maintain 
their religion, and in 1743 they intreated the 
president of Panama that he would send them a 
curate. 

PALENQUE, another settlement, of the pro 
vince and government of Cartagena, and district 
of the town of Maria, n. of the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. 

PALENQUE, another, of the province and go 
vernment of Guayaquil in the kingdom of Quito, 
of the district of Baba ; situate on the shore of 
this river, to the n. of its head settlement, at 24 
leagues distance. 

PALENQUE, another, of the province and go 
vernment of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada, on the sea-coast. 

PALENQUE, a river in the same province and 
kingdom as the former. It enters the Sebastian. 

PALENQUE, a point of land on the 5. coast of 
the island S. Domingo, between the point of 
Nizao and the river Ozama. 

PALENQUES, a barbarous nation of Indians 
of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia. They took 
this name from the estacades which they made for 
their defence, and which resembled trenches. It 
is not numerous, but ferocious, and dwelling on 
the borders of the Orinoco; bounded by the na^ 
tion of the Guamos. 

PALIZADA. See MISSISIPPI. 

PALLACTANGA, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Riobamba in the king 
dom of Quito ; celebrated for the rich mines of 
gold and silver in its district, and which were for 
merly worked to such profit as to exceed all the 
other mines of Peru ; one individual alone hay* 



JO 



ing a register, in which 18 veins of these metals 
were marked as his own property. These mines 
are no longer worked. 

PALLAHU A, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Arica in Peru; annexed to the 
curacy of Tacna. 

PALLALLA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Angaraez in Peru, where there 
is a coal-mine not worked. 

PALLAQUEZ, SAN MIGUEL DE, a settle 
ment of the province and corregimiento of Caxa- 
marca in Peru. 

PALLAS, a settlement of the province and cor 
regimiento of Tarma in Peru ; annexed to the cu 
racy of Atabillosbaxos. 

PALLA3CA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Conchucos in Peru. 

PALLATE, a bay on the s. coast of the island 
Jamaica. 

[PALLISER S Islands, in the s. Pacific ocean, 
are between 15 and 16 of s. lat. and from 146 to 
147 of w. long. From lat. 14 to 20 s. and long. 
138 to 150 w. the ocean is strewed with low half- 
overflowed islands, which renders it necessary for 
navigators to proceed with much caution.] 

PALMA, NUESTRA SENORA DE LA, a city of 
the corregimiento of Tunja, in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada; founded by Don Antonio de To 
ledo, in the country of the Colimas Indians, in 
1560, and not in 1512, as the Ex-jesuit Coleti as 
serts : translated to the spot where it now stands 
by Captain Gutierre de Ovalle in 1563 (and not 
in 1572, as that author also affirms), giving it the 
name of Ronda, in honour of his native place, but 
which it afterwards lost. 

It is of a moderately hot temperature, pro 
duces much cotton, maize, yucas, plantains, and 
sugar-cane, of which sugar is made in abun 
dance, with preserves, particularly of guayaba; 
and with these and some cotton and linen manu 
factures, it carries on a pretty trade. Money 
being very scarce here, articles of cotton are 
bartered for provisions, and nice versa. The 
principal food of the natives is what they call 
soata, which is composed of maize and reyamas. 
This city has, besides the parish-church, which is 
entitled Nuestra Senora de la Asuncion, a con 
vent of the religious order of San Francisco, so 
poor as to maintain only one individual. The 
copper mines, which are very fine, are worked. 

The inhabitants amount to 600 housekeepers, 
who by the commerce alone aforesaid of the sweets 
and linen^ have raised themselves to such a de 
gree of opulence and respectability as to vie with 
the inhabitants of the neighbouring town of 



PAL 

Pamplona, without the advantages of their silver 
and emerald mines. They have, however, 
fairer mine, the source of all happiness, virtue. 
It is this that renders them beloved and esteemed 
throughout the kingdom. This city is situate on 
the e. shore of the river Magdalena, 54 miles n. w. 
of Santa Fe, and 68 w. by s. of Tunja. Lat. 
5" 8 n. and long. 74 52 30 ? w. 

PALM A, a settlement of the head settlement of 
the district of Tamazunchale, and alcaldia mayor 
of Valles, in Nueva Espana; situate in a spot 
surrounded by serranias, in which dwell dispersed 
the Pames Indians. Few of these live in the set 
tlement, but prefer scattering themselves over the 
mountains and woods, according to their antient 
habits, and in different times of the year they 
take up their residence by the stalls where they 
pen their cattle. The population (including 
these mountaineers) amounts to 3000 families. 
It has a convent of the religious order of San 
Francisco, and is 22 leagues w. of its head set 
tlement. 

PALMA, another, of the head settlement of 
Zanguio, and alcaldia mayor of Zamora, in the 
same kingdom ; situate in an extensive and plea 
sant valley. 

It is of an hot and moist temperature ; bounded 
e. by the mountain of Las Canoas, and w. and n. 
by the sea of Chapala, from the shores of which 
it is distant a league and an half. Its population 
is of 24 families of Spaniards, Mustees, and Mu- 
lattoes, and 13 of Indians, who maintain them 
selves by fishing. Somewhat less than three 
leagues from its hea/d settlement. 

PALMA, another, of the province and corregi- 
miento of Valparaiso in the kingdom of Chile ; 
situate s. of the town of Santa Barbara. 

PALMA, another, with the dedicatory title of 
Nuestra Senora del Rosario, of the missions 
which are held by the religious order of S. Do 
mingo, in the district of the city of Pedraza, of 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. 

PALMA, a river of the kingdom of Brazil, 
which runs nearly w. with a slight inclination to 
s. w. and enters the Paratinga. 

PALMA, an island situate near the coast of the 
same kingdom as the former river, close to the 
mouth of the river La Plata. 

PALMA, another settlement, with the surname 
of Gorda, in the jurisdiction of Orizava, and al 
caldia mayor of Ixmiquilpan in Nueva Espana. 

PALMAR, SAN AGUSTIN DEL, a settlement 
and head settlement of the district of the alcaldia 
mayor of Tepeaca in Nueva Espana; of a cold 
and dry temperature, and containing 36 families 



PAL 

of Spaniards, 48 of Mustees, 12 of Mulattoes, and 
61 of Indians. Its territory is barren and fallow, 
so that the greater part of its inhabitants follow 
the trade of locksmiths. Eight leagues e. one 
quarter to s. e. of its capital. 

PALMAR, another settlement, of the province 
of Guayana and government of Cumana : one of 
the missions held there by the Capuchin fathers 
of Cataluna; situate s. of the city of S. Tomas. 

PALMAR, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Veragua, in the kingdom of Tierra 
Firme. 

PALMAR, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Yucatan in the kingdom of Guatemala, 
on the side of the point of Piedra on the coast. 

PALMAR, a bay on the coast of the S. sea, of 
the province and government of Darien, of the 
kingdom of Tierra Firme ; situate between the 
port Quemado and that of Pinas. It is a good 
port, called De la Hambre, where the river of 
the same name empties itself. 

PALMAR, a lake of the province and captain 
ship of Rey in Brazil, in the extremity of the 
coast formed by the river La Plata. 

PALMAR, a port on the coast of the S. sea, of 
the province and government of Esmeraldas, 
under the equinoctial line. 

PALMAR, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Guayaquil in the kingdom of Quito, of 
the district of Yaguache, to the n. It runs n. w. 
and enters the Babahoyo in lat. 1"45 s. 

PALMAR, a point of land of the interior points 
which form the entrance or channel of the lake 
of Maracaibo. 

PALMARES, SAN DIEGO DE LOS, or DE 
GUAMES, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Quixos and Macas in the kingdom 
of Quito : one of those which form the missions 
of the Sucunbios Indians, and which were held 
at the charge of the Jesuits. It is situate on the 
shore of the river Guames, near where it is en 
tered by the Putumayo. 

PALMARES, another settlement, of the pro 
vince and captainship of Rey in Brazil ; situate 
on the coast, near lake Charqueada. 

PALMAS, SALAZAR DE LOS, a city of the 
government of S. Faustino in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada : founded by Diego de Montes in 
1553, by way of security to the silver mines of 
S. Pedro, on the shore of a river which traverses 
a beautiful date-grove ; but its inhabitants shortly 
abandoned it being pressed sore by the infidels, 
who succeeded in destroying it. In 1555 it was 
re-peopled by Captain Diego Parada, with the 
name of Nirua, from its having been removed to 



PAL 



11 



the shore of this river : but here it had not better 
fortune than in the former place, and in 1583 it 
was founded a third time in the spot where it 
now stands, by the Governor Francisco de Ca- 
ceres, by order of the Colonel Alonso Estevan 
Rangel, for the head of the alcaldia mat/or^ 
which title the successors of the governor pre 
served for many years. 

It is of an hot temperature, and lies amongst 
some rough and craggy mountains ; but is very 
abundant in cacao, sugar canes, plantains, yucas* 
and maize. It has, besides the parish church, a 
chapel of Nuesta Senora de Belen. Its popula 
tion is composed of 400 housekeepers, and it is 
16 leagues n.n.w. of Pamplona ; from the ju 
risdiction of which it is divided by the river Sa- 
lazar, or Sulia. 

PALM AS, another city, with the dedicatory title 
of San Miguel, in the same kingdom : founded 
by Fernando Valdes in 1544, on the shore of the 
grand river Magdalena, n. of Santa Fe ; but it 
has fallen into such decay as to be nothing more 
than a miserable hamlet. 

PALMAS, a settlement, with the dedicatory 
title of San Juan, in the province and govern 
ment of Cartagena, of the same kingdom as the 
former cities. It belongs to the district of the 
jurisdiction of the town of Sinu, and is situate at 
the bay of this name, near the coast. 

PALMAS, another, with the dedicatory title of 
San Luis, of the missions which are held by the 
religious order of S. Domingo, in the district 
and jurisdiction of the city of Pedraza, of the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada, on the shore of the 
river Canaguan. 

PALMAS, a river of the province and alcaldia 
mayor of Panuco in Nueva Espana, which runs 
into the sea in the bay of Mexico. 

PALMAS, another river, of the alcaldia mayor 
of Tabasco, in the same kingdom ; which also 
enters the sea between the rivers Santa Ana 
and De Dos Bocas. 

PALMAS, a bay on the coast of California, op 
posite Nueva Espana, between the bay of Cer- 
ralvo and the cape Porfia. 

PALMAS, a port of the province and govern 
ment of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, in the river Grande de la Magdalena, 
with a settlement of considerable traffic. 

PALMAS, another river, of the province and 
government of Venezuela in the same kingdom, 
which runs s. and enters the Manapire. 

PALMAS, another port, on the n. coast of the 
island of Cuba, between the port of Sama and 
the bay of Baxanas. 

c 2 



PAL 



PAL 



PALM AS, an island of the S. sea, discovered 
by Francisco Pizarro in 1527, who gave it this 
name from the number of palms found upon it. 
It lies in the bay of Chiramina, is a league and 
an half in circumference, opposite the mouth of 
the river San Juan, of the province and govern 
ment of Choco. Twenty-six leagues from the cape 
of Corrientes, and is desert and uncultivated. 

PALMAS, another river, of the island of Gra 
nada, one of the lesser Antilles of the French. 
It runs e. and enters the sea in lat. 12 4 n. 

PALMAS. Some islands of the N. sea, near 
the coast of the province and government of Da- 
rien, and kingdom of Tierra Firme. They are 
many, and form a semi-circle between the island 
Pinos and the Playon Grande and the bay of 
Mandinga. 

[PALMER, a rough and hilly township in 
Hampshire county, Massachusetts, 63 miles a . 
by s. of Boston ; it is situated on the n. side of 
Ouebang river, and bounded e. by Western in 
Worcester county. An act passed in last session, 
1796, to incorporate a society to make a turnpike- 
road between these two towns. It was incor 
porated in 1752, and contains 809 inhabitants. J 

[PALMER S River, a water of Narraganset 
bay, which empties with another small river, and 
forms Warren river, opposite the town of Warren.] 

PALMERAS, PUNTA DE, a point on the coast 
of Los Humos, of the province and captainship of 
Seara in Brazil ; between the island Corubun and 
port Tortuga. 

[PALMERSTON S Island, of which one in 
particular has been so named, is in lat. 18 10 s. 
and long. 163 20 w. and is the second in situation 
from the s. e. of a group of 9 or 10, all known 
by the same general name. It affords neither 
anchorage nor water ; but if the weather is mo 
derate, a ship that is passing the s. Pacific ocean 
in this track, may be supplied with grass for 
cattle, cocoa-nuts, fish, and other productions of 
the island. The principal island is not above a 
mile in circumference ; nor is it elevated more 
than three feet above the surface of the sea.] 

[PALMETTO, the most e. point of the bay 
so called, on the s. w. coast of the island of S. 
Christopher s, in the W. Indies. The shore is 
rocky, and a fort protects the bay. Also the most 
n. point of the island of Jamaica ; having Ma 
natee bay on the w. and Island bay on the e.] 

PALMILLA, SAN LUCAS DE LOS, a settle 
ment of the head settlement of the district and 
alcaldia mayor of Guejozinco in Nueva Espana. 
It contains 77 families of Indians, and lies n. of 
its capital. 



PALMILLA, another settlement, with the de 
dicatory title of Santa Cecilia ; a reduction of 
Indians made by the missionaries of the order oi 
San Francisco, in the district and jurisdiction 
of the alcaldia mayor of Guadalcazar in Nueva 
Espana. It contains 40 families of Indians, with 
out those who live dispersed about its precincts, 
and is 20 leagues from the head settlement of the 
district of Tula. 

PALMILLA, another, of the province and go 
vernment of Sierra Gorda in the bay of M exico, 
and kingdom of Nueva Espana, founded in 
1740, by Don Joseph de Escandon, Count of 
Sierra (jorda, colonel of militia of Queretaro. 

[PALMISTE Point, on the n. side of the 
n. w. part of the island of St. Domingo, three 
leagues s. of point Portugal, the e. point of 
the small island La Tortue, and five e. of Port 
de Paix.J 

PALMISTES, PUNTA DE, a point on the s. 
coast of the island of S. Christopher, one of the 
lesser Antilles, betw r een the river Pentecoste and 
the rivulet of Pelau. 

PALMITAL, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Portoseguro in Brazil. It rises 
near the coast, runs n. n. w. and enters the river 
of Las Piedras. 

PALMITO, a river of the province and coun 
try of the Canclos Indians, in the kingdom of 
Quito, which runs e. n. e. and enters the Bobo- 
nasa by the w. shore, between the Caspi-yacu to 
the n. and the Chambira to the s. in lat. 137 s. 

PALMITO, a point of land of the n. coast of the 
island Jamaica, between the river Annoto and 
the bay of Orange. 

[PALMYRA, a town and the only port of 
entry and delivery in the state of Tennesse, 
constituted a port of entry by law of the United 
States, January 31, 1797.] 

PALO, COLORADO, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Quillota in the king 
dom of Chile ; situate on the coast at the mouth 
of the river Limari. 

PALO, ARECIFE DEL, an island near the coast 
of Vera Cruz in the bay of Mexico and kingdom 
of Nueva Espana, between the island Verde and 
La Anegada. 

PALOMAS, Is LA DE LOS, an island in the 
gulf of Venezuela, at the entrance or mouth of 
the lake of Maracaibo, to the n. of the city. It 
has a small settlement of the same name, and 
is in lat. 10 56 n. 

PALOMETA, a small river of the province 
and government of Santa Cruz de la Sieri a in 
Peru. It rises from some very lofty mountains 



P A M 

to the w. of the settlement of Los Desposorios, 
runs n. and enters the Piray. 

PALOMINO, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Revno 
de Granada, which rises in the sierra of the iPo- 
segueicas Indians, runs n. and enters the sea be 
tween the cape San Juan de Guia and the river 
Hacha. 

[PALOMINOS. Small islands on the coast 
of Peru, S. America ; three miles w. of St. Law 
rence island, or St. Lorenzo. They have from 
13 to 14 fathoms water on them.J 

PALOMOS, a barbarous nation of Indians, 
of the province of Gran Chaco in Peru. It 
extends from e. to w. from the river Bermejo, 
and the spacious llanuras of Manso to the s. 
These barbarians are ferocious, and issue from 
the woods to infest the neighbouring provinces ; 
and as a defence against them there is a fort 
called San Joseph, supplied by the Spaniards. 

[PALONQUE, the cape e. of Nisao point, 
at the mouth of Nisao river, on the s. side of 
the island of St. Domingo, in lat. 18 13 n. and 
long. 73 2 w. of Paris.] 

PALORA, a rapid river of the province and 
government of Macas in the kingdom of Quito, 
which rises in the province of Riobamba, to the 
n. of a lake of the mountain of Sangay, close to 
the settlement of Cebadas. It runs from w. to e. 
till it enters the Pastaza or Pastaca, and in the 
woods of its vicinity dwell some Indians of the na 
tion of Los Xibaros. Its mouth is in lat. 1 47 s. 

PALPA, a settlement of the province and cor- 
regimiento of lea in Peru ; situate on the shore 
of the Rio Grande, not far from the sea-coast. 

PALPACACHI, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Cotabambas in Peru : an 
nexed to the curacy of Huaillati. 

PALPAL, a small river of the kingdom of 
Chile in the province and corregimiento of Itala. 
It runs n.n.zv. and unites itself with the Temuco 
to enter the Dinguilli. 

PALPA S, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Caxatambo in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Gorgor. 

PALPAS, another settlement, in the same pro 
vince and kingdom as the former; annexed to 
the curacy of Churin. 

[PALTZ, NEW, a township on the w. side of 
Hudson s river in Ulster county, New York, 
about 18 miles n. of Newburgh, and 30 n.e. of 
Goshen. It contains 2309 inhabitants, including 
302 slaves.] 

PAMBAMARCA, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Lucanas in Peru. 



13 



PAMBAMARCA, a very lofty paramo or moun 
tain, always covered with snow, of the kingdom 
of Quito ; one of those chosen by the acade 
micians of the sciences at Paris, who visited this 
kingdom to measure one of the degrees of the 
equator, on which to make their observations. 
On it are seen the ruins of four fortresses of the 
Incas, called pucares, consisting of concentrical 
ditches of three or four rows, and in the interior 
one a wall or parapet. The exterior one, which 
was in general about two toises wide and as 
many deep, is in some parts so wide as to be 
seen at a league s distance ; and indeed it was 
altogether so ordered for the safety of the be 
sieged, that the inner border should command 
the exterior ones. At the top of this mountain 
there blows a constant wind, so strong that 
people can scarcely live in it. It is 20 milea 
with a slight inclination to the n. of Quito. 

PAIMAUNKE. See YORK. 

[PAMLICO Sound, on the e. coast of N. 
Carolina, is a kind of lake or inland sea, from 
10 to 30 miles broad, and nearly 60 miles in 
length. It is separated from the Atlantic ocean, 
in its whole length, by a beach of land hardly a 
mile wide, generally covered with small trees 
or bushes. Through this bank are several small 
inlets by which boats may pass ; but Ocrecok 
inlet is the only one that will admit vessels of 
burden into the districts of Edenton and Nevv- 
bern. This inlet is in lat. 34 54 n. and opens 
between Ocrecok island and Core bank. This 
sound communicates with Core and Albemarle 
sounds, and receives Pamlico or Tar river, the 
river Neus, besides other small streams. See 
OCRECOK, Cape HATTERAS, &c.] 

PAMPACHIRI, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Andahuailas in Peru. 

PAMPACOCHA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Canta, in the same kingdom 
as the former ; annexed to the curacy of Arahuay. 

PAMPACOLCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Condesuios de Arequipa in 
the same kingdom. 

PAMPACUCHO, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Chilques and Masques 
in the same kingdom. 

PAMPADEQUES, SAN PABLO DB, a settle 
ment of the missions which were held by the Je 
suits, in the province and government of Mainas 
of the kingdom of Quito. 

PAMPAHUACIS, a barbarous nation of waiv 
like Indians, who dwell n. of Cuzco ; subjected 
to the empire by Huayna Capac, thirteenth empe 
ror of the Incas, 



14 



P A M 



PAMPAMARCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Aimaraes in Peru. 

PAMPAMARCA, another settlement, in the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Parinacochas, of the 
same kingdom. 

PAMPAMARCA, another, of the province and 
corregimiento of Tinta or Canes, and Canches, 
same kingdom. , 

PAMPANO, a small river of the province and 
government of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada : it enters the lake Atole at a small 
space from its head. 

PAMPAQUINCHIS, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Yauyos in Peru ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Huanic. 

PAMPAROMAS, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Andahuailas in Peru ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Moro in the province of 
Santa. 

PAMPAS, a barbarous nation of warlike 
Indians of the kingdom of Peru ; extending n. 
and w. of the Paraguay, and bounded by Cordoba 
del Tucuman. 

PAMPAS, some extensive llanuras of the pro 
vince and government of Buenos Ayres, running 
s. for more than 300 leagues, as far as the pro 
vince ofCuyoof the kingdom of Chile. In them 
there lives some wandering barbarous nations of 
Indians, the Huarcas or Pampas, the Aucaes, 
Pehuenches, Pulches and Uncas;,who for the 
most part go about on horseback, robbing, 
plundering, and murdering the travellers which 
fall into their way : accordingly it is necessary, 
in passing from Peru to Chile, and vice-versa, 
that the carts (these being the vehicles used for 
the purpose) should go in large parties, so as to 
give a more effectual resistance to this race of 
banditti : nor is the same precaution unobserved 
by such as go to collect salt from the great 
saline grounds 200 leagues from Buenos Ayres ; 
this salt being extremely white, and of excellent 
quality, and employing, in conveying it, no less 
than 300 carts, which, although in close company, 
are not unfrequently attacked in their journey. 
They start about November, and are two months 
away on their rout. 

In these vast plains are found many tigers, 
leopards, ostriches, quiriquinchos or armadillos^ 
partridges, hares, and other animals. In the pas 
tures which are exceedingly fine, and in some 
parts so lofty as to cover a man on horseback, 
breed a great number of bulls, horses, and mules, 
descendants of those brought from Spain at the 
time of the conquest. Many troops of these 
wild animals, in their rout from one place to an- 



P A M 

other, will often meet and attack the unwary 
traveller, and even the aforesaid carts in their 
way from Buenos Ayres to Mendoza in the king 
dom of Chile. Sometimes proceeding- in multi 
tudes to drink at one of the many rivers which 
irrigate these parts, they will rush with such 
violence into the water that the foremost will be 
driven so deep into the mud by the pressure of 
those behind, as to be unable to extricate them 
selves, and there perish ; and this is the reason 
why there are constantly seen such heaps of 
bones on the banks of the abrevaderos or drink 
ing places. 

The Indians have an easy method of catching 
any of the above animals by a small cord of two 
yards long, with a ball of iron or stone at one 
end, at the other a piece of wood or some light 
substance : this they use as a sling, and such is 
their dexterity in throwing it that, without ever 
missing the animal aimed at amongst the vast 
herd, they cause it so to entwine its legs, that, in 
effort to escape, it immediately falls, and becomes 
an easy prey. 

Here are also many asses, by which, in this 
province as well as that of Tucuman, they produce 
a fine and numerous breed of mules, which are 
carried for sale to Peru. There are likewise 
many dogs, so voracious and bold, that, in lack of 
cattle to feed on, they will fall upon the people ; 
nor is it uncommon that, under such circum 
stances, travellers have been sacrificed to their 
greediness : these dogs will not merely attack 
cattle, but they will go in troops and fight the 
tiger, and although many of them, as is generally 
the case, will fall victims to their presumption, 
they never fail to be finally victorious, and glut 
themselves on its flesh : the same system of 
warfare they practise, but with less cost, upon 
the bulls. Those who have seen these engage 
ments represent them as horrible though extreme 
ly fine and amusing ; more so, perhaps, could 
they be witnessed in security. 

In these Pampas blow several strong winds 
very similar to hurricanes, which they call pam 
peros ; and so impetuous are they as to arrest the 
force and progress of the carts drawn by six oxen 
and with a load of upwards of 600 arrobas. 

PAMPAS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Yauyos in Peru, in the district 
of which is a road leading down to the settlement 
of Tupe, called de las cinco mil escalones (of the 
5000 steps), since it is asserted that there are this 
number in its descent. 

PAMPAS, another, of the province and corre 
gimiento of Gviailasci in the same kingdom. 



P A M 

PAMPAS, another, of the province and corregi- 
miento of Conchucos in the same kingdom ; annex 
ed to the curacy of Pallasca. 

PAMPAS, another, of the province and corregi- 
mienlo of Gunata in the same kingdom. 

PAMPAS, another, of the province and corre- 
gimicnto of Canta in the same kingdom ; annex 
ed to the curacy of Arahuay. 

PAMPAS, another, of the province and corre 
gimiento of Guailasci in the same kingdom ; dis 
tinct from that aforesaid, and annexed to the 
curacy of Marco 

PAMPAS, a large river, of the province and 
corregimiento of Lucanas in the same kingdom of 
Peru. It rises n. of the settlement of Sora, runs 
n. and enters the Apurimac, in the province of 
Guanta. It has a bridge of hurdles, of 30 yards 
long and one and an half wide, over which pass 
the goods on their way from Lima to Cuzco. 

PAMPAYATA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Aimaraes in Peru, an 
nexed to the curacy of Moro in the province of 
Santa. 

PAMPICHI, a settlement of the province and 
kingdom of Guatemala, annexed to the curacy of 
Amatitan, to which it is very near. 

PAMPLONA, a city of the province and corre 
gimiento of Tunga in the Nuevo Reyno de Gra 
nada : founded by Captain Pedro de Ursua and 
Orlien de Velasco in 1549, according to the 
order of the Most Illustrious Piedrahita, and not 
Miguel Diez de Armendariz, as the Ex-Jesuit 
Coleti asserts, in 1558. He gave it the name in 
memory of his native place of Ursua, capital of 
Navarra. It is situate on a plain or llano called 
Del Espiritu Santo, surrounded on all sides by 
mountains, which make its temperature extremely 
cold. It is very fertile, and abounding in cattle, 
vegetable productions, sugar- engines, and cotton 
munufactures, with all of which it has a greatcom- 
merce, as well as by gold and copper taken from 
some mines, the last of which and the best was 
discovered in 1765. 

The parish church is one of the handsomest 
buildings in the whole kingdom. Here are beau 
tiful houses, public edifices and squares, an her 
mitage which is a vice-parish, and in which is 
venerated an image of Christ crucified, with two 
of the thieves, all being fine pieces of sculpture ; 
some convents of the religious orders of San Fran 
cisco, Santo Domingo, San Agustin, a college 
which belonged to the Jesuits, an hospital, and a 
monastery of nuns of Santa Clara ; the which, 
together with the whole city, suffered much from 
an earthquake which happened in 1644. 



PAN 15 

Its jurisdiction extends as far as Tunja, 24 
leagues further on the part towards J iron, and 
the same distance to the e. and towards the town 
of San Christoval. It has, besides the governor, 
a corregidor of Indians, and an alcaldia mayor of the 
mines. It has been the native place of Fr. Fran 
cisco Vivar, of the order of San Francisco, a man 
of great virtue and science, 185 miles n. e. of 
Santa Fe, 124 n. e. of Velez, 156 w. s. w. of Trux- 
illo, 110 w. s. w. of Merida, and 131 w. with a 
slight inclination to the s. of Varinas, in lat. 7 1 
30 V/ n. and Ion. 72 21 w. 

PAMTICOE, an abundant river of the pro 
vince and colony of N. Carolina ; which runs s. e. 
and enters the sea in the strait of its name. 

This strait is formed by the coast of S. Carolina 
and the island of Hateras. 

[PAMUNKY, the ancient name of York river 
in Virginia ; but this name is now confined to 
the s. branch, formed by the confluence of the 
N. and S. Anna. This and the n. branch, Matta- 
pony, unite and form York river, just below the 
town of De La War.] 

PAMURACOCHA, a lake of the province and 
corregimiento of Parinacochas in Peru. It is long 
and narrow. 

PAN, BOCA DE, a creek of. the coast of the S. 
sea, in the province and corregimiento of Piura 
and kingdom of Peru ; situate in the bay of 
Tumbes. 

PAN, DE AZUCAR, a settlement of the province 
and government of Paraguay, situate near the 
strait of its name. 

PAN, another settlement, of the missions which 
were held by the Jesuits in the Orinoco, and 
now under the charge of the order of the Capu 
chins. 

PAN, a very lofty mountain, of a conical figure, 
on the shore of the river La Plata, at its entrance; 
in the province and government of Buenos Ayres, 
close to the river Solis Chico. 

PAN, another, on the s. coast of the strait of 
Magellan, at the mouth of the river Jelouzelt. 

PAN, another, on the n. e. coast of the island of 
Martinique, between the bay of S. Jacques and 
that of Charpentier. 

PAN, a strait or narrow pass formed by the 
river Paraguay, in the province of this name. 

[PANA^an island on the coast of Peru, 35 miles 
s. s. w. of Guayaquil. At point Arena, which is 
the n. w. point, all ships bound farther into 
Guayaquil bay stop for pilots, as there is good 
anchorage over against the middle of the town, 
in five fathoms, and a soft oozy ground. It is 
also called Puna.] 



16 P A N 

[PANACA, a burning mountain on the w. coast 
of New Mexico, about three leagues from the 
volcano of Sansonate.] 

PANACACHI, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Chayanta or Charcas in 
Peru. 

[PANADOU, or MENADOU, a bay on the 
coast of Cape Breton island, near the s. part of 
the gulf of St. Lawrence]. 

PANAMA, a city and capital of the kingdom 
and government of Tierra Firme ; founded on 
the coast of the Pacific or S. sea, upon an isthmus 
to which it gives its name, at the foot of a lofty 
mountain called Ancon. It was founded by 
Pedrarias Davila in 1518, in a part now called 
Panama la vieja (the old) where it was sacked 
and burnt in 1670 by the English pirate John 
Morgan, when it was in the following year trans 
lated to a league s distance by the Major-general 
Don Antonio Fernandez de Cordoba ; and was 
first fortified by Alonso Mercado de Villa-corta. 
It is irregularly and badly defended ; but has been 
one of the richest and most important towns of 
commerce in the whole world, as being the regular 
depot of all the goods going from Peru to 
Europe, before that the navigation of Buenos 
Ayres and of Cape Horn were so much practised. 

It is the head of a bishopric, created in 1521 ; 
has besides the cathedral, two parishes, one with 
the title of S. Felipe in the city, and another of 
the title of Santo Ava, in the suburbs without the 
wall, which are larger than the city itself: like 
wise the convents of the orders of San Francisco, 
S. Domingo, La Merced, the barefooted Angus- 
tins with the title of S. Joseph, a college which 
belonged to the Jesuits, with a seminary for stu 
dies, and an university founded by the bishop 
Don Francisco Xavier de Luna y Victoria in 
1571; an hospital of San Juan de Dios and a 
monastery of the nuns of Nuestra Senora de la 
Concepcion. 

In its early times it had a mint, which lasted but 
a short time. It was governed by a president 
and a tribunal of the royal audience, erected in 
1535, which was abolished in 1752, only a military 
o-overnor and viceroy being left. This city, 
from being once great and opulent, is reduced to 
a poor and miserable state from the decay of its 
commerce since that the galleons have ceased to 
go to Tierra Firme, and since that it had endured 
two dreadful conflagrations in 1737 and 1756. 
To the latter evil it was very liable, most of 
its houses being built of finely carved wood ; the 
cathedral, however, is of stone and of magnificent 
architecture. 



PAN 

The temperature of this city is burning hot. 
though the nights are fresh and agreeable. The 
territory is fertile but little cultivated, as the 
city is supplied with necessaries from the pro 
vinces and settlements of its jurisdiction, as well 
as from those of Peru by the S. sea, and from 
those of Europe and the foreign colonies by the 
N. sea, from whence it lies 11 leagues. It is ce 
lebrated for the meeting held in it by the Trium 
virate, who deliberated in 1525 concerning the 
discovery and conquest of Peru, who were Fran- 
ciso Pizarro, Diego de Almagro, and Hernando 
de Luque. 

The port is formed by some islands at the dis 
tance of two leagues and an half from the town, 
where vessels may lie sheltered from the winds. 
The tides are regular, and the high water is 
every three hours, when it runs to a great height, 
and falls with such rapidity as to leave three 
quarters of a league dry when down. 

The city of Panama has the arms which were 
granted it in 1521, by the emperor Charles V. 
with the title of very noble and very loyal ; a 
shield divided into a pale and gold field, having 
in the middle of the right side a yoke and a 
bundle of brown-coloured arrows, with blue 
points and silver feathers, this having been the 
device of the catholic kings : then in the other 
half, or the left side, two carvels, one above the 
other, and above them a star, which denoted the 
arctic pole, and in the orle of the shield castles 
and lions. It is the native place of father Agus- 
tin Hurtado, of the Jesuits ; put to death in the 
settlement of Gayes of the missions of Mainas, 
at the hands of the Indians, whilst instructing 
them in the faith in 1688 ; also of father Ignacio 
de Caceres, his companion. In lat. 9 30 n. 
loner. 79 19 w. 

Catalogue of the Bishops who have presided 
in Panama. 

1. Don Fr. Vicente de Valverde, a monk of 
the order of S. Domingo ; elected bishop of 
Santa Maria del Darien, the first church of the 
kingdom of Tierra Firme, in 1533. 

2. Don Fr. Juan de Quevedo ; a monk of the 
order of San Francisco, native of Bejori in the 
mountains of Burgos. He passed over to the 
church and returned to Spain, and had many 
disputes with Fr. Bartolome de los Casas, in 
presence of the emperor Charles V. on the sub 
ject of the liberty of the Indians, in which he 
was convinced and conquered by the bishop 
Casas ; he died at Barcelona. 

3. Don Fr. Juan de la Guardia, of the order 
of San Francisco, of whom we know no more 



PANAMA. 



17 



than that his name is mentioned in the catalogue 
of the bishops of that holy church. 

4. Don Fr. Martin de Bejar, of the order of 
San Francisco, native of Sevilla ; presented by 
the emperor Charles V. to be bishop of Santa 
Maria del Darien. In his time the See was 
translated to the city of Panama. 

5. Don Fr. Tomas de Berlanga, of the order 
of S. Domingo, native of the town of his name ; 
he passed to America, where he was provincial 
of his order, and elected bishop of Panama in 
1530. He renounced the bishopric in 1537 ; and 
died in his native place in 1551. 

6. Don Fr. Vicente de Peraza, of the order 
of S. Domingo, collegiate in the college of S. 
Gregorio de Valladolid. According to Fr. Alonso 
Fernandez, he was bishop in 1540. 

7. Don Fr. Pablo de Torres, of the order of 
S. Domingo, and not of San Geronimo, as Gil 
Gonzalez Davila wrongly asserts : he was bishop 
in 1560. 

8. Don Fr. Juan Vaca, of the order of S. 
Benito, abbot of the monasteries of Sahogun 
and Carrion ; presented by Philip II. to the 
bishopric of Panama, and died on his passage. 

9. Don Francisco Abrego, elected bishop of 
Panama in 1569 : he governed 15 years, and 
died in 1574. 

10. Don .Fr. Manuel de Mercado, of the order 
of San Geronimo : he entered Panama, and took 
possession of his bishopric in 1578, and died in 
1580. 

1 1 . Don Bartolome Martinez Menacho, native 
of Almendralejo in Estremadura, archdeacon of 
the holy church of Lima in 1587 : he was the 
first who made the visitation ; and passing to 
Santa Fe in 1593, he died at Cartagena. 

12. Don Pedro Duque de Ribera, collegiate 
of the college of Santa Maria de Jesus of Sevilla, 
and dean of the church of S. Domingo; elected 
bishop of Panama in 1594 : he also died at Car 
tagena, when about to take possession. 

13. Don Antonio Calderon, dean of the holy 
church of Santa Fe, bishop of Puerto-rico ; pro 
moted to the church of Panama in 1594 : he 
founded there a mass of the Virgin for every Sa 
turday, and another on Fridays, of Christ s pas 
sion ; he was promoted to the bishopric of Santa 
Cruz de la Sierra in 1605. 

14. Don Fr. Agustin de Carvajal, native of 
Mexico, of the order of S. Agustin, assistant ge 
neral of the same. When prior of his convent 
at Valladolid, he was elected to the bishopric of 
Panama, of which he took possession in 1608 : 
he consecrated the bells of its church, founded 

VOL. IV. 



the college of San Agustin with six collegiates, 
according to the Tridentine council, for the ser 
vice of the cathedral, and was promoted to the 
bishopric of Guamanga in 1612. 

15. Don Fr. Francisco de la Camera, of the 
order of S. Domingo : he passed to America as 
visitor of the provinces of Quito and Chile ; and, 
having finished the visitation, was presented to 
the bishopric of Panama, of which he took pos 
session in 1614 ; he endowed funds for two ad 
ditional collegiates in the college of San Agustin, 
and gave a prize of 300 dollars in the college of 
the Jesuits for promoting the study of the cases 
of conscience ; he also gave 4000 dollars for the 
finishing of the cathedral, which had been be 
gun, endowed two chaplains of the choir, and 
died in 1624. 

16. Don Fr. Christoval Martinez de Salas, 
Premonstratensian canon, native of Medina del 
Campo, definidor of his order, abbot of the con 
vent of Segovia, rector of the college of Santa 
Susana in Salamanca, and visitor-general of his 
order : presented by the king Don Philip IV. to 
the bishopric of Panama in 1625 ; endowed two 
masses sung to the Virgin on Wednesdays and 
Saturdays, gave 2000 dollars for building a col 
lateral chapel, and died blind and full of infir 
mities in 1640. 

17. Don Fr. Hernando Ramirez, a monk of 
the order of la Santisima Trinidad, native of the 
Arroyo del Puerco in the bishopric of Coria : he 
studied arts and theology in Salamanca, was 
vicar and preacher of the convent of Nuestra 
Senora de las Virtudes, procurator-general of 
his order at court, minister of the convents of 
Toledo, Fuente Santa, Alcala, and Talavera, 
commissary and visitor of the provinces of Ara- 
gon, Cataluna, and Valencia, provincial and 
vicar-general in that of Castilla ; elected bishop 
of Panama in 1640, he entered to take possession 
in 1643. In his time, when the city was on fire, 
he, abandoning his house to the flames, ran to 
save the sacred vases of the altar : he died in 
1652. 

18. Don Bernardo de Izaguivre, native of 
Toledo, fiscal of the inquisition of Cartagena of 
the Indies and of Lima, also inquisitor in the 
latter ; elected bishop of Panama in 1655 : he 
was promoted to the bishopric of Cuzco in 1660. 

19. Don Diego de Vergara, native of Lima, 
professor of sacred writings in its royal univer 
sity, penitentiary canon of its holy church, 
elected bishop of Panama in 1663 : he died be 
fore he could be consecrated. 

20. Don Sancho Pardo de Figueroa, native of 

n 



18 



PANAMA. 



Lima, dean of Truxillo, magisterial canon of the 
holy church of his native place : elected bishop 
of Panama in 1667, and promoted to the bishopric 
of Guamanga. 

21. Don Antonio de Leon, who was promoted 
to the bishopric of Truxillo in 1677, having been 
provisional president and captain-general by 
order of the king. 

22. Don Lucas Fernandez de Piedrahita, na 
tive of Santa Fe in the Nuevo Reyno de Gra 
nada, racionero and canon of this holy church, 
treasurer and chanter in the same, bishop of 
Santa Marta, and promoted to Panama in 1682 : 
he died in 1688. 

23. Don Diego Ladron de Guevara, collegiate 
mayor in the real de Alcala, canon of the cathe 
drals of Siqiienza and Malaga : presented to the 
bishopric of Panama in 1689, and promoted to 
that of Guamanga in 1699, when he was pro 
visional president. 

24. Don Fr. Juan de Arguelles, of the order 
of S. Agustin, native of Lima : elected bishop of 
Panama in 1694, and promoted to the bishopric 
of Arequipa. 

25. Don Fr. Manuel de Mimbela, of the order 
of San Francisco, native of Fraga in Aragon : 
he passed over as missionary apostolic to Zaca- 
tecas in Nueva Espana, where he was lecturer 
in theology, and twice guardian in his convent, 
and then returned to Spain as procurator-ge 
neral. After this, promoted to the church of 
Oaxaca ; and, before he took possession, to that 
of Guadalaxara. 

26. Don Fr. Juan Joseph de Llamas y Rivas, 
of the order of the Carmen Calzado, native of 
Murcia, provincial of his order in the province of 
Andalucia ; elected bishop of Panama, and after 
wards nominated provisional president, gover 
nor, and captain-general of the kingdom in 1716. 

27. Don Fr. Bernardo Serrada, of the order 
of Nuestra Seilora del Carmen Calzado, pro 
vincial in his religion ; elected bishop of Pa 
nama in 1720, and promoted to Cuzco in 1725. 

28. Don Agustin Rodriguez, curate of Hor- 
taleza in the bishopric of Toledo ; elected the 
aforesaid year of 1725, and promoted to La Paz 
in 1731. " 

29. Don Pedro Morcillo, who went as auxi 
liary bishop to Panama in 1732 : he died in 
1741. 

30. Don Fr. Diego de Salinas y Cabrera, of 
the order of San Agustin : he refused to accept 
the office. 

31. Don Juan de Castaneda, archdeacon of 
the holy cathedral church of Cuzco ; bishop of 



Panama in 1743, and promoted to that of Cuzco 
in 1749. 

32. Don Felipe Manrique de Lara, native of 
Lima; elected to the bishopric of Panama in 
1753, but he renounced it. 

33. Don Francisco Xavier de Luna y Vic 
toria, native of the same city of Panama ; founder 
of the university of San Xavier in the college of 
the Jesuits, presented to the bishopric of his 
native place in 1751, and to that of Truxillo in 
Peru in 1759. 

34. Don Manuel de Romani y Carrillo, native 
of Guamanza ; elected bishop in 1759, and pro 
moted to that of Cuzco in 1763. 

35. Don Miguel Moreno y Olio, native of Pa 
nama, canon of its holy church, commissary of 
the tribunal of the inquisition of Cartagena ; 
elected bishop in 1763, and promoted to Gua 
manga in 1770. 

36. Don Fr. Francisco de los Rios, of the or 
der of San Francisco ; elected, the above year, 
bishop of Panama : he died in 1777. 

37. Don Joseph Antonio Umeres de Miranda, 
inquisitor of the holy tribunal of La Fe in Car 
tagena of the Indies : elected bishop of Panama 
in 1777. 

Commandants-general, Presidents, and Gover 
nors, who have ruled in the Kingdom of Tierra 
Firme. 

1. Don Pedro Arias Davila, native of Segovia, 
brother of Count Punsolem-rostro ; elected by 
the emperor for his qualifications to command in 
Darien in 1514, where his glories were sullied 
from his having commanded, in a fit of passion, 
the heads of Vasco Nunez de Balboa and of 
Francisco Fernandez de Cordoba to be cut off : 
he governed until 1526, when his successor ar 
rived in, 

2. Don Pedro de los Rios, native of Cordoba, 
nominated on account of the complaints made 
against the former, and through the death of 
the Licentiate Lope de Sosa, also of Cordoba, 
who had been nominated, and had died suddenly. 
The clamours still persisting, the Licentiate An- 
tonio de la Gama was sent out as residentiary 
judge in 1528 ; and as successor to the govern 
ment was sent, 

3. Francisco de Barrionuevo, native of Soria, 
famed for his conquests in the islands of Puerto- 
rico and S. Domingo, appointed to the govern 
ment of Tierra Firme ; but receiving a commis 
sion to attend the treaty of pacification with the 
cazeque Enrique at S. Domingo, he did not take 
possession till 1533. 



PANAMA. 



19 



4. The Licentiate Pedro Vazquez de Acuna, 
who was nominated governor and residentiary 
judge ; and sore complaints having been raised, 
there was shortly sent out another in the per 
son of, 

5. Doctor Francisco Robles, with the same 
commission as the former : he entered on his of 
fice in 1539, filled it with prudence and justice; 
but whether it was the effect of the climate, or 
some malignant fate had sown the seeds of dis 
cord in this government, he could not escape, 
covered as he was with perfections, the shafts of 
calumny and malice. 

6. Pedro de Casaos, native of Sevilla, who, 
with the title of corregidor of Panama, was no 
minated by the king to govern it. In his time 
occurred the robberies and depredations per 
formed by Hernando Bachicao, captain Gon- 
zalo Pizarro. 

7. The Licentiate Don Pedro Ramires de Qui- 
nones, first president, with the title as such of 
that audience : he settled the existing disturb 
ances in the kingdom, and made war against the 
Negro Bayano, so as to succeed in restoring a 
perfect tranquillity. 

8. Juan de Bustos Villegas, who passed whilst 
governor of the plaza of Cartagena to the go 
vernment of Panama in 1551 : he died by a fall 
from his mule. 

9. The Licentiate Juan Lopez de Cepeda, 
who was oidor deacon of the island of S. Do 
mingo, when he went to Santa Fe in the same 
capacity : from thence he went to be alcalde del 
crimen of the audience of Panama, and promoted 
to Charcas in 1558. 

10. The Licentiate Francisco de Cardenas, the 
last robed president of Tierra Firme, from the 
establishment there of the commandancy-general 
of the kingdom, the city of Panama, its capital, 
being the place of arms, (plaza de armas): he 
died in 1594. 

11. Don Juan del Barrio Sepulveda, oidor 
deacon of the royal audience, provisional go 
vernor through the death of the former, and was 
holding the reins when arrived, 

12. Don Alonso de Sotomayor y Andia, Mar 
quis of Valparaiso, comendador of Villa-mayor in 
the order of Santiago, native of Tuxillo in Estre- 
madura, an officer of great credit in Flanders and, 
at Chile, where he had governed the king s ar 
mies : was at Lima, on his way to Europe, when 
he was nominated president of Panama, by the 
viceroy the Marquis of Canete, to defend the 
kingdom against an English armament, which, 
when arrived, he gloriously and completely re 



pulsed : he governed until 1596, when he passed 
to Spain. 

13. The aforesaid Juan del Barrio Sepul 
veda, oidor deacon of the audience, returned to 
be provisional governor till 1601, when there 



came, 



14. The same Don Alonso de Sotomayor, no 
minated by the king in consideration of his con 
duct and great ability in the fortification of the 
Plaza of Portobello, in company with the re 
nowned engineer Juan Baptista Antoneli. Al 
though he had received an order to proceed to 
the government of Chile, he embarked for Eu 
rope in 1605. 

15. Don Diego de Orozco, native of Lima. 

16. Don Rodrigo de Viveroy Velasco, in whose 
time the conquest and spiritual reduction of the 
Guaimies Indians of the province of Veragua 
was commenced by the religious order of S. Do 
mingo : his government ended in 1624. 

17. Don Alvaro de Quinones Osorio, knight 
of the order of Santiago, Marquis ofLorenzana : 
he governed until 1632, when he was promoted 
to the presidency of Guatemala. 

18. Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, pro 
moted from the presidency and captainship-gene 
ral of the Philippine isles in 1634, having held 
that of Panama only two years. 

19. Don Enrique Enriquez de Sotomayor, 
promoted from the government of Puertorico to 
this presidency, which he exercised until 1638, 
when he died, causing great sentiments of re 
gret. 

20. Don Inigo de la Mota Sarmiento, knight 
of the order of Santiago, chamberlain to his 
majesty the Archduke of Alberto, and of the 
supreme council and junta of war ; promoted to 
the government of Puertorico in 1639, and died 
at Portobello whilst assisting at the dispatch of 
the galleons under the charge of the general 
Don Francisco Diaz Pimienta, in 1642. 

21. Don Juan de Vega Bazan, who had been ad 
miral of galleons, nominated president, governor, 
and commandant-general of the kingdom of 
Tierra Firme. 

22. Don Juan de Bitrileante y Navarra, knight 
of the order of Calatrava : he died at Portobello, 
assisting at the dispatch of the armada of gal 
leons, commanded by admiral Don Juan de Ec- 
havarri, in 1651, as may be seen by the stone 
over his sepulchre in the church. 

23. Don Fernando de la Riva Aguero, knight 
of the order of Santiago, colonel, governor of 
Cartagena of the Indies, when he was nominated 
president of Panama : he died also at Porto~ 

D 2 



20 



PANAMA. 



bello, assisting at the dispatch of the galleons, in 
1663. 

24. Don Juan Perez de Guzman, knight of 
the order of Santiago, colonel, governor of Car 
tagena, and after having served in the militia 
and been governor of Antioquia and Puertorico, 
he was promoted to this presidency in 1665, 
through the death of the former. He went to 
retake the island of Santa Catalina, in the hands 
of the English pirate John Morgan, and was, 
nevertheless, deposed from the government by 
the viceroy of Peru, Count of Lemos, owing to 
some charges made against him by Don Bernardo 
Trilco de Figueroa, oidor deacon of that au 
dience. 

25. Don Agustin de Bracamonte, nominated 
provisional governor by the viceroy of Peru. 

26. The aforesaid Don Juan Perez, who was 
now fully and honourably acquitted of all the 
charges against him. In his time the city was 
ruined and destroyed by the English pirate in 
1670 ; when he was again suspended by the 
viceroy, and sent to answer for his conduct be 
fore the king. 

27. Don Antonio Fernandez de Cordoba, 
knight of the order of Santiago, nominated im 
mediately that the misfortune of the city was 
known, with orders to remove it to some more 
favourable spot. He accordingly embarked with 
a troop, called La Chamberga, and began to put 
his designs in execution on his arrival in 1671, 
when he died. 

28. Don Francisco Miguel de Marichalar, al 
calde del crimen of the royal audience of Lima, 
sent as provisional-governor by the viceroy, 
Count of Lemos : he ruled till the proprietor ar 
rived in 1676. 

29. Don Alonso Mercado de Villacorta, ma 
jor-general, who was serving as governor of the 
provinces of Tucuman, where he had performed 
singular services to the king. He was promoted 
to this presidency, and translated the city, as 
commanded, to the spot where it now stands ; 
who also began its fortification, as we find in 
scribed on the stone over the land-gates : but he 
died before he concluded his work, in 1681. 

30. Dr. Don Lucas Fernandez de Piedrahita, 
native of Santa Fe, bishop of the holy church of 
Panama, and celebrated author of the history of 
the conquest of the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. 
He entered through the death of the former, and 
through the nomination of the viceroy of Peru, 
Count of Castellar. Although he manifested great 
powers, his reign was of but short duration, 
since in 1602 the proprietor arrived. 



31. Don Pedro Ponte y Llerena, count of 
Palmar : he was the only president who ful 
filled the term of the appointment, eight years, 
and this, notwithstanding that certain charges 
were made against him by the ministers of that 
audience. 

32. Don Pedro Joseph Guzman, Davalos, 
Ponce de Leon, Santillan y Mesia, Marquis of 
La Mina, native of Sevilla, general of artillery, 
who, on account of his extraordinary services by 
sea and land, was nominated president of Pa 
nama, and commandant-general of the kingdom, 
of which office he took possession in 1690 : he 
governed five years, when by charges made 
against him, he was seized and treated with a 
rigour theretofore unexampled, being confined 
for four years without being allowed any com 
munication with any one whatever. 

33. Dr. Don Diego Ladron de Guevara, bi 
shop of that holy church : encharged with the 
government by the king until the arrival of the 
proper successor. 

34. Don Pedro Luis Henriquez de Guzman, 
Count of Canillas, knight of the order of Cala- 
trava, corregidor of Potosi : he took possession 
in 1696, and ruled to 1699, when, from the com 
plaints of the people against the violence offered 
to the Marquis of La Mina, a successor was no 
minated in, 

35. Don Joseph Antonio de la Rocha y Car- 
ranga, Marquis of Villa Rocha, knight of the 
order of Calatrava, general of the artillery in 
1699, when he entered into the presidency ; but 
he, in six months after, received a cedule, or 
dering him to give up the government to the 



same. 



36. Don Pedro Luis Henriquez de Guzman, 
Count of Canillas, on account of his having falsely 
given the king to understand of services he had 
performed for the kingdom, and robbing the go 
vernor of Cartagena, Don Juan Diaz Pimienta, of 
the honour of having routed the Scotch from 
Darien ; for he, the count, having barely sent 
home an account of the success, without mention 
ing who had performed it, the king nominated 
him as viceroy of Peru, by way of reward for his 
prowess ; but he did not reap any fruits of his 
stratagems, as he died the same year that he re 
ceived his appointment, in 1699. 

37. Don Fernando D Avila Bravo de Laguna, 
knight of the order of Santiago, major-general, 
native of Lima : he entered in 1702, and go 
verned till 1707, when he died. 

38. Don Juan Eustaquio Vicentalo, Tello, 
Toledo y Leca, Marquis of Brenes, knight of the 



PANAMA. 



21 



order of Santiago, native of Sevilla, nominated 
on the death of the former, by the viceroy of 
Peru, the Marquis of Casteldios-rius. He only 
governed five months when the successor ar 
rived, 

39. The aforesaid Marquis of Villa Rocha, 
whose reign was of no long duration, as he was 
suspended in a few days by a cedule transmitted 
at the the instigation of the audience, who had 
certain charges against him. 

40. Don Fernando de Haro Monterroso : he 
exercised the power for six months, until 1709, 
when the viceroy of Peru sent a minister of the 
audience of Lima to try him upon certain ex 
cesses which he had committed ; upon which he 
was taken prisoner to Spain, and died in a prison 
at the court of Madrid. 

41. Don Juan Baptista deOrueta y Irusta, al 
calde del crimen of the royal audience of Lima ; 
commissioned on the deposition of the former : 
he governed till 1710, when the successor no 
minated by the king arrived, himself returning to 
Lima to the execution of his office. 

42. Don Joseph de Larraneta y Vera, briga 
dier of the royal armies; serving in the govern 
ment of Portobello, with the optional quality of 
accepting the precedency and captainship-general 
of the kingdom, in case of a vacancy of the pre 
sent one, by a cedule from the king nominating 
him as it were viceroy : he took the reins in 
1710, and half of the following year had not 
elapsed before two successors arrived at once. 

43. The one, a person twice mentioned, the 
Marquis of Villa Rocha. His reign was so short 
that it could only be counted by hours, for hav 
ing reached the capital from the fort of Chapo, 
where he had been confined, he took possession, 
and at five in the evening of the same day ar 
rived, 

44. Don Joseph Hurtado de Amezaga, briga 
dier-general of the royal armies : he took pos 
session in 1711, and governed till 1716, when he 
was deposed by the king s order, deposition 
being committed to the charge of the bishop of 
that church, and the tribunal of audience being 
at the same time abolished. 

45. Don Fr. Juan Joseph de Llamas y Rivas, 
of the order of Nuestra Senora del Carmen, bi 
shop of Parama, who also by the above-men 
tioned commisson was encharged with the go 
vernment in 1716 ; and he held it till 1718, when 
arrived, 

46 Don Geronimo Vadillo, brigadier of the 
royal armies, promoted to the government of 
Cartagena, which he was then exercising, ac 



cording to the new establishment of five years 
provision in the governments which have no au 
dience : his government lasted till 1723. 

47. Don Gaspar Perez Buelta, who had been 
oidor of the audience then abolished, but which 
was by order of the king restored in 1723 : he 
was there provisional deacon for three months 
and an half, when he embarked for Peru ; pro 
moted to the audience of Lima at the beginning 
of 1724. 

48. Don Joseph de Alzamora y Ursino, who 
became deacon of the audience at the departure 
of the former, and as such encharged with the 
provisional government, the presidency and the 
commandancy-general, when in a month the pro 
prietor arrived. 

49. Don Manuel de Alderete, knight of the 
order of Santiago, field- marshal of the royal ar 
mies : he was promoted from the situation of 
viceroy of the Plaza of Cadiz to this presidency, 
and took possession in 1724 ; he governed till 
1730, when he was deposed, and taken captive 
to the castle of Chapo, and being sent from 
thence at the departure of registrar of the house 
of commerce, in the frigate of war the Ginovesa, 
which was wrecked upon the shoal of La Vivora, 
he was there drowned. 

50. Don Juan Joseph de Andia Vivero y Ve- 
lasco, Marquis of Villa-hermosa, brigadier-gene 
ral : he was governing at Cartagena, when he was 
promoted to the presidency of Panama, with a 
commission to depose the predecessor the afore 
said year of 1730 ; and having solicited a licence 
to return to Spain, he obtained the permission of 
his majesty, who exalted him to the rank of 
lieutenant-general, in 1735 ; and shortly after his 
arrival he was made grandee, with the title of 
Marquis de Valparaiso. 

51. DonDionisio Martinez de la Vega, briga 
dier-general of the royal armies ; promoted from 
the government to relieve the former governor in 
1735. He remained till 1743, when his successor 
arrived, nominated by the king. As a reward 
for his services in making a peace with the In 
dians, his majesty raised him to the rank of 
lieutenant-general, as also admitted him to be 
gentleman of the bed-chamber. In his time the 
English, commanded by admiral Vernon, took 
the city of Portobello and castle of Chagre : he 
died at Panama in 1744, whilst arranging his 
voyage to Spain. 

52. Don Dionisio de A^edo y Herrera, who 
had served in the presidency of Quito and com 
mandancy-general of this kingdom, and found 
himself at court when nominated by the king to 



22 



proceed to Panama, and to undertake the de 
fence of Tierra Firme, threatened by invasion 
from the English from the year 1739. He was 
charged with different commissions, on account 
of his knowledge of America and his zeal in the 
service of his king ; fulfilled his important duties 
with the greatest ability till 1749, when he was 
separated from his office through some calumnies 
made against him by the oidors of that audience, 
the origin of all the discords of this province. 
During his government he chastised the smug 
glers of the province of Nata, who to the num 
ber of 200, and supported by the English, had 
taken up arms against his majesty : he returned 
to Spain, where he was honourably acquitted. 

53. Don Manuel de Montiano, brigadier-gene 
ral of the royal armies : he was promoted from the 
government of Florida, and entered Panama in 
1749, when the audience was abolished through 
the representations made by the former, proving 
it to be the only means whereby to ensure the 
tranquillity of the government, as was in fact 
proved till 1750, when arrived, 

54. Don Antonio Guill, colonel of the regi 
ment of infantry of Guadalaxara, a man of great 
talent, virtue, and military experience : he was 
shortly removed to the presidency and captain 
ship-general of Chile in 1761, his short reign 
being universally regretted. 

55. Don Joseph Raon, brigadier of the royal 
armies : he governed for little more than two 
years, as having been removed to the presidency 
and captainship-general of the Philippine isles in 
1763. 

56. Don Joseph Blasco de Orozco, knight of 
the order of San Juan, colonel of the regiment of 
infantry of Burgos : he passed over to this go 
vernment in the aforesaid year, and died in 
1767. 

57. Don Vicente de Olaziregui, colonel of the 
regiment of infantry of Granada : he governed in 
1769, and died in 1773. 

58. Don Pedro Carbonel, colonel of the regi 
ment of infantry of Aragon, nominated in 1775 : 
he governed till 1779. 

59. Don Ramon de Carvajal, colonel of infan 
try, who was governing at Vique in the province 
of Catalujaa, when he was destined to the go 
vernment of Guayaquil in the kingdom of Quito, 
and before he took possession was promoted to 
this of Panama in 1780 ; which he exercised till 
1785, when the king nominated a successor in, 

60. Don Joseph Domas, brigadier of the royal 
armada, nominated in 1785. 

PANAMA, or DEL DARIEN Isthmus, a wide 



PAN 

strip of land uniting N. and S. America, washed 
on the n. by the N. sea, and on the s. by the 
Pacific or S. sea, and forming the gulf of Pa 
nama. Its width from the mouth of the river 
Chagre in the N. sea, to that of the river Cai- 
mito or Capina in the S. is 41 miles, and at its 
narrowest part, namely, from the mouth of the 
river Bayame in the gulf of Panama, to the bay 
of Mandinga in the N.sea, it is 20 miles only. 
Its length from e. to w. is more than 200 miles. 
The cordillera of the Andes mountains, which are 
the lowest here, traverses its whole length, and 
then splits itself into several branches in N. Ame 
rica. This isthmus belongs in part to the pro 
vince of Tierra Firme, and in part to that of 
Darien. The climate is nearly throughout hot 
and moist. It takes its name from the city of 
Panama, which is situate upon it, on the shore 
of the S. sea ; and in the opposite part, to the n. 
is Portobello, where there used to be celebrated 
the large fair of merchandizes on the arrival of 
the galleons, inasmuch as all the riches that 
were carried from Peru to the mother-country 
were brought by this isthmus, as also the effects 
returned from Spain to the former; the same 
being carried by a round-about journey of 18 
leagues, owing to the asperity of the mountains 
and the immensity of the rivers that obstructed 
a direct communication. 

In the time of Philip II. it was projected to 
cut through this isthmus and to unite the two 
seas ; and accordingly two Flemish engineers 
were sent to reconnoitre it, but they found in 
superable difficulties; and the council of the In 
dies having represented the mischief which might 
ensue to the monarchy in case the idea were 
carried into effect, it was ordained by the Spanish 
government, that no one should afterwards treat 
on the subject on pain of death. Eugenic Ray- 
nondi calls it Strait San Miguel, but improperly, 
as there is no communication between the two 



seas. 



[Of all the subjects, either of political or com 
mercial consideration, relating to the continent 
of America, none perhaps is of greater moment 
than this idea of the communication of the At 
lantic and Pacific oceans. For a diffuse disqui 
sition on this topic, as likewise of the relative 
facilities for effecting the same object with re 
gard to other parts of America, see Index to 
new matter respecting MEXICO, Chap. X.J 

[PANAMBUCO, a harbour or bay on the 
coast of Brazil. See PERNAMBUCO.] 

PANAO, a settlement of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Guanuco in Peru; annexed to the 



PAN 

curacy of Santa Maria del Valle ; situate on the 
confines of the Panataguas Indians. 

[PANAPA Island of the Orinoco. See Vol. HI. 
p. 491. of this Dictionary.] 

PANAQUIRE, a settlement of the province 
and government of Venezuela and NuevoReyno 
de Granada, founded in the seventeenth century 
for the greater convenience of commerce, after 
the establishment of the Guipuzcoanan com 
pany. 

PANATAGUAS, a barbarous nation of In 
dians of the kingdom of Peru, inhabiting the 
country bounded n. and e. by the province of 
Guanuco. From them are descended many other 
nations of different names, some of them having 
been reduced to the faith by the missionaries of 
the order of San Francisco in 1631 ; and although 
they once rebelled, putting to death their priests 
and flying to the mountains, they again returned 
to their obedience, since they are of a pacific 
and docile disposition ; and the first settlements 
which were made of them, have been ever since 
rapidly enlarging. 

PANCHES, a province and corregimiento of 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. Its length is 15 
leagues from e. to w. and its width 12 from n. to 
s. of an hot temperature and rough and craggy 
territory, full of mountains and ravines. It is 
watered by several rivers, the largest and principal 
of which is the Bogata. It is fertile in maize and 
vines, of which there are two gatherings yearly, 
although commercial regulations have prohibited 
the making of wine here. Here are, however, 
many sugar engines for the manufactory of sugar 
from the abundance of the canes. 

Its natives, and from whom it takes its name, 
are the most strong, robust, and valorous of any 
in the kingdom ; ferocious, of warlike appearance, 
and cannibals. They are at continual war with 
the Muzos, and did not marry the women of the 
same settlement, looking upon such as sisters : 
they adored the sun and moon, and although their 
number, with regard to other nations, was not 
large, they were so much feared by all, that the 
Zipas of Bogota had a garrison of them in the 
settlements on the boundary of their jurisdiction. 
Their arms were bows and arrows and wooden 
clubs. The greater part of them, at the present 
day, live in the woods and mountains. 

This province was conquered by Captain Venegas 
Carrillo, after that it had been attempted in vain 
by other Spaniards; but they have frequently 
risen in their different settlements and committed 
shocking murders. The capital is Tocaima. 

PANCHIMILCO, SAN JUAN DE, a settle- 



PAN 23 

ment of the head settlement of the district of 
Mazatepec, and alcaldia mayor of Cuernavaca, 
in Nueva Espana, on the shore of a river. It 
produces much maize, fruit, and cotton. Is five 
leagues from its head settlement, very close to 
the settlement of Tetelpa ; and contains only 26 
Indian families. 

PANCICHA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Porco in Peru, on the shore of 
the river Pilcornayo. 

PANCITARA, a settlement of the province 
and government of Popayan, in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada. 

PANCRACE, S. a port of the w. coast of the 
river S. Lawrence in Canada, between the ri 
vers S. Nicholas and English. 

PANDABEQUES, a barbarous nation of In 
dians inhabiting the country of Las Amazonas, 
to the s. of the river Maranon or Amazons, and 
bounded by the Chingacuchuscas : reduced to 
the faith in 1652 by the missionaries of the Jesuits, 
who formed of them a settlement dependent upon 
that of Xiaweos, in the province of Muinas. 

PANDIYACU, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Pasto in the kingdom of 
Quito. 

[PANDO, a parish of the province and govern 
ment of Buenos Ayres, situate on the small river of 
this name, near the sea-coast about 20 miles n. e, 
of Monte Video, inlat. 34 41 18", Ion. 55 49 4".] 

PANDO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Buenos Ayres in Peru, which runs s. and 
enters the Plata at its mouth, betwen the rivers 
Solis Chico and Monte Video. 

PANDOMINE, a chain of mountains of the 
province and corregimiento of Loxa, in the king 
dom of Quito, between the mountains Colay- 
Sacapy to the n. e. and Sosoranga to the s. w. 
It runs from n. w. to s. e. and unites itself with 
the chain of Pichinche. 

PANDIERO, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Sicasica, in Peru, eight 
leagues from its capital. 

PANECILLO, a small mountain in the llanura 
of Callo, in the province and corregimiento of 
Latacunga, and kingdom of Quito to the n. It is 
thought to have been made by the Indians, and 
stands near the antient palace of the princes of 
this kingdom, to serve as a place of look-out, 
from whence the whole of the surrounding coun 
try may be viewed. It is 85 fathoms high, mea 
sured perpendicularly ; is the figure of a very 
regular truncated cone ; and on the s. side it is 
washed by the river Callo ; and may be well dis 
covered by the height of Tio-pullu, and from the 



24 



PAN 



llanura of Mula-halo, as you proceed along the 
river Alajes, in lat. 44 32" s. 

PANECILLO, another, a small mountain of the 
same figure, and 100 Parisian toises high, near 
the city of Quito, and having at its skirts some 
houses of the suburbs. From its top may be 
seen the llanuras of Turu-bamba to the s. and of 
Inaquito Onaquito to the n. The skirts of this 
mountain are cultivated and sown with wheat, 
and in it is a quarry, from whence stone is ex 
tracted in large pieces for the works of the city. 
It had formerly a subterraneous rout cut through 
it by order of the prince, the symptoms of which 
are still observable on the part by Chimba-calle. 
In this mount spring various streams of delicious 
water, towards the Dominican convent, the best 
of which is drank at Quito. 

PANERIA, a river of the province and corre- 
gimiento of Pasto, in the kingdom of Quito, 
which runs e. and enters the Guames. 

PANGOA, a river of the province and cone- 
gimiento of Caxamarquilla, in Peru. 

PANGORA, a river of the province and corre- 
gimiento of Guanta in Peru. It rises in the pro 
vince of Castro- Virreyna, runs e. then turns n. 
and returning to e. unites itself in a large stream 
with the river La Sal, and these together run into 
the Angoyaco. 

PANGUE, a small river of the province and 
corregimiento of Maule, in the kingdom of Chile, 
which runs n. n. w. and enters the river Maule. 

PANHANONS, a river of the province and co 
lony of Pensylvania, in N. America, which runs n. 
then turns w. and enters the Ohio. 

PANIAS, a tribe of Indians of the province 
and government of Louisiana, where the French 
have a fort. They live in a settlement, situate 
on the shore of the river Arkansas. 

[With these Indians, the idea of the possession 
of soil is similar to that of the Ottoes. They 
hunt on the s. side of the river Plate, higher up 
and on the head of the Kanzas. A great pro 
portion of this country consists of open plains, 
interspersed however with groves of timber, 
which are most generally found in the vicinity of 
the water-courses. It is generally fertile and 
well watered : lies level, and free of stone. They 
have resided in the country which they now in 
habit since they were known to the whites. 
Their trade is a valuable one, from the large pro 
portion of beaver and otter which they furnish; 
and it may be expected yet to increase, as those 
animals are still abundant in their country. The 
periods of their residence at their village and 
hunting are similar to the Kanzas and Osages. 



P A IN 

Their population is increasing. They are friend 
ly and hospitable to all white persons ; pay great 
respect and deference to their traders, with whom 
they are punctual in the payment of their debts. 
They are, in all respects, a friendly, well-dis 
posed people. JThey cultivate corn, beans, me 
lons, &c.] 

[PANIAS LOUPS, or WOLVES. These In 
dians are a branch of the Panias Proper, who sepa 
rated themselves from that nation many years 
since, and established themselves on a n. branch of 
the river Plate, to which their name was given. 
These people have no idea of an exclusive right 
to any portion of country. They hunt on the 
Wolf river, above their village, and on the river 
Plate, above the mouth of that river. This 
country is very similar to that of the Panias Pro 
per, though there is an extensive body of fertile 
well-timbered land between the Wolf river, be 
low their village, and the river Corn de Cerf, or 
Elkhorn river They cultivate corn, beans, &c. 
The particulars related of the other Panias are 
also applicable to them. They are seldom visited 
by any trader, and therefore usually bring their 
furs and peltry to the village of the Panias Pro 
per, where they traffic with the whites.] 

[PANIAS PIQUE. These Indians have no inter 
course with the inhabitants of the Illinois ; the 
information, therefore, which we have been ena 
bled to obtain, with respect to them, is very 
imperfect. They were formerly known by the 
name of the White Panias, and are of the same 
family with the Panias of the river Plate. They 
are said to be a well-disposed people, and inhabit 
a very fertile country ; certain it is that they 
enjov a delightful climate.] 

[PANIAS REPUBLICANS, are a branch of Pania 
Proper, or, as they are frequently termed, the 
Big Paunch Indians. About ten years since they 
withdrew themselves from the mother-nation, 
and established a village on a large northwardly 
branch of the Kanzas, to which they have given 
name ; they afterwards subdivided and lived in 
different parts of the country, on the waters of 
Kanzas river ; but being harassed by their tur 
bulent neighbours, the Kanzas, they have lately 
rejoined the Panias Proper What has been said 
with respect to the Panias Proper is applicable 
to these people, except that they hunt principally 
on the Republican river, which is better stocked 
with timber than that hunted by the Panias.] 

PANICO, a settlement and alcaldia of the 
Portuguese, in the kingdom of Brazil, between 
the rivers Corixes and Tocantines, nearer the 
shore of the former than the second. 



P A N 



PAN 



PANIMA, a settlement of the province and 
government of Louisiana on the shore of the river 
Arkansas, with a fort built by the French. 

PANIMAHA, a settlement of the nation of 
the Bread Indians, in N. America, on the shore 
and at the source of the river Panis. In its 
vicinity are other settlements. 

PANIMALIAS, a settlement of Indians of the 
same nation as the former, situate also on the 
shore of the river by the other small settlements. 

PANINDIQUARO, SAN ANDRES DE, a set 
tlement of the head settlement of Puruandiro, and 
alcaldia mat/or of Y r alladolid, in the province and 
bishopric of Mechoacan ; situate in a flat bottom, 
of a hot and moist temperature, and containing 32 
families of Indians, who cultivate some wheat in 
its district: 18 leagues s. w. of Pasquaro. 

PANIO VASAS, a settlement of Indians of the 
province and government of Louisiana, on the 
shore of a small river which enters the Padoukas. 

PANIS, a settlement of Indians of the nation 
of this name, in the province and government of 
Louisiana in N. America, where the French had 
an establishment defended bv a fort. It is sur 
rounded with two small settlements on the shore 
of the river of its name. 

PANIS, another settlement, in the same pro 
vince, on the shore of the river Missouri, where 
also the French had a fort and establishment ; 
and round about it are upwards of 40 small set 
tlements of Indians. 

[The Indian tribe mentioned in the two above 
settlements, are called by the French Panis, 
and by the Spaniards Towiaches : the latter is 
the proper Indian name. They live on the s. 
side of Red river, by the course of the river, 
upwards of 800 miles above Natchitoches ; and 
by land, by the nearest path, it is estimated at 
about 340. They have, at present, two towns 
near together ; the lower town, where their chief 
lives, is called Niteheta, the other is called 
Towaahach. They call their present chief the 
Great Bear. They are at war with the Spaniards, 
but friendly to those French and American hun 
ters who have lately been among them. They 
are likewise at war with the Osages, as are 
every other nation. For many hundreds of miles 
round them the country is rich prairie, covered 
with luxuriant grass, which is green summer 
and winter, with skirts of wood on the river bank, 
by the springs and creeks. 

They have many horses and mules. They 
raise more corn, pumpkins, beans, and tobacco, 
than they want for their own consumption ; the 

VOL. IV. 



surplus they exchange with the Hietans for buf 
falo, rugs, horses, and mules. The pumpkin 
they cut round in its shreads, and w r hen it is 
in a state of dryness, that it is so tough it will 
not break but bend, they plait and work it into 
large mats, in which state they sell it to the 
Hietans ; who, as they travel, cut off and eat it 
as they want it. Their tobacco they manufacture 
and cut as fine as tea, which is put in leather 
bags of a certain size, and is likewise an article 
of trade. They have but few guns, and very 
little ammunition ; what they have they keep for 
war, and hunt with the bow. Their meat is 
principally buffalo ; seldom kill a deer, though 
they are so plentiful as to come into their villages, 
and about their houses, like a domestic animal. 
Elks, bears, wolves, antelopes, and wild hogs, 
are likewise plentiful in their country, and white 
rabbits, or hares, as well as the common rabbit : 
white bears sometimes come down amongst them, 
and wolves of various colours. The men gene 
rally go entirely naked, and the w r omen nearly 
so, only wearing a small flap of a piece of a skin. 
They have a number of Spaniards among them, 
of fair complexion, taken from the settlement of 
Santa Fe, when they were children, who live as 
they do, and have no knowledge of the place 
from whence they came. Their language differs 
from that of any other nation, the Tawakenoes 
excepted. Their present number of men is esti 
mated at about 400. A great number of them, 
about six years ago, were swept off by the small 
pox.] 

PANIS, a river of the territory in which the 
Indians of this name reside. It runs e. and 
enters the Missouri, in lat. 39 44 n. 

PANO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Quixos and Macas, in the kingdom of 
Quito, which runs e. and uniting itself with the 
Tena enters the Hollin, in lat. 58 s. 

PANOJOUIS, a barbarous nation of Indians, 
little known, who inhabit the country of Las 
Amazonas, between the rivers Tigre and Cura- 
ray : from these are descended the Semigals. 

PANONKE, a lake of the province and colony 
of Sagadahook, formed from the river Penob- 
scot, at its mid-course ; on the confines of Nova 
Scotia, or Acadia. 

PANOS, a barbarous and numerous nation of 
Indians of the province of Las Amazonas, dwell 
ing in the woods near the river Ucayale to the e, 
bounded n. by the nation of the Cocamas, and s. 
by those of the Piros and Cunivos. They are 
ferocious, treacherous, and cruel : some were 



PAN 



PAN 



reduced to a settlement in 1608 ; but they rose in 
1723, and again retired to their native woods. 

[PANSE, DE LA, a branch of Wabash river, in 
the N. W. territory.] 

PANTALEON, 5. a settlement of the pro 
vince and government of Sonora in N. America, 
of the country and territory of the Apaches In 
dians ; on the shore of a river, between the set 
tlements of Rosario and San Eugenio. 

PANTALEON, another settlement, of the pro 
vince and government of Buenos Ayres in Peru ; 
situate on the shore and at the source of the 
river Las Conchas, and s. of the capital. 

PANTALEON, a lake of the same province and 
government as the former settlement, near the 
shore of the river Saladillo. 

PANTEPEC, a settlement and head settle 
ment of the district of the alcaldia mayor of 
Guauchinango in Nueva Espana. It contains 
470 families of Otomies and Totonacos Indians, 
and its territory is the most fertile of the whole 
jurisdiction ; producing in abundance, cotton, 
chile, tobacco, sugar, wax, maize, French beans, 
and various fruits. In its district are five wards, 
and it is 22 leagues n. of its capital. 

PANTEPEC, another settlement, of the pro 
vince and alcaldia mayor of Los Zoques in the 
kingdom of Guatemala. 

PANTIPATA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Abancay in Peru. 

[PANTON, a township in Addison county, 
Vermont ; situate on the e. side of lake Champ- 
lain, between Addison and Ferrisburg, and 
about 87 miles n. of Bennington. It contains 
200 inhabitants.] 

PANUAYA, a river of the province and cor 
regimiento of Mexico in Nueva Espana, which 
rises in the mountains of the sierra Nevada, and 
runs to empty itself in the lake of Chalco. 

PANUCO, a province and alcaldia mayor of 
Nueva Espana : bounded w. by theNuevo Reyno 
de Leon, and by one part of the audience of 
Guadalaxara, e. by the gulf of Mexico, 5. by the 
province of Tlaxcala and that of Mexico, and w. 
by the kingdom of Mechoacan. The tropic of 
Cancer traverses this province, so that it lies 
partly in the torrid, partly in the temperate 
zone ; 55 leagues long, and nearly the same wide. 
The part bordering upon the province of Mexico 
is the best and most fertile, and abounding in 
provisions, and having some gold mines and 
several salt earths ; but the other part, which 
is bounded by Leon, is miserable and barren. 
This country was one of the first discovered by 



Hernan Cortes, but its conquest and settlement 
caused him infinite labours. It is rather fertile 
and pleasant than rich, and by no means po 
pulous. 

PANUCO, the capital, situate on the shore of a 
river, from whence it takes its name; 39 miles 
from the sea, and 143 n. with a slight inclination 
to the e . of Mexico : founded by order of Her 
nan Cortes in 1520, with the title of San Estevan 
del Puerto. It contains about 500 families, and 
consists of some very neat houses of stone with 
roofs of palm leaves. The river is navigable for 
large vessels much above the city ; but the port 
has at its entrance a bar, so as to impede the 
passage of the vessels from coming up: a great 
disadvantage to its commerce. It is in lat. 
22 48 w. and long. 98 52" w. 

PANUCO, a settlement and real of silver mines, 
of the alcaldia mayor of Fresnillo in Nueva Es 
pana : of a small population, as being near to 
the city of Zacatecas, about three leagues dis 
tant. 

PANUCO, another settlement, of the province 
and government of Tucuman in Peru ; situate 
n. n. w. of the town of San Fernando. 

PANUELO, QUADRADO, a large square 
sand-bank, having in the midst several small 
isles, some of which are called Los Abrojos, 
and on which many vessels have been lost. 
This bank is n. of cape Rojo of S. Domingo, 
and e. of Los Caicos. 

PANUN, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Chancay in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Canchas. 

PANZACOLA, a city and garrison of Flo 
rida, in the province of its name ; situate in the 
bay of Santa Maria de Galve : founded by D. 
Andres de Aveiola, by order of the viceroy of 
Nueva Espana, the Count de Galve, in 1596. 

It was formerly small, and is of a moderate 
temperature, the heat or cold never being ex 
cessive at the different seasons. The territory 
although sandy is fertile, and yields abundantly 
of whatsoever is sowed. It produces many wild 
fruits, such as bitter acorns, two kinds of wal 
nuts, the one of which is very delicate, medlars 
and chesnuts, which have the appearance of nuts, 
and are of the same taste as the Spanish nuts, 
and vines which yield large grapes of a purple 
colour and somewhat sour. 

In the forests are various sorts of wood, pine, 
sassafras, savines, and oaks ; of animals, as deer> 
cebolos, bears, and also of fowl as large as the 
turkies of Europe. 



PAO 

In 1719 this city was taken by the French, 
but restored in the same year by Alfonso Car- 
rascosa de la Torre, who constructed at the point 
of Sigiienza, one of those which form the en 
trance of the bay, a fort with the name of Prin 
cipe de Asturias; but the French, commanded 
by Count de Chamelin, returned again to attack 
it with a naval force, against which Don Afonso 
Carrascosa, with very limited means, in vain 
made an intrepid defence, and it was eventually 
burnt and destroyed. In 1762 it was ceded to 
the English by the peace of Versailles, and in 
1781 it was conquered and regained by the Spa 
niards under Count de Galves. Forty-five miles 
e.s.e. of Mobile, in lat. 30 33 n. and long. 78 
22 w. 

PAO, CONCEPCION DE, a town of the pro 
vince of Barcelona and government of Cumana : 
founded in 1744 by some islanders of La Marga 
rita and Trinidad, and other inhabitants of the 
Caracas who had their cattle and estates in this 
province ; situate at the source of the river of 
its name, and in its district its inhabitants, who 
(of all classes, should amount to 636 souls) have 
30 estates, consisting of some narrow glens 
planted Mith maize and yucas, also 19 farms of 
the larger cattle. 

The soil is the richest and most fertile of the 
province, and the natives being very laborious, 
it is extremely well furnished with provisions ; 
and its population, though small, instrumental 
to the guarding against invasion from the Ca- 
ribes Indians in the settlements of the missions 
of the Orinoco and llanos of San Juan. The 
geographer, Don Juan de la Cruz, places this 
city, in his map of S.America, in the province of 
Venezuela, to the 5. of the city of Valencia ; 
[but this is very erroneous, as it is situated 92 
miles s. by to. of Barcelona, 82 n.w. of St. Tome, 
and 152 s. e. of Caracas, in lat. 8 43 n. and 
long. 65 10 w.~\ 

PAO, SAN JUAN BAUTISTA DEL, a city of the 
province and government of Venezuela. Its 
population is 5400 souls. It has a large trade 
in horses, mules, and horned cattle, and a vast 
quantity of cheese is made here. The air is 
wholesome. The river Pao runs to the e. of the 
city, its course is n. and s. It discharged itself 
formerly into the lake of Valencia, but by a re 
volution of nature it is now made to fall into the 
Apure, and thus contribute to swell the Orinoco. 
A canal might easily be cut from about the 
source of the Pao to join the Orinoco, which 
would be of vast benefit to commerce, inasmuch 
as the trade from Venezuela to Guayana would 



PAP 



27 



not be liable to the interruption of enemies 
cruizers, and, in the event of an invasion of the 
latter province, it might receive early succour 
from the former. The city of Pao is in lat. 
9 22 n. and long. 68 21 w. and lies 105 miles 
s. w. of Caracas. 

PAO, a river of the former province and go 
vernment of Barcelona, and known also by the 
name of Macuros. It is large and abundant, 
rises at the back of the serrania, to the s. of the 
table-land of Guanipa, runs s. e. and collects 
some streams by the s. w. Near its source dwell 
some barbarian Indians of the Ivarecipes and 
Peritos Indians. It abounds in small fish, and 
on its shores grows excellent cacao. The geo 
grapher Cruz is also wrong respecting the course 
of this river, when he gives its source in the pro 
vince of Venezuela, and makes it enter the Por- 
tuguesa; the fact being that it runs into the 
Orinoco, 48 miles w. of St. Tome, and from 
whence it is navigable as far as the town of 
its name. Its mouth is on the n. shore of the 
Orinoco, in lat. 8 5 n. 

PAO, another, a small river in this province, 
which rises in the country and territory of the 
Pandacotos Indians, between the rivers Paragua 
and Arvi, runs n. and turning at mid-course to 
w. enters the latter of those two rivers. 

PAO, another, with the surname of Amarillo. 
in the province and captainship of Itamaraca in 
Brazil. It rises near the coast, runs e. and en 
ters the sea between the Doce, or Dulce, and the 
town of La Concepcion and fort of Orange. 

PAOBONCA, an island of the river Parana- 
pane, in the province and captainship of Rio 
Janeiro in Brazil. 

PAOS, a barbarous nation of Indians who dwell 
n. of the river Orinoco, and s. of the Apure. 
These barbarians are bounded w. by the Oto- 
macos, and n. w. by the Iraruros. Their con 
version was begun by the Jesuits in 1722. 

[PAPAGAYO, a gulf on the n. Pacific ocean, 
and on the w. side of the isthmus of Nicaragua, 
a small distance from the w. parts of the lake of 
Nicaragua, and in about lat. 11 10 n.~\ 

PAPAGAYOS, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Cuyo in the kingdom of 
Chile, n. of the town of Corocoto. 

PAPAGAYOS, a bay, called also Puerto Sil- 
vestra, on the e. coast of the strait of Magellan, 
between cape Verde and cape S. Valentin. 

PAPAGAYOSO, a settlement of the province 
and captainship of S. Vicente in Brazil, at the 
source of a small river which enters the Uru 
guay. 



28 PAP 

PAPAGUAI, a mountain of Cayenne, on the 
skirts of which the French have an establish 
ment. 

PAPALLACTA, a settlement, formerly large 
and commercial, in the province and government 
of Quixos and Macas, of the kingdom of Quito, 
to the a\, and at present reduced to a miserable 
village. It has tor its parochial curate a re 
ligious of the order of S. Domingo, who is sup 
ported by the synod from the royal treasury of 
Quito. The inhabitants live by cutting wood 
and planks on the mountains, and by making of 
them vaulted roofs, which they call baleas. It is 
situate at the foot of the Cordillera of the Andes, 
on the n. shore of the river of its name, and in 
the road leading from Quito to Archidona, in 
lat. 22 19 s. 

PAPALLACTA, the aforesaid river, flows down 
from the mountain of Pambamarca, and enters 
the Maranon. 

[PAPALOAPAIN,a large river ofVeraCruz 
in New Spain, called also Alvarada. It rises in 
the province of Oaxaca, and being enlarged by 
the accession of lesser rivers, falls into the bay 
of Mexico, 35 miles s. e. of the citv of Vera 
Cruz.] 

PAPA LOTIPAC, the principal or head settle- 
rnent of the district of the alcaldia mayor of Cui- 
catlan in Nueva Espana ; of a cold and dry tem 
perature. Its population is composed of 142 fa 
milies of Cuicatecos Indians, and it is five leagues 
e. of its capital. 

PAPALpTIPAN, a ward of the alcaldia mayor 
of Guauchinango in Nueva Espana ; annexed to 
the curacy of Tlacuilotepec. 

PAPALOTLA, SANTO TORIBIO DE, a settle 
ment of the head settlement of the district and 
alcaldia mayor of Tezcoco in Nueva Espana ; si 
tuate in a valley which produces wheat, maize, 
French beans, fruits, and garden herbs, the trade 
and support of the inhabitants. These are com 
posed of 189 families of Indians, and 32 of Spa 
niards, Mustees, and Mulattoes. One league n. 
of its capital. 

PAPALOTLA, another settlement, with the de 
dicatory title of S. Miguel, in the head settle 
ment of the district of Santa Isabel, and alcaldia 
mayor of Cholula, in the same kingdom. It con 
tains 44 Indian families, and is half a league 
nearly n. of its head settlement. 

PAPALOTLA, a river of the same kingdom, 
which rises in the mountains e. of the city of 
Mexico, and enters the lake of this capital. 

PAPAMENE, a rapid river which flows down 
from the mountains of Fosca, to the e. of Santa 



PAP 

Fe, in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It runs 
through the llanos of San Juan and enters the 
Meta, and in its vicinity dwell the nations of the 
Guipis or Guaypis and Macos Indians. 

[PAPANAZES, Indians of Brazil. See ad 
ditional matter respecting the history, &c. of 
this kingdom.] 

PA PAN TLA, an alcaldia mayor and jurisdic 
tion of Nueva Espana; for the most part of an 
hot and moist temperature, extending 15 leagues 
along the sea-coast to the leeward of V r cra Cruz, 
beginning at the bar of the renowned river of 
Nantla, where it is divided from that govern 
ment, and running as far as the bar of Cora- 
zones, which serves as limits to the jurisdiction 
of Guauchinango, and as an impediment to even 
the smallest vessels to enter ; this however not 
being the case with the bar of Nantla ; for al 
though over this the water is less deep by three 
or four yards, yet it is navigable for bilanders 
and small craft as far as the river of Los Bar- 
riles. 

This alcaldia has several other rivers, all 
abounding in various kinds of fish, and affording 
thereby a commerce to the natives. The shores 
of these rivers are lined with cedars, mulberries, 
and other trees for ship-building. Of these was 
the frigate called the Tecolutena built, and since 
that various others. This jurisdiction produces 
also much wax, which the Indians collect from 
the bee-hives abounding in the woods ; pita- 
trees, which they call here magueycs de lechugitla, 
and from the milk of which is distilled from the 
trees of Zapota, a kind of resin called chicle, 
serving as a medicine. On the mountains are 
found also fine baynilla, which is bought by- 
traders to carry to Europe. The cultivation of 
tobacco, to which the soil is peculiarly adapted, 
was once the chief article of trade here, but its 
demand has diminished in proportion as its cul 
tivation in the other provinces has become com 
mon. But the sugar cane is still cultivated to 
great profit, and of it loaf-sugar is made : also 
is cultivated maize, which yields two abundant 
crops annually, one in October, the other in 
April ; the only labour required in agriculture 
being the scratching up the ground with the 
point of a stake. Here is likewise grown a con 
siderable portion of Chile pepper, fruit, garden- 
herbs, and common pepper, like that of Tabasco, 
despised by the Indians from the smallness of its 
worth. In the llanos are some ranchos., in which 
are bred some neat cattle and horses. 

PAPANTLA, the capital, is the settlement of 
the same name. It contains 535 families of 



PAP 

Mexican Indians, 15 of Spaniards, and 200 of 
Mulattoes, divided into two companies of militia. 
In its church is venerated an image of Nuestra 
Senora de la Concepcion, of beautiful sculpture, 
the which 140 years back was found by a mariner 
on the sea-shore in a closed chest, with a direc 
tion on the top, signifying- Para JPapantla, (for 
Papantla), and which, he having- caused to be 
carried on the shoulders of Indians to the settle 
ment, was opened in presence of many persons, 
the said imag-e being- discovered within. A tem 
ple was then built for it, and a devout brother 
hood attached : 105 miles n. e. of Mexico, in 
lat. 20 27 n. Long. 97 36 30" w. 

The other settlements of this province are, 
Espinal, Chumatlan, 

Quazintla, Metlatlan, 

Chiquaoloque, Santo Domingo, 

Zozocolco, Cuahuytlan, 

San Mateo, Coatlan. 

PA PARE, a settlement of the province and 
government of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; near the coast, on the shore of the 
Great Cienega, or swamp. 

PAPARO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Cumana. 

PAPAS, a lake of the province and govern 
ment of Popayan in the kingdom of Quito, in the 
paramo or mountain of Guanacas ; and from it 
rises the great river of Magdalena. 

PAPA&QUIARO, a settlement of the missions 
which were held by the Jesuits, in the province 
of Tepeguana and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya ; 
founded on the shore of the river Las Nasas. 

PAPATERUANAS, a settlement of the pro 
vince and country of Las Amazonas, in the part 
possessed by the Portuguese, a reduction of the 
missions of the Carmelite fathers of that nation ; 
situate at the confluence of the rivers Paranaiba 
and Topinambaranas. 

PAPAXTLA, a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district and akaldia mayor of Zo- 
chicoatlan in Nueva Espana ; containing 16 fa 
milies of Indians. 

PA PEG WAY, a large island of the coast of 
the province and government of Guayana, in the 
part possessed by the Dutch; at the mouth or 
entrance of the river Demerary. 

PAPILLONS, a bay on the n. w. coast of the 
island S. Christopher, one of the Antilles ; be 
tween the bays of Louvet and Ovignes, in the 
part possessed by the French before the island 
was ceded to the English at the peace of 
Utrecht. 



PAR 



29 



PAPIMOVAGANE, a lake of Canada in N. 
America ; of the district and country of the Pa- 
pinachois Indians. 

PAPINACHOIS, a bay on the n. shore of 
the river S. Lawrence, between cape Pidgeon 
and the island of Oziers. [It is five leagues s. w. 
of St. Margaret s river. An Indian nation of the 
same name inhabit the country s. of Piretibb lake 
in Lower Canada.] 

PAPOSO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimienio of Copiapo in the kingdom of Chile ; 
situate near the coast in the s. part. It has a 
large enclosure called the Chaco Baxo, in which 
the Indians catch the vicunas. 

[PAPPA Ford, on Peleson or Clinches river, 
lies five miles from Emery s river, and 18 from 
Campbell s station, near Holston.] 

PAPRES, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Quispicanchi in Peru. 

PAPUDO, a port of the kingdom of Chile, on 
the coast of the S. sea ; being a small retired bay- 
frequented by the vessels from Peru, to lade with 
the tallow, hides, and rigging of the settlements 
of Chicapa and Ligua ; a great preference being 
given to the hemp of this valley, it being the 
best made in the kingdom, and attributed to the 
waters here employed in its manufacture. The 
port is in lat. 32 36 s. 

PAPUJA, SANTIAGO DE, a settlement of the 
province and corregimiento of Asangaro in Peru. 

PAPULATLA , a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district and alcaldia mat/or of Chilapa 
in Nueva Espana. It contains 71 families of In 
dians, and is one league n. of its capital. 

PAPUNACAS, a barbarous and ancient na 
tion of Indians, dwelling in the woods and forests 
s. of the Maranon, and near the 5. shore of the 
river Cayari. It is but little known. 

PAQUITANET, a small river of Louisiana 

N.America. It runs s. w. between those of 



ui 



Vieux deserts and Quiovecovet, and enters the 
Mississippi. 

PAQUTIGASTA, a settlement of the pro 
vince and government of Tucuman, s. of the 
settlement of Catamarca. 

PARA, GRAN, a province and captainship of 
the kingdom of Brazil, bounded n. by the king 
dom of Granada, the provinces of Guyanas, and 
the great bay formed by the Atlantic sea at the 
entrance of the river of Las Amazonas, e. by the 
captainship of Marauan, s. by the provinces of 
Goias and Matto Groso and the kingdom of Peru, 
and w. by the kingdoms of Peru and Granada. 

It is watered by a river of the same name, 



30 



PARA. 



which traverses it and enters the sea in the 
aforesaid bay. It is very fertile in sugar canes, 
of which sugar is made, as also in cotton, cacao, 
baynilla, and coffee, of which productions ship 
ments were made annually to Lisbon. The cli 
mate is extremely hot, and in the woods is a va 
riety of timber, excellent for either colour or du 
rability, and amongst the which is a tree much 
esteemed, and called here umiri^ the trunk of 
which distils a very fragrant balsam. Besides 
the aforesaid river," there are five others very 
large which irrigate this province, the Negro, 
Topajos, Cambeas, and Xingu, the which abound 
in fish, and in a particular sort, called the mana- 
ties. Their shores are covered with woods, in 
which are a variety of birds and quadrupeds. 
All of them run into the Maranon. The islands 
of Joanes or Marajo, of Cahete and others, be 
long to this district. 

[The trade (observes Mr. Andrew Grant) be 
tween Brazil and Europe is chiefly carried on by 
three principal points, viz. Rio de Janeiro, Bahia, 
or the bay De Todos Santos, and Grand Para. 

The captainship of Grand Para is the most n. 
of any of the Portuguese settlements in Brazil. 
Belen, the capital, is situated on the banks of 
the river Para or Amazonas, and defended by a 
strong fortress, named Notre Dame de las Mer- 
ces, erected at the mouth of the river De Muja, 
which forms the port of Para. This port is dif 
ficult of access, from the currents which run in 
different directions, and which are occasioned by 
a multitude of small islands, rendering the navi 
gation of ships slow and uncertain. But when 
once they get into the harbour, they anchor in a 
muddy bottom, with four, five, or six fathoms of 
water. The canal which leads up to it grows, 
however, more shallow every day, and in a short 
time it will not be navigable, if, as it must be 
supposed, the waters continue to deposit as much 
earth as they have done for the last century. 

The foundation of Belen, which is situated at 
about 20 leagues from the sea, was laid in 1615 
by Francis Caldeira. It stands on a spot of 
ground which rises about 13 feet above the level 
of the sea, and for a long time afforded only a 
mart for the articles collected by the wandering 
Indians in the neighbourhood, such as the wild 
cocoa, vat/niUa, tortoise and crab-shells, sarsapa- 
rilla, different kinds of balsams, cotton, &c. 

The population of Belen amounts to about 
10,000 souls. The same indolence, superstition, 
and ignorance which characterise the Portuguese 
in general, are evident among the inhabitants of 



this city, though an equal degree of luxury does 
not prevail here as in the capitals of the more s. 
captainships. Another circumstance which has 
tended to modify the character of the Parabians 
is, that Negro slavery was introduced among 
them at a later period than in most of the other 
capfains/iips. Too poor to purchase these de 
voted victims of injustice and tyranny, they 
were long forced to content themselves with 
what feeble assistance they derived from the 
natives, who were longer kept in a state of sub 
jection in the n. parts of Brazil than in the cap 
tainships towards the s. 

In 1755 an exclusive company was appointed 
for Grand Para and M arafian, possessing a capital 
of about 125,000. Count d Oyeras was at the 
head of this monopoly. It was permitted to 
gain 15 per cent, exclusive of all expences, on 
articles of provisions, and to sell its merchandise 
at 45 per cent, more than they would have cost 
even at Lisbon. This company was also em 
powered to make its own price for what pro 
visions were furnished by the districts subject to 
its jurisdiction. These unjust and extraordinary 
privileges were granted to this company for 20 
years, after which period they could be renewed 
by application to the government of Portugal. 
It is easy to conceive the tendency which such a 
company must have had in paralizing the efforts 
of the colonists ; and, in fact, it was not until 
1778, at which period they were relieved from 
the oppression necessarily attending these exclu 
sive privileges, that the colony began to exhibit 
any signs of prosperity. 

The principal commodities received from Para 
are sugar, which is prepared in more than 30 in- 
genios, or sugar houses, in the interior of the 
district; coffee, cocoa, and Brazil wood, particu 
larly that species called by the Portuguese bura- 
pemina^ which is beautifully veined, and from 
which an odoriferous oil is extracted ; the bark 
is also burnt as a perfume. 

From the bark of a tree, called arariba, which 
is very common in the neighbourhood of Para, 
the inhabitants extract a fine purple colour, 
which is said to be extremely permanent. A 
new species of puchari, or precious fruit, is also 
met with in this division of Brazil. It does not 
attain to such a large size as the common kind ; 
but the fruit is more aromatic, and forms an ex 
cellent substitute for nutmegs. The real jalap- 
tree (convolvulus jalappa) abounds in Para ; as 
well as various kinds of contrayerva (dorstenia 
contrayeroa)) and many other medicinal plants.] 



PARA. 



31 



[Brazil abounds with gums of different kinds, 
well calculated to supply the place of gum ara- 
bic : the jutuicisica of Para is well calculated for 
making sealing-wax. Several parts of Para 
abound with yellow ochres (ochraferri), which is 
frequently intermixed with a red ochre, of as 
brilliant a colour as vermilion. White argil 
(argilln bolus alba), called by the colonists taba- 
tinga ; and likewise red bole (nrgilla bolus rubra)^ 
is very common in different parts of the province. 

The animals in this province are similar to 
those in the other districts of Brazil. Formerly 
the sale of the flocks which grazed in the island 
of Marajo was one of the principal resources of 
this colony ; but at present the number of oxen 
are greatly diminished. 

A large species of silk- worm (phalena atlas), 
whose ball is three times the size of the common 
silk-worm s, is found in great plenty in Para. 
It feeds on the leaves of the orange-trees, and 
the silk produced by it is of a dark yellow colour. 
Were this species cultivated with care, the silk 
obtained from them might prove a profitable ar 
ticle of commerce. The people of Minas Geraes 
have already set them the example, so far as re 
gards the common silk-worm. 

Eighty-seven miles from Para, on descending 
the river of the Amazonas, is a large tongue of land 
formed into several islands, the largest of which, 
that of Joannes, is very populous, and defended 
by a small fort. These isles belong to different 
Portuguese nobles, and have the title of baronies. 
A league and a half from the city stands the 
town of St. Georges dos Alamos, with a regular 
fortress. About 84 miles s. w. on the borders 
and on the w. side of the river Tocantines is 
another town, named Camuta, or Cameta, with 
the fort of Gurupa : along the river are the forts 
of Paru, which the French took and destroyed in 
the year 1698, of Tapergos, and Rio Negro. To 
the n. the province of Para is terminated by 
Cayenne ; on this side it is limited by the n. cape, 
where stands the fort of Cumanha, opposite that 
of Camon and that of Dos Aragoariz. In this 
province are four cities or towns ; viz. Para, St. 
Georges dos Alamos, Camonta, and Cahete, and 
about fifty thousand inhabitants. 

The Portuguese formed new establishments 
on the Rio Negro, where they discovered dia 
mond and gold mines : in 1766, four hundred 
soldiers and marines were sent from Lisbon, as 
well as workmen of all kinds ; and several fami 
lies were tempted, by the great encouragement 
offered them, to join this expedition, with the 
view of settling in this part of Brazil. 



During war with any nation which may be in 
possession of Guayana, this district would be 
much exposed to invasion from that quarter. Its 
great distance from Bahia, and even from Para 
and Maranan, renders it next to impossible for 
these provinces to afford it the necessary aid to 
repel an invading foe. 

The new colony of Rio Negro was extremely 
ill-conducted by Francois Xavier de Mendo^a, 
Minister of Marine. Sufficient advantages, in 
deed, have not yet been derived from this fine 
country, from the improper steps taken to colo 
nize it. It is true that the population of this 
district has been augmented by many families 
who have been forced to abandon G nay ana, from 
the bad success of the establishments attempted 
by France in the year 1764, along the banks of 
the Courou. It is a melancholy truth that colo 
nization which, if conducted with wisdom and 
benevolence, might prove a blessing to mankind, 
has in general proved most ruinous to those 
unfortunate individuals who, attracted by the 
love of gain, or driven from their country by 
the pressure of want, have sought an asylum in 
those new establishments. 

The government of Para is dependent upon 
that of Maranan, and this is separated from that 
of Para on the n. by the river Tocantines. 

The Portuguese were driven upon this pro 
vince by a storm in 1535, but did not form any 
settlement till 1599. The French, who invaded 
this colony in 1612, kept possession of it from 
that period till 1615, when it was wrested from 
them by the Dutch, from whom the Portuguese 
again recovered it in 1644. 

Before it was visited by the Portuguese, the 
chief employment of the savages was collecting 
the ambergrease which abounds on this part of 
the coast ; and this likewise became the occupa 
tion of the first European settlers. For many 
years after the re-settlement of the Portuguese, 
Maranan continued in a very languishing state, 
till some of the more enterprising colonists began 
to cultivate cotton, which is said to be superior 
to any other raised in the New World. For 
several years past, rice (oryza mutica), a species 
which is natural to Brazil, and differing from the 
aryza sativa^ in not being furnished with awns, 
has also been cultivated to a considerable extent, 
though it is inferior to Levant rice, and even to 
that produced in N. America. 

Several attempts were lately made to produce 
silk in this colony ; but either from the unfitness 
of the climate, the improper methods employed 
in the management of the insects, or from some] 



3-2 



PARA. 



[other cause, the project has proved wholly abor 
tive. The same want of success has not, how 
ever, attended the culture of indigo, as the nu 
merous plantations of this valuable vegetable 
are in a flourishing condition, and promise am 
ply to renumerate the proprietors. The finest 
Brazil arnotto is also brought from this district. 

The Island of St. Louis constitutes that part 
of the province of Maranan, which is by far the 
most populous. It is 26 leagues in circumference, 
extremely fertile, and only separated from the 
continent by a small river. The capital,^which 
is also named St. Louis, was built by the French 
in 1612. The only public building it contains wor 
thy of notice is the Episcopal Palace, the houses 
in general being ill-built and inconvenient. This 
town is defended by a citadel and several forts, 
and is the residence of the governor-general of 
the three northern provinces. All the trade of 
the island is transacted here ; the harbour is ca 
pacious, but might be greatly improved by art. 



The 



populati 
thousand 



ion of the island is estimated at about 



15 thousand souls. The plantations arc not 
here equally flourishing with those on the con 
tinent, particularly on the banks of the rivers 
Ytapicorie, Mony, &c. 

Towards the eastern part of the interior of the 
province, the natives have not yet been reduced 
to complete subjection. This part of the country, 
which is elevated and of a sandy soil, is princi 
pally inhabited by shepherds. The surface of 
the ground, which is covered with saltpetre, is 
altogether appropriated to rearing horses and 
horned cattle, which are sold t6 considerable 
advantage in the neighbouring countries ; but 
the sheep degenerate there as well as in the other 
parts of Brazil, except about Coritibe. Un 
fortunately, the too frequent droughts, and the 
excessive heats, often destroy whole flocks, when 
sufficient attention is not paid to lead them in 
time to distant pastures. 

Mines of sulphur, alum, copperas, iron, lead, 
and antimony, are extremely common, though 
very superficial in these mountains, and yet none 
of them have been opened. In 1572, permis 
sion was indeed granted to work a silver one, 
which had been discovered three or four years 
before ; but the court soon after retracted this 
permission, for reasons that were never fully 
explained. 

This government consists of 8993 white men, 
17,844 negroes, or free Mulattoes, and slaves ; 
and of 38,937 Indians, either scattered or assem 
bled in 10 villages. The exports have not as yet 
been equal to this degree of population. Their 



value has never been estimated at more than 
o29,000 ; but since the suppression of the com 
pany already mentioned, it is to be presumed 
they must every year become more considerable. 

The ecclesiastical, the military, and civil esta 
blishment of Maranan, aro on the same footing 
as those in the other captainships of Brazil. In 
matters of consequence, however, this province, 
as well as that of Grand Para, is allowed to ap 
peal directly to the mother-country, without 
being obliged to appear before the two inter 
mediate tribunals of Bahia and Rio de Janeiro.] 

PARA, GRAN, the capital of the above province 
and captainship of the same name, and with the 
dedicatory title of Nuestra Senora de Belen. It is 
commercial, handsome, and rich, and adorned with 
beautiful edifices ; amongst these the most con 
spicuous are two parish churches," the convents 
of the monks of Nuestra Senora del Carmen, of 
La Merced, San Francisco, and S. Domingo, of 
the Capuchins and of the chapel of Christo, which 
belongs to the troops. It had a college of the 
Jesuits, under whose charge was a seminary for 
studies and the principal missions of the Mara 
nan. It has a citadel and a castle called Nuestra 
Senora de Las Mercedes, at the entrance of the 
bar upon the river, both of them being furnished 
with plenty of good artillery of brass and iron, 
and garrisoned with four companies with a com 
mandant and serjeant-major. It is the head of 
a bishopric erected by pope Clement XI. at 
the instance of king D.Juan V. in 1720; Don Fr. 
Bartolome del Pilas, a Carmelite monk, being 
nominated as its first bishop. It had, indeed, been 
made a bishop s see by pope Innocent XI. at 
the desire of king Peter II. and D. Fr. Manuel 
de la Natividad, provincial of the Capuchins of 
Corral, had been appointed to its functions, when 
D. Fr. Gregorio de Los Angeles, who had 
hitherto presided over it as belonging to the 
bishopric of Maranan, disputed the claims of the 
new-comer, and had litigations with the court of 
Rome, which were only put an end to by the 
death of the two rivals. 

The population of this city amounts to 4000 
housekeepers. [Mr. Mawe, however, takes the 
present population at ten thousand inhabitants. 

The town of Para, continues the same traveller, 
is situated on the river of its name, called by 
some Tocantines, the navigation of which is dif 
ficult, and is seldom attempted, except by small 
craft : the Confiance sloop of war with great 
care sailed up it, and anchored near the town, 
several days previous to the expedition against 
Cayenne. The inhabitants are in general very] 



P A It 

i poor, probably from want of commerce ; for 
although the great rivers Tocantines and Ama- 
zonas have their source, the latter in Peru, and 
the former in the captainship of Goyaz, though 
they receive almost millions of inferior streams 
in their course through immense tracks of territo 
ry, yet they are not productive of any commerce 
of consequence. The few exports from Para 
consist of a little rice and cocoa, a few drugs, &c. 
to Maranan, from whence they are embarked 
for Europe. A few small brigs were sent hither 
from Barbadoes, after the taking of Cayenne : 
but the trade must be a bad one, as the inhabi 
tants are in general too poor to purchase English 
manufactures, except those of necessity ; nor 
could the produce of Para be an object of interest, 
as a cargo is at all times very precarious, and 
difficult to be obtained. 

The climate is hot, as may well be supposed, 
from its lying so near the equinoctial. Thunder, 
with lightning and rain, occur generally every 
afternoon, which cool the air very much, and 
render the heat less disagreeable. 

To the s. of Para is the captainship of Goyaz, 
bounded chiefly by Minas Geraes on the e. 
and Matto Grosso on the w. Its greatest extent 
in length is from lat. 6 to 21 30 s. Villa Boa, its 
principal town, is situate in lat. 16 22 s. about 
270 miles to the w. of Paracatu, from whence 
there is a good road. Here is a permutation- 
house, where all the gold found in the captainship 
is permuted. The governor is elected for three 
years, after which he is generally appointed to 
Bahia or Minas Geraes. In the captainship are 
many gold-mines, some of which produce gold 
of a very fine quality. Diamonds have been 
found in some parts, which are different in their 
appearance from those found in Cerro do Frio, 
having more brilliancy on their exterior ; but 
they are in general not of so pure a water, though 
of a very desirable size. As this fine district 
is so distant from the coast, it has very little 
commerce in any of its productions, except the 
valuable substances above-mentioned, and cattle, 
which are bred on the frontiers ; also some cotton, 
and occasionally a tew peculiar articles, which 
are sent to Rio de Janeyro. The mules on the 
return-journey are all loaded with salt, iron, 
cheap cotton-prints, woollens (particularly baizes), 
hats, fire-arms, powder and shot, and a variety 
of artificers tools. When any of the inhabitants 
have any thing peculiarly precious to dispose of, 
they generally take it tollio de Janeyro, and lay 
out the proceeds chiefly in the purchase of Negroes 
(they being at all times the first object), iron, 
alt, and other commodities. 



PAR 



3.1 



The population is very small in comparison to 
the extent of the district, but is likely to be in 
creased by new settlers ; although the indigent 
in Villa Rica, Tejuco, and other places in the 
mining country, are little inclined to remove 
out of society, even for the chance of riches ; in 
fact, having no Negroes fit to work, and being 
totally destitute of exertion themselves, all situa 
tions are to them indifferent. These are by no 
means the class of people who can be styled ad 
venturers. The poorer class of inhabitants who 
have obtained a small portion of gold, sometimes 
make a journey to Paracatu or Villa Rica to pur 
chase what Negroes they want. This captainship 
has been very little explored, and scarcely any 
thing is known of its productions beyond what is 
above stated, nor are any others sought after, 
though it cannot be doubted that there are many 
substances in all departments of natural history 
which might form the basis of a considerable 
commerce ; indeed, it is not unreasonable to pre 
sume that the soil contains the same variety of 
metals as the district of Minas Geraes. Many 
persons from thence speak of it with delight as 
being a fine country, having numerous rivers 
well stored with fish, and woods abounding with 
fine birds, which afford excellent diversion to the 
sportsman : also a great variety of animals. 

Para, together with Matto Grosso, and St. 
Paul s, communicates with the captainship of 
Goyas, by rivers which are navigable, though 
frequently interrupted by falls. The capital of 
Para is 60 miles from the mouth of the river, in 
lat. 1 30 s. and Ion. 48 33 a>.] 

PARA, a river of the above province and king 
dom, on the e. side of which the capital of this 
kingdom is situate. It is, properly speaking, one 
of the mouths of the Amazonas, formed by the 
island of Joanes. about 40 miles wide at its mouth. 
[This river is about 200 miles long.] 

PARA, another, a small river of the province and 
captainship of Espiritu Santo in the same king 
dom, rising in the mountains near the coast, run 
ning n. and forming various lakes. It then turns 
n. e. and enters the Paranauna with the name of 
Paracatus, opposite the settlement of Rosario, 

PARA, another. See PARANAIBA. 

PARA, a small island, near the coast of the pro 
vince and captainship of its name, between the 
island of Sipatubaand the bay of Cabelo de Velha. 

PARA, a settlement of the province and corre- 
gimicnto of Carrabaya in Peru. 

PARA, another, of the province and corregimi- 
ento of Lucanas in the same kingdom, annexed to 
the curacy of Paraisancos. 

PARA CAHUIN, a river of the division and 



VOL. iv. 



34 PAR 

district of Boroa in the kingdom of Chile, which 
runs . n. w. and enters the Cauten : at its source 
the Spaniards had built a fort which was destroyed 
by the Araucanos Indians. 

" PARACAS, a port of the S. sea, on the coast 
of the kingdom of Chile. It is small and of little 
security, and frequented by the vessels coming to 
this kingdom from Callao, in lat 29 II s. 

[Ships receive shelter here, when driven out of 
the harbour of Cangallan or Sangallan, which is 
three leagues s. e. of Carette Island, and n. n. w. 
of the island of Lobos.] 

PARACASSA, a river of the province and 
government of Jaen de Bracamoros in the king 
dom of Quito : it rises in the mountains of San 
tiago de Los Jorocos, and runs n. e. to enter the 
Maranon by its a?, shore, in lat. 4 42 s. 

[PARACATU, is the principal village or town 
of a district of the same name, which lies about 
90 leagues n. w. of Tejuco, bordering on the 
captainship of Goyas in Brazil, from which it is 
separated by a chain of high mountains that take 
a n. direction. The numerous rivers which rise 
on the e. side of the mountains, and flow into 
the great river St. Francisco, are rich in gold. 
The population of the village is estimated at 
above 1000 souls, and will shortly be very nume 
rous, as the reputed richness of some late dis 
coveries has tempted many families to migrate 
thither. It has all the advantages of a high and 
healthy situation, in the midst of a most fertile 
country, and has considerable intercourse with 
Sabora and Villa Rica, where the gold procured 
in its vicinity is permuted. It is governed by a 
captain Mor, who is subordinate to the governor 
of the latter place, to whom all disputes of conse 
quence are referred. To the s. is the rich dista- 
camcnto of Rio Plata, a river that yields fine 
diamonds, and has been much frequented by 
many adventurers, who, when discovered and 
seized, are called smugglers. A strong guard of 
soldiers is stationed here to prevent the precious 
stones from being sought for clandestinely.] 

PARACATUS, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Espiritu Santo in Brazil, which 
rises in the interior of the mountains, runs e. and 
enters with another small stream which it receives 
into the San Francisco. 

PARACAUSA, a river of the province and 
government of Jaen de Bracamoros in the king 
dom of Quito, which rises n. of its capital, and 
runs with various windings into the Maranon. 

PARACAY, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Nasca in Peru ; in the vicinity 
of which are some pools of water called Las 
Lagunillas. 



PAR 

PARACAS, a port of the S. sea, on the coast 
of the province andcorregimicnto of lea in Peru : 
little frequented by vessels, notwithstanding that 
it is convenient and sheltered. 

PARACEVINI, a river of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas : it is small, runs n. 
and enters the Madera. 

PARACHO, S. PEDRO DE, a settlement of the 
head settlement of the district of Arantzan and 
atcaldia mayor of Valladolid, in the province and 
bishopric of Mechoacan : it contains 78 families 
of Indians, and 11 of Spaniards, Mustees, and 
Mulattoes, dedicated to the cultivation of seeds, 
cutting of woods, making of earthen-ware, and 
saddles for riding : 12 leagues w. of its capital. 

PARACUARI, a settlement of the province 
and captainship of Para in Brazil ; situate in the 
island of Joanes or Marajo. 

[PARADISE, a township of Pennsylvania, in 
York county. 

PARADISE. See PLATE FORME.] 

PARADOS, NUESTRA SENORA DE Los, a 
settlement of the province and government of 
Buenos Ayres ; situate on the shore of the river 
Tandil, near the coast, which lies between the 
river Plata and the strait of Magellan. It is of 
Patagones Indians reduced to the faith. 

PARAGOANA, a point of land or cape, called 
also de San Roman, on the coast of the province 
and government of Venezuela, 13 leagues from 
the city of Coro. It runs into the sea for up 
wards of 1 1 leagues, and is very lofty and crag 
gy, and forms with the point of Coquibacoa the 
gulf of Venezuela ; in lat. 11 52 n. 

PAR AGUA, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Maracaibo, in the Nuevo Reyno de Gra 
nada. It rises at the foot of the Sierra Nevada, 
to the <?. of the city of Pedraza, runs s. s. e. and 
enters the Apure. 

PARAGUACA, a river of the province and 
captainship of Todos Santos in Brazil, which 
rises near the coast, runs e. and inclining to s. e. 
enters the bay. 

PARAGUAIRI, a town of the province and 
government of Paraguay ; situate to the e. of the 
city of Asuncion, on the opposite shore. 

PARAGUAN, a settlement of the government 
of Maracaibo, in the province of Venezuela and 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada ; situate in the penin 
sula formed by the cape San Roman on the s. op 
posite the coast. 

PARAGUAN A, a peninsula of the province and 
government of Venezuela, in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada. It is nearly of a square figure, and 
united to the rest of the coast merely by a very 
narrow isthmus, on which stands the city of Coro* 



P A R 



P A H 



PARAGUARI, a settlement of the missions 
held by the Carmelite fathers of Portugal in the 
country of Las Amazonas ; situate on the shore 
of this river, between that of Tefe and that of 
Yurba. Mr. Bellin calls it Paracari in his map 
and description ofOuayana. 

[PARAGU ARY, a parish of the province and 
government of Paraguay ; situate on a plain in 
the road from Asuncion to Villa Rica, and about 
31 miles from the former, in lat. 25 36 51" s. and 
Ion. 57" 19 50" w, \ 

PARAGUAY, a province and government of 
Peru, belonging to the viceroyalty of Buenos 
Ay res ; bounded by, or, more properly speaking, 
extending, on then, as far as, the lake Los Xarayes, 
[which bv the by is only the inundation of several 
rivers beginning in January and lasting three 
months] from whence issues the great river Para 
guay, which gives its name to the country ; ex 
tending e. as far as Brazil, and bounded s. by the 
missions of Parana, its jurisdiction ending at the 
river to the s. of the city of Asuncion, in lat. 26 48 
s. although it formerly extended as far as the em 
bouchure of the river Parana, in lat. 27 38 . It 
is bounded o>. by the country of Gran Chaco, in 
habited by many nations of infidel Indians, ex 
tending as far as the borders of the province of 
Tucuman, and divided from thence by the river 
Paraguay. 

Its extent is about 200 Italian miles from e. to 
ZD. and more than 300 from n. to s. It was dis 
covered by Sebastian Gaboto in 1526 ; is of a 
warm and moist temperature, from the number of 
w r oods, lakes, and rivers, with which it is covered, 
and from the various swamps, which are formed 
between the months of November and April, 
when the rains are most abundant. It is watered 
by an infinite number of rivers, the principal of 
which are, first that of its own name, and then 
those in the n. parts of Porrudos, Mboteley, To- 
bati, Ipane Piray, and others of less note ; and in 
the s. part, those of Canabe and Tibiquari, this 
dividing this province from that of the Rio de la 
Plata of Buenos Ayres. 

The woods are many and impenetrable, and in 
them grow in abundance sour oranges, citrons, 
limes, and other wild fruits, of which conserves 
are made. There are also trees of very good 
timber, and fine wood, such as cedars, petoroques, 
urundaiS) tajibos, and others ; of the first they make 
canoes and slabs, which they carry to Buenos 
Ayres for careening vessels and for other uses. In 
these woods are found a variety of birds and ani 
mals, such as rabbits, hares, partridges, wild- 
boar, deer, and other species of creatures less 
known, such as quiriquinchos, mulitas, and ape- 



riades ; but from the great quantity of neat 
cattle, the flesh of which is preferred to any 
other here, none of the above animals are ever 
hunted : sometimes, how r ever, the inhabitants 
will hunt geese, which abound in the lakes and 
the shores of the river, and kill great numbers. 
Here also breed goldfinches, nightingales, larks, 
green parrots, long-tailed parrots, others of most 
beautiful plumage, and peacocks ; nor are there 
wanting ostriches, and birds of prey ; amongst 
which there is one called tuca, resembling the 
crow, but having a beak which is singular, from 
being the length of a hand, and beautifully va 
riegated with a distribution of red, yellow, and 
black streaks. The water in which the tongue 
of this bird, which is a feather, has been steeped, 
is a sovereign remedy against the epilepsy, as 
has been proved by repeated experiments made 
in this country. 

The most ferocious animal is the tiger, of 
which there are great numbers, and which do 
great havoc amongst the cattle and the people. 
Here are bears, which are ant-eaters, with very 
long tongues ; and these they put into an ant s 
nest, and when they feel it covered with these 
insects they withdraw it, delighting in their food, 
Here is also found the great beast called the 
anta, and many monkies of various kinds, called 
in the language of the country car ay as. What 
are here called lions have no resemblance to 
those of Africa either in shape or ferocity. 

On the shores of the rivers breeds an animal 
called capihuara, which is amphibious, lives in 
the water, and breeds on land ; it resembles the 
pig, and differs from it only in the snout, which 
is shorter and less pointed. Nothing abounds in 
this province more than insects, and of these the 
plague of mosquitoes is equally distressing on the 
waters as on the land. Here are snakes both 
small and large, vipers, scorpions, &c. and in 
some parts abound the murcielagos, which suck 
the blood of a person asleep, and endanger his 
life should he not awake in time Also, it is not 
uncommon to see a species of butterfly, called 
utas, which, in whatever part it bites, causes a 
humour to appear like gum, and then corrodes 
the part, forming a nidus for a little worm, 
which, although extracted, leaves behind an un 
seemly wound, which increases daily, and is only 
got rid of by a very particular and tedious me 
thod of cure. 

The principal commerce of this province is in 
certain species of leaves of trees, which grow 
on some mountains about 100 leagues from the 
capital, known by the name of the herb of Pari- 
guay. In the gathering and preparing of this 



PARAGUAY. 



herb both natives and strangers are employed, 
and the operation consists in drying- the leaves, 
which are scattered on shelves for the purpose 
over a fire, when they are crumbled into bits no 
bigger than sawdust ; and then they are put up 
into packages of from seven to eight arrobas each. 
There are two sorts of this leaf; the first, and 
which is most esteemed, is that which is made of 
the tender part of the leaves, and is called herb 
camini; the other, the inferior sort, is made of 
the thick part of the leaves, and has the name of 
herb de Pahs. The consumption of this article, 
not only in these provinces but in those of Peru 
and Chile, is incredible, since there is scarcely 
any person who does not take it two or three 
times in the course of the day, making an infu 
sion of it like tea, with warm water and sugar, 
and calling it mate. 

The second great article of commerce is the 
tobacco, although the exports of this have not 
been so great since that the king has established 
a manufactory of slack and twisted tobacco, on 
account of the royal warehouses. 

They also make some sugar here, and gather 
a good quantity of cotton ; and the product of 
these articles, which are carried to Buenos Ayres, 
returns in the shape of European goods. Its 
only communication with the province of the Rio 
de la Plata is by the Paraguay, and the ship 
ments from one place to the other are never less 
than 12,000 arrobas annually : not but that the 
journey is sometimes performed by land, but 
then it is along the coast of the river, and never 
undertaken but by the couriers, or some persons 
by way of express, who lay themselves open to the 
inconvenience and necessity of passing many ri 
vers by wading 1 or swimming, there being no fer 
ries, and likewise to the continual risk of being 
surprised by the infidel Indians, who are con 
stantly prowling along the river s banks : but it 
must be allowed that this latter objection is 
equally applicable to such as make the voyage ; 
since the Payaguas Indians who dwell upon the 
shores of the river are terrible pirates, infesting 
the passage with their canoes, and joining GO or 
70 of them together, there being in each six or 
seven men armed with lances and clubs ; so that 
it is necessary for vessels to go supplied with 
plenty of ammunition or under convoy. 

A few years since a peace was made with these 
Indians, and although great insolence was at 
first manifested by them as barbarians, many of 
them have become domesticated and live in the 
vicinity of the capital, where they make them 
selves useful by supplying fish. 
Nearly the whole of this province is sur 



rounded by enemies, who have never ceased to 
invade it since its foundation. These enemies 
are, to the w. the barbarian Indians, the Len- 
guas, Tobas, and Mosccbies ; on the 5. the Abi- 
pones ; on the n. the tribe of Guaycurus, com 
monly called Mbayas, and the Panaguas ; and in 
the <?. part alone is it free from any immediate 
host ; not but that on the mountains of the 
Yerva dwell the Monteses, who although they 
do not infest the settlements, give great annoy 
ance to the parties employed in procuring the 
herb paraguay, and have even, not unfrequentlv, 
attacked the Indians w r ho have been reduced to 
the faith and have settled on the frontiers : and 
very lately the Portuguese of Brazil, when, hav 
ing destroyed the various settlements on the e. 
and the city of Xerez on the n. which served 
as an outwork of defence against them, they 
pushed forward in that direction by the passage 
at which, at the present day, stand the settle 
ments of Cuba va and Matogroso, as far as the 
head settlements of the Moxos, to establish a 
commerce with Santa Cruz de la Sierra and La 
Paz ; for these infidels, like ants, once con 
vinced of the existence of a booty, although 
turned a thousand times out of their course, will 
still keep travelling on in pursuit of their object. 

All the aforesaid infidels have frequently in 
vaded, and still continue to invade, this country 
in the most unseasonable and unexpected times, 
when they put to death all they meet, plunder 
ing the women and children, and laying waste 
whatever comes in their way. They have at 
times made peace with different nations, but they 
break such alliances with the greatest impudence, 
and for this system of conduct the Gnaycurus, a 
ferocious and intractable race, are peculiarly no 
torious. 

In order to guard against these enemies which 
thus threaten the existence of the province, the 
inhabitants have found it necessary to enrol 
themselves in a volunteer militia, procuring 
arms and horses at their own expence, and 
forming themselves into garrisons in such parts 
as may be most required ; and, although this 
duty is somewhat irksome, an arrangement has 
been lately made by which each individual is 
dispensed from actual service for 22 days in each 
month, whenever the steps taken by the enemy 
may not require it otherwise : but should these, 
as it frequently happens, lay hands on the cattle 
or other goods of the community, they are all 
obliged to come into the field to redeem their 
possessions, and the persons thus called into 
service are indemnified by a fund, called the 
Composition Fund, which arises from certain 



P"A R A G U A Y. 



37 



mulcts exacted from such as will not attend ; 
the amount of these being 60 dollars for the fe 
derative part of the inhabitants, and 40 for the 
others. These dollars are not however of cur 
rent coin, but their value is taken in the articles 
and merchandises of the country, seldom more 
than one-fourth being- paid in specie ; a system 
equally adhered to in the commercial intercourse 
with Buenos Ayres. 

The presidios, or garrisons of this province, 
are 19 in number, without counting the capital, 
in which is a body of 350 guards-men, (as well 
of infantry as of horse),, and of the following- 
names : 

San Miguel, on the shore of the river. 

San Ildefonso, the same, and five leagues from 
the capital. 

San Joseph, eight leagues within land. 

Arecutacoa, 12 leagues on the coast. 

La Emboscada, two leagues from the former. 

Mandoviiay, on the shore of the river Tobati, 
at 18 leagues. 

Mainrimbi, eight leagues from the former. 

Urunday-Yuru, three leagues from the former, 
in land. 

San Geronimo, without the walls of the city, 
on the coast. 

Lambare, two leagues from the city. 

San Marcos, four leagues off. 

La Villeta, 10 leagues off. 

El Reducto, 12 leagues off. 

Santa Rosa, a league from the former, removed 
from the coast. 

San Fernando, two leagues from the river 
Tibiquari, and 40 from the city. 

That of Villa-rica. 

That of Curuguati. 

Besides these there are some boats to run 
along the coasts to impede the passes to the 
infidels, or to surprise and cut off their retreats. 

The aforesaid garrisons are not only a check 
to the Indians, but they can exclude from the 
navigation of the river any foreign vessel, inde 
pendently that it requires great skill in any na 
vigator unexperienced with these parts not to 
take a wrong course, from the number of mouths 
and creeks which present themselves, and which 
have often misled. 

The population of this province consists of two 
towns, called Espiritu Santo, and Villa-rica.; and 
of the following settlements of Indians. 
Ipane, Tobati, 

Guarambarej Los Altosj 

Ita, Itape, 

Yaguarin, Caazapa, 

Altira, Yuti. 



In which are 6000 inhabitants of all ages, men, 
women, and children ; and these united to the 
number contained in the town and vallies give a 
total of 56,000. 

The greater part are of the Guarani nation, 
descendants of those who were converted by San 
Francisco Solano and his companions, with the 
exception of some families of the Monteses, Can- 
guias, and other nations since reduced. Here 
are also four new reductions made, which were 
under the charge of the Jesuits, called San Es- 
tanislao, San Joaquia, Nuestra Senora de Belen, 
and El Santo Corazon. In each of these settle 
ments is an Indian corregidor without jurisdic 
tion, and appointed only to regard the proceed 
ings of the other corrcgidors, and to cause to be 
fulfilled the orders of the curate and of the ad 
ministrator of the goods of the settlement. Each 
of them has two alcaldes, and the other officers of 
the cabildo, and these, as well as the corregidor, 
are elected by the influence of the curate, who 
knows the abilities of his Indians ; but these elec 
tions are afterwards confirmed by the governor 
of the province ; and to the curate is assigned 
10 per cent, of the profits of his settlement. 
Ever since the first establishment of these settle 
ments, there is allotted to each the territory 
thought necessary for sowing of seeds and the 
breeding of cattle, and when the harvest is 
gathered in, it is put into one common granary, 
to the end that it may be divided equally amongst 
all, as their necessities may require, by the ad 
ministrator ; the same practice being observed 
with regard to tlie rations of meat. With the 
excess of the corn and cattle a means is procured 
af adorning the churches, of assisting the sick, 
and of promoting public works. Neither Spa 
niards, Mulattoes, nor Negroes are admitted into 
these settlements except as traders. 

The ecclesiastical government is well orga 
nized under the religious order of San Fran 
cisco, and amongst the first converters are enu 
merated Fr. Alonso de Buenaventura, and Fr. 
Juan de San Bernardo, a lay-brother, who suf 
fered martyrdom under the Caazapas Indians. 
At day-break mass is said every morning, with 
fine music, and on festival days somewhat later, 
with a discourse regularly by the curate. This 
finished, the cubildo goes to receive its orders for 
the day, and the same are imparted to the whole 
settlement, that every one may know his occu 
pation. Tlie matrons have their tasks assigned 
to them proportionate to their strength and ca 
pacity, and the unmarried and girls remain sing 
ing and reciting prayers for the morning, after 
the mass is finished, in the court-yard of the. 



PARAGUAY. 



church, and repeat the same at night-fall. The 
rest of the day they are employed in assisting 
their mothers, whilst the men are employed in 
different handicraft works, as carpentering, sculp 
ture, musical instrument making, weaving, and 
other mechanical arts and employments, for 
which they have excellent masters. Every night 
the cabildo comes to the curate to inform him 
of what has happened in the course of the day, 
and the people, after saying the rosary, betake 
themselves to rest. 

These Indians cannot be said to pay any other 
tribute than personal service to those under 
whom they live, notwithstanding it has been at 
tempted by the king to introduce a different sys 



tem. In the settlement of Itape, for instance, 
there is no vassalage, but the Indians there assist 
with their persons and rafts all those who pass 
in the time of the floods a large arm of the river 
Tibiquari, by which lies the road to Villarica. 

This province has suffered, from its first forma 
tion, various convulsions and alterations, from 
being divided into parties, formed from vain 
ideas of honour or interest, and has been the 
scene of great bloodshed. To its bishopric, 
which was erected in 1547, belong also the 
settlements of Parana, situate to the s. e. and of 
which we speak in their proper place. [See PA 
RAGUAY River.] 



TABLE of the Population of the Government of Paraguay, according to AZARA S Work, 

published in 1809. 



NOTE. The letter c, indicates city ; t. town ; p. parish ; ,s. settlement of Indians ; m. settlement of Mulattocs or 
people of colour. 


Names of the cities, towns, settlements, and 
parishes. 


Years of 
their 
foundation. 


Latitude south. 


Longitude west 
from London. 


Number o 

souls. 


Yta, s 


1536 
1536 
1538 
1538 
1538 
1538 
1538 
1538 
1673 
1G07 
1610 
1592 
1592 
1555 
1609 
1698 
1634 
1614 
1627 
1633 
1622 
1706 
1685 
1746 
1749 
1760 
1536 


1 II 

25 30 30 
25 33 20 
25 27 44 
25 29 48 
25 18 1 
25 16 6 
25 16 45 
25 16 16 
25 52 
26 11 18 
26 36 56 
26 48 12 
27 8 40 
27 14 52 
26 54 36 
26 53 19 
27 18 55 
27 20 16 
27 26 46 
27 23 45 
27 7 23 
27 7 35 
27 2 36 
25 1 47 
24 38 31 
23 26 17 
25 16 40 

Carried fo 


1 II 

57 25 2 
57 18 14 
57 33 15 
57 30 16 
57 26 42 
57 18 30 
57 13 59 
57 8 59 
56 39 33 
56 29 49 
56 16 48 
56 58 54 
56 48 34 
55 35 14 
56 44 14 
56 54 39 
56 19 29 
55 52 59 
55 47 35 
55 38 39 
55 32 29 
55 44 59 
56 5 6 
56 13 20 
56 36 15 
57 8 
57 41 4 

rward . 


965 
2093 
278 
368 
200 
869 
972 
932 
124 
725 
674 
1144 
1097 
806 
864 
1283 
1036 
1409 
1514 
1430 
2267 
1017 
1185 
854 
729 
361 
7088 

32,284 


Ya"uaron, $ 


Ypane, s 


Guarambare, s 




i 
Altos, s 


Atira, s 


Tobaty, s 


Ytape, s 


Caazapa, s 


Yuty, ^ 


S. Maria de Fe, s 


Santiago, s 


S. Ignacio Miri, s 


S. Iriacio Guazu, s 


Santa Rosa, 5 




Ytapua, s. 


Candelaria, s 


Santa Ana, s 


Corpus, 5 


Trinidad, s 


Jesus, s 


S. Joaquin, s 


S. Estanislado, s 


Belen, s 





PARAGUAY. 



39 



Names of the cities, towns, settlements, and 
parishes. 


Years of 
their 
foundation. 


Latitude south. 


Longitude west 
from London. 


Number of 
souls. 


Brouffht forward . ... 








32,284 

3813 
2187 
825 
1769 
1551 
979 
2254 
972 
3014 
1232 
866 
427 
1227 
715 
654 
620 
3595 
1066 
733 
540 
2352 
507 
5305 
2235 
1720 
3098 
458 
3346 
1894 
1136 
858 
1500 
659 
1730 
621 
520 
840 
644 
1519 

92,347 
5,133 




1635 
1718 
1766 
1785 
1773 
1784 
1715 
1760 
1576 
1773 
1785 
1789 
1781 
1758 
1770 
1783 
d. 1640 
1770 
1770 
1783 
1769 
1775 
1640 
1728 
1775 
1714 
1777 
1725 
1733 
1777 
1783 
1766 
1787 
1779 
1790 
1791 
1740 
1653 
1555 

n settlemt 


o / // 

25 15 30 
25 23 50 
25 20 
25 10 25 
23 23 8 
24 6 12 
24 28 10 
24 33 35 
25 48 55 
25 44 42 
25 58 2 
26 54 46 
25 29 36 
25 26 34 
25 30 27 
25 45 43 
25 27 54 
25 24 21 
25 22 28 
24 23 25 
25 29 19 
25 36 51 
25 21 45 
25 24 44 
25 21 14 
25 30 56 
26 10 
25 45 31 
25 58 26 
26 13 13 
25 54 7 
26 54 
26 11 21 
26 52 24 
27 13 57 
26 50 43 
25 7 42 
25 54 56 
27 19 28 

mts not comprise 
T 


o / // 

57 32 19 
57 35 26 
57 41 4 
57 31 49 
57 16 4 
56 58 29 
56 54 25 
56 57 7 
56 31 59 
56 34 12 
56 32 19 
56 18 49 
56 47 15 
56 30 
56 52 6 
56 53 2 
57 4 37 
57 9 24 
57 3 19 
57 13 6 
57 15 12 
57 19 50 
57 31 48 
57 24 6 
57 37 
57 36 25 
58 3 48 
57 16 56 
57 14 49 
57 50 
57 9 1 
57 1 7 
57 15 23 
58 11 28 
57 20 34 
57 49 17 
57 24 5 
57 21 18 
55 34 39 

Total of souls, 
>d in the above, 

rial population, 








Concepcion, t 




















til- 75 r 
















Capiata, p. . . . /* . 




























TabaDv, m. 


T f j a 
l>oreto, o. 


Spaniards inhabiting India 


97,480 


" 



P A R A G U A Y. 



Bishops who have presided in Paraguay. 

1. Don Fr. Juan de los Barrios y Toledo, of 
the order of San Francisco, native of the town of 
Pedroche in Estremadura : he was one of the 
first of the religious who passed over to Peru, 
was elected first bishop of Paraguay in 1547, and 
after passing to his church, was promoted to that 
of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Hey no de Granada 
in 1550. 

2. Don Fr. Tomas de la Torre, of the order 
of S. Domingo, whom the father Pedro Xavier 
de Charlevoix wrongly denominates, Fr. Pedro 
de la Torre: he was of the order of S. Francisco: 
elected in 1552, and took possession in 1555. 

3. Don Fr. Fenian Gonzalez de la Cuesta : 
elected in 1559. 

4. Don Fr. Juan del Campo, of the order of 
San Francisco, presented in 1575 : he lived but 
a short time. 

5. Don Fr. Ahmso Guerra, of the order of 
S. Domingo ; presented in 1577, and promoted 
to the bishopric of Mechoacan. 

6. Don Fr. Juan de Almaraz, of the order of 
San Agustin, native of Salamanca, master in 
his religion, calificador of the holy office, pro 
fessor of writing, prior various times in his con 
vent of Lima, preacher of great repute, and pro 
vincial : elected bishop of Paraguay in 1591, 
but he died before he received the notice, in the 
following year. 

7. Don Tomas Vazquez del Cano, magisterial- 
canon of the holy church of Valladolid ; pre 
sented to the bishopric of Paraguay in 1596 : he 
died before he was consecrated. 

8. Don Fr. Baltasar deCovarrubias, of the order 
of San Agustin, native of Mexico; presented to 
the bishopric of Paraguay in 1601, and promoted 
to Nueva Carceres in the Philippines the same 
year. 

9. Don Fr. Martin Ignacio de Loyola, of the 
barefooted order of S. Francisco : he took the 
habit in the convent of Alaejos, passed to Ame 
rica with the title of commissary of twenty reli 
gious persons, returned to Spain, and was lec 
turer in theology in the convents of Cadahalso 
and Segovia, and presented by his majesty 
Philip III. to the bishopric of Paraguay in 1601 : 
afterwards promoted to the archbishopric of 
Charcas in 1607. 

10. Don Fr. Reginald de Lizarraga, of the 
order of S. Domingo, native of Lima : he was 
presented to a degree in his religion, and pro 
moted from the church of Imperial in Chile, to 
this of Paraguay in 1607. 

1}. Don Lorenzo de Grado, native of Sala 



manca, where he studied and graduated as licen 
tiate : he passed over to Peru, and was there 
made archdeacon of Cuzco, and elected bishop of 
Paraguay in 1607 : promoted to that church in 
1618. 

12. Don Fr. Tomas de Torres, of the order 
of S. Domingo, native of Madrid, collegiate in 
the college of San Gregorio de Valladolid ; pre 
sented to a mastership in his religion, destined 
as its general in Flanders ; and after having 
read theology in many convents, and studied in 
the university of Lobaina for eight years and an 
half; he returned to Spain, was prior of the 
convents of S. Domingo de Zamora anddeNuestra 
Senora de Atocha in Madrid, and was presented 
by king Philip III. to the bishopric of Paraguay 
in 1619, and in 1625 promoted to that of Tu- 
cuman. 

13. Don. Fr. Agustin de Vega, of the same 
order as the former, native of Lima, provincial 
of his religion, calificador of the holy office, pre 
sented to this bishopric in 1625 : he died the 
same year, before he took possession. 

14. Don Fr. Christoval de Aresti, of the order 
of San Benito, native of Valladolid : he took the 
habit in the royal monastery of San Julian of 
Sanios in Galicia, was lecturer of arts in San 
Vincenti of Oviedo, abbot of Corneliana, pro 
fessor of writing, twice abbot of Samos, and difi- 
nidor general ; elected to the bishopric of Para 
guay in 1626, and to that of the church of Buenos 
Ay res in 1635. 

15. Don Fr. Francisco de la Serna, of the 
order of San Agustin, native of the city of Gua- 
nuco in Peru : he studied and read arts and theo 
logy in the convent of Lima, was noon and even 
ing lecturer in its university, twice provincial 
calificador of the holy office, presented to tiie 
bishopric of Paraguay in 1635, and promoted to 
that ofLaPaz in 1640. 

16. Don Fr. Bernardeno de Cardenas, of the 
order of San Francisco, native of the city of 
Chuqniavo in Peru, lecturer of theology, difini- 
dor, vicar, guardian, and visitor of his religion, 
preacher apostolic, a true father to the needy 
and to the Indians, in the conversion of whom 
he laboured much ; presented to the bishopric of 
Paraguay in 1638, and settled in his commission 
in 1640. In his time there was great disputes 
and contentions with the Jesuits : he was pro 
moted to the church of Popayaan in 1637, but 
renounced the offer from his advanced age, 
though he was at last prevailed to accept that 
of Santa Cruz de la Sierra in 1666. 

17. Don Fr. Gabriel de Guillistegui, of the 



PARAGUAY. 



41 



order of San Francisco, commissary-general of 
his religion ; elected bishop of Paraguay in 1666, 
and promoted in the same year to that of La 
Paz, which he renounced : he made the visita 
tion of the missions of the Jesuits in that pro 
vince by a special commission from the king, 
and was promoted to the bishopric of La Paz in 
1671. 

18. Don Fernando de Balcazar, native of Lima, 
chanter of the holy church of Truxillo, theologi 
cal canon, treasurer and archdeacon in the church 
of his native place, elected bishop of Paraguay 
in 1672 : he died before he was consecrated. 

19. Don Fr. Faustino de las Casas, of the order 
of La Merced ; elected bishop of this church in 
1672, where he governed till 1683. 

20. Don Fr. Sebastian de Pastrana, of the 
order of La Merced, native of Lima, provincial 
and professor of Santo Tomas in its university, 
and bishop of Paraguay. 

21. Don Juan de Durana, archdeacon of Are- 
quipa, his native place, bishop elect of Para 
guay, but he never took possession ; so that 
the court were induced to confer upon him the 
appointment of coadjutor for upwards of 20 years 
after, to the end of his life. 

22. Don Fr. Joseph de Palos, of the order of 
San Francisco, native of Morella in the kingdom 
of Valencia, guardian in many convents of S. 
and N. America, where he was charged with va 
rious important commissions which he fulfilled 
with ability : he was living retired in the settle 
ment of La Sal, when he was nominated as titu 
lar bishop and coadjutor of the bishopric of Pa 
raguay during the sickness of the proprietor in 
1724 : he died with universal regret in 1738 ; 
and his life was not only memorable for his own 
singular talents, but through the tragical fate of 
Joseph de Antequera. 

23. Don Fr. Joseph Cayetano Palavicini, of 
the order of San Francisco, a theologist, califi- 
cador of the holy office, preacher general, difi- 
nidor of his province of Charcas, and pro- minis 
ter of the same to vote in the general chapter: 
elected bishop of Paraguay in 1739 : he was pro 
moted to Truxillo in 1748. 

24. Don Fernando Perez de Oblitas, native of 
Lima; elected in 1748, and promoted to the 
church of Santa Cruz de la Sierra in 1756, with 
out ever having passed to his diocess. 

25. Don Manuel de la Torre, elected in the 
aforesaid year ; promoted to the church of Bue 
nos Ayres in 1763. 

26. Don Manuel Lopez de Espinosa, elected 
in the above year : he died in 1772. 

YOL, iv. 



27. Don Fr. Juan Joseph Priego, of the order 
of San Francisco : he died in 1779. 

28. Don Fr. Luis de Velasco, of the order of 
San Francisco ? native of Madrid ; elected in 1779. 

Governors of the province of Paraguay. 

1. Don Manuel de Frias, first governor of this 
province ; nominated by the king, when it was 
separated from the jurisdiction of the province of 
the Rio de la Plata, and when the limits of both 
were settled in 1 620 : he had many disputes with 
the bishop, with respect to the rights of patron 
age ; when this prelate thought proper to ex 
communicate him, and to take the adminstration 
of the settlements out of the hands of the mis 
sions of the Jesuits ; a step which was con 
demned by the council of the Indies: he go 
verned till 1630. 

2. Don Luis de Cespedes, distinct from an 
other of the same name who was governor of 
Buenos Ayres and the Rio de la Plata : he took 
possession of the government of Paraguay the 
aforesaid year, and exercised it till 1636. 

3. Don Martin de Ledesma, nominated to suc 
ceed the former : he governed till 1639. 

4. Don Pedro de Lugo y Navarro, knight of 
the order of Santiago : he had a commission from 
the king to visit the settlements of the missions 
of the Jesuits, and to give them redress and 
protection against the insults of the Mamelucos 
Indians : he succeeded in completely routing 
these, and thereby revenged the death of his 
friend and companion, father Romero, a Jesuit, 
who was killed by them : he governed till 1642. 

5. Don Gregorio de Hinestrosa, native of 
Chile, in whose time occurred the disgraceful 
dissentions between the bishop Don Fr. Bernar 
dino de Cardenos and the Jesuits, the which laid 
the foundation of the disorders which this pro 
vince afterwards suffered, and which were not 
put a stop to trll that the governor removed 
the bishop of its diocess, he being, in return, 
thrice excommunicated : this government lasted 
for five years, until 1648. 

6. Don Diego de Escobar Osorio, oidor of the 
royal audience of Charcas, who, from the critical 
state in which affairs were left by his prede 
cessor, reigned but a short time ; for his death 
was hastened, and he died in 1649. 

7. Don Fr. Bernardino de Cardenos, bishop of 
this diocess, who was tumultuously proclaimed 
by his partizans as governor in the vacancy : he 
began his reign by exterminating the Jesuits 
from the city, as well a& from the other settle 
ments, and causing them, to leave the country 

G 



PARAGUAY. 



and to embark, with great violence. This gave 
rise to fresh disputes, and the Jesuits, by virtue 
of the pontifical bull which they possessed, esta 
blished a judge conservator. In the mean time 
the audience of Charcas disapproved this intru 
sive government, and nominated, provisionally, 

8. Don Andres Garavito of Leon, knight of 
the order of Santiago, oidor of the aforesaid au 
dience of Charcas, and whilst he was proceeding 
to his destination, Don Sebastian de Leon, a 
colonel, who was rejected by the bishop, who de 
fended himself by some armed Indians ; but 
these dissentions were soon put to an end on the 
arrival of the aforesaid governor Garavito ; and 
he took possession of the government and held it 
till 1651, when he returned to the duties of his 
place. 

9. Don Juan Vazquez of Valverde, oidor of 
the same royal audience as the former, and no 
minated by it as provisional governor, with a 
special commission of visiting the province, and 
of examining into the late occurrences : he en 
tered the government in 1661 and held it till 
1665. 

10. Don Felipe Rege Corbulon, till 1679. 

11. Don Juan Diaz de Andino, till 1685, when 
he died. 

12. Don Antonio de Vera Moxica, nominated 
provisionally by the viceroy of Peru. 

13. Don Baltasar Garcia Ros, serjeant-major 
of the plaza of Buenos Ayres, appointed here as 
a recompense by the king, for his services per 
formed in the conquest of the colony of Sacra 
mento, established by the Portuguese on the 
shore of the river La Plata of Buenos Ayres : 
he entered the government in 1705, with a par 
ticular charge to make the visit of the settle 
ments of the missions of the Jesuits, which he did, 
rendering an accurate account of his discoveries 
to his majesty. 

14. Don Juan Gregorio Bazan de Pedraza. 

15. Don Diego de los Reyes Balmaseda, na 
tive of the port of Santa Maria : he entered in 
1717, but the constant complaints made against 
him, and particularly of his partiality towards 
the Jesuits, obliged the audience of Charcas to 
nominate a provisional judge visitor, the same 
being made also provisional governor by the 
viceroy of Peru in 1721, and the person so ap 
pointed was, 

16. Don Joseph de Antequera y Castro, knight 
of the order of Alcantara, fiscal-protector of 
the Indians of the audience of Charcas. His 
unlucky stars had brought him hither to meet his 
death on a scaffold, in the city of Lima, through 



some riots which had lately arisen by certain 
misunderstandings between the bishop Don Fr. 
Joseph de Palos and the Jesuits. 

17. Don Martin de Barua, nominated provisi 
onally by the field-marshal Don Bruno Mauricio 
de Zavala, by special commission of the viceroy, 
the marquis del Castelfuerte, to pacify the pro 
vince, the administration of which underwent 
some changes from some representations which 
he made to the king concerning the Jesuits : he 
governed five years. 

18. Don Bartolome de Aldunate, captain of 
horse of the garrison of Buenos Ayres: who did 
not arrive to take possession, although nominated 
by the king. 

19. Don Iquacio de Soroeta, who had been 
corregidor of Cuzco : accredited for his skill and 
justice, and nominated by the viceroy of Peru in 
1730 : his entry was disputed by the inhabitants, 
who took up arms against him, and obliged him 
to fly. 

20. Don Isedro Mirones y Benavente, oidor 
of the audience of Charcas, whose prudence 
and talents, testified by his pacification of the dis 
turbances of the province of Cochabamba, led 
to his election to Paraguay by the viceroy, that 
he might call his talent into action on similar 
circumstances ; but, whilst on his journey, he 
received intelligence that the proper successor 
appointed by H. M. had arrived ; and upon this 
he returned to his former office. 

21. Don Manuel Augustin de Ruiloba, who 
was general of Callao, and general of the armies 
of Peru, when he entered Asuncion, 1733; but 
being out with a troop, and some Indians of the 
missions, for the purpose of quelling some dis 
turbances, and being deserted by his party, he fell 
a sacrifice at the hands of the insurgents in the 
same year. 

22. Don Fr. Juan de Arregui, of the order of 
San Francisco, bishop of this diocess, and pro 
claimed governor by the insurgents ; and, 
although he was endeavouring to escape secretly 
from the city, he was brought back and forced to 
reign till the arrival of the judge Don Juan Vaz 
quez de Aguero, as visitor, nominated by the 
king. 

23. Don Bruno Mauricio de Zavola, field- 
marshal and governor of Buenos Ayres ; promoted 
to the presidency of Chile, and ordered by the 
viceroy, the Marquis de Castelfuerte, to proceed 
with a force to Paraguay, to quell the disturban 
ces there ; accordingly causing himself to be ac 
knowledged governor, in 1735 he dispersed the 
insurgents, inflicted punishment on the chief 



PARAGUAY. 



43 



offenders, and re-established the peace of the pro 
vince ; afterwards, by a special commission from 
the Viceroy, he resigned the goverment to, 

24. Don Martin Joseph de Echaure, captain 
of dragoons : he remained here till 1755. 

25. Don Rafael de la Moneda. 

26. Don Marcos Larrazabal. 

27. Don Pedro Melo, of Portugal ; lieutenant 
colonel of dragoons of the regiment of Sagunto : 
he governed from 1777 to 1795. 

28. Don Joaquin de Alos, formerly captain of 
the infantry regiment of Aragon and Corregidor 
of Quispicanchi in Peru : nominated in 1785. 

PARAGUAY, a river which gives its name to 
the former province, and was first navigated by 
Sebastian Gabota, a Venetian, in 1526 : it rises 
in the great lake of LosLareyes orLaraye, in lat. 
24 18 s. and runs from n. to s. as far as the river 
Corrientes, and from thence s. w. to the city of 
Asuncion. Here it again takes its course to the s. 
to unite itself with the rivers Parana and Virmejo, 
in lat. 27 41s. On the w. near its banks, dwell 
the nations of the Guaicurus and Abipones In 
dians, and on the e. the Guaranies, Tobatines 
and Payaguas. This river is joined by the Tiba- 



quira, Lanabe, Upacay or Pirayu, Xexuy, Pil- 
comayo, Confuso, Guarumbare, Yuguy, Mboeri, 
Verde, Corrientes, and others of less size. The 
Portuguese of the colony of Sacrament, used to 
pass from the Parana to this river to get to the 
river Icipotiva or Yauri, by which they went to 
Matogroso, which is near the shore of the Itenes, 
w of the mines ofCuyaba. This river has many 
islands, abounds in excellent fish, and its shores 
are covered with lofty trees, which form extreme 
ly thick woods, in which dwell a multitude of 
rare birds and animals. 

[The fine river Paraguay (observes Mr. Mawe, 
the traveller) has its remote springs to the w. 
of the heads of the Arinas, in lat. 13 and after 
a 5. course of 600 leagues, enters the ocean 
under the appellation of the Rio de la Plata. 
The heads of the Paraguay are 270 miles n. e. 
from Villa Bella, and 164 miles K. from Cuiaba, 
and divided into many branches, and already 
forming complete rivers ; which, as they run s. 
successively unite, and form the channel of this 
immense river, which is immediately navigable. 
To the w. a short distance from the main source 
of the Paraguay is that of the Sypotuba, which 
disembogues on its w. bank, in lat. 15 50 after 
a course of 60 leagues. In the upper part of 
this river, and near its w. branch, called the Ju- 
rubanba, was formerly a gold mine, which was 
worked with considerable profit ; but the supe 



rior advantages derived from others subsequently 
explored in Matto Grosso and Cuiba, caused it to 
be abandoned, and its site is not now known with 
certainty. The little river Cabaral, also aurife 
rous, enters the Paraguay on the w. side three 
leagues below the mouth of the Sypotuba. On 
the banks of the latter lives a nation of Indians, 
called Barbados, from the distinction peculiar 
to themselves, among all the Indian nations, of 
having large beards. 

The Boriras Araviras inhabit the banks of the 
Cabaral : they are a mixture of two different 
nations, who in the year 1797 sent four chiefs of 
their tribe, accompanied by their mother, to 
Villa Bella, in order to solicit the friendship of 
the Portuguese. The nation called Pararione 
lives in their neighbourhood, close by the Sypo 
tuba. A league below the mouth of the Cabaral, 
on the e. bank of the Paraguay, is Villa Maria, a 
small and useful establishment, founded in 1778. 
Seven leagues s. of Villa Maria, and on the w. 
bank of the Paraguay, the river Jauru disem 
bogues into it in lat. 16 24 . This river is re 
markable for the boundary-mark erected at its 
mouth in 1754, as well as for being entirely 
Portuguese, together with lands on its s. bank, 
and bordering on tbe Spanish possessions. It 
rises in the plains of the Parexis in lat. 13 54 , 
and long. 58 14 , and running s. to lat. 15 43 , 
the situation of the Register of the same name, it 
there turns to the s. e. for 60 miles, till, by an 
entire course it reaches its junction with the Para 
guay. There are salt-water-pits, which in part 
have supplied Matto Grosso ever since its foun 
dation with salt : they are in the interior of the 
country, seven leagues from the Register, and 
extend to a place called Salina de llmeida, from 
the name of the person who first employed him 
self in these works. 

These salt-pits are situate along the margins of 
broad marshy bottoms, in which are found fish 
of the same kind with those in the Paraguay. 
The Salina de Almeida is not far distant from the 
bank of the Jauru, and the great quantity of saline 
liquid found in it continues three leagues further 
to the s. where a junction is formed with another 
from the w. called Pitas, w. of which are high 
and dry plains, where are found numerous large 
circles, formed by a species of palm called Caran- 
das. These plains terminate nine leagues w. of 
the Salina de Almeida, in a large pool of marsh, 
called Paopique, which runs to the s. 

The confluence of the Jauru with the Paraguay 
is a point of much importance : it guards and 
covers the great road between Villa Bella Cuia.-~[ 

G 2.. 



PARAGUAY. 



[ba, and their intermediate establishments, and in 
the same manner commands the navigation of 
both the rivers, and defends the entrance into 
the interior of the latter captainship. The Para 
guay from this place has a free navigation up 
wards, almost to its sources, which are scarcely 
70 leagues distant, with no other impediment 
than a large fall. These sources are said to 
contain diamonds. 

The mark placed at the mouth of the Jauru is 
a pyramid of beautiful marble, brought to this 
distant point from Lisbon. It bears inscriptions 
commemorative of the treaty between the courts 
of Spain and Portugal, by which the respective 
territories, of which it stands as the boundary, 
were defined. 

The lofty chain of mountains, which extends 
from the sources of the Paraguay near its e. bank, 
border the river opposite the mouth of the Jauru, 
and are terminated seven leagues below it by the 
Morro Excalvado in lat. 16 43 . E. of this 
mount or point, all is marsh, and nine leagues 
below it there flows into the e. side of the Para 
guay a deep stream or river, called Rio Novo, 
discovered in 1786, which may hereafter afford a 
navigation to near St. Pedro del Rey, when the 
aquatic plants that obstruct its channel are re 
moved. The most distant sources of this river 
are the rivulets of Sta. Anna, Bento Gomez, and 
others which cross the great road of Cuiaba to 
the w. of Cocaes. In lat. 17 33 , the w. banks of 
the Paraguay become mountainous at the n. 
point of the Serra da Insua, which, three leagues 
to the s. makes a deep break to form the mouth 
of the lake Gaiba. This lake extends w. and 
there is a broad canal of four leagues in ex 
tent, which comes from the n. communicating 
from the above lake to that of Uberava, some 
what larger than the Gaiba, situated exactly con 
tiguous to the Serra da Insua, on its n. side. Six 
leagues and a half below the mouth of the Gaiba, 
and opposite this mountainous bank of the Para 
guay, is the mouth of the St. Lourengo, formerly 
called Porrudos. Twenty-six leagues above this 
the river Cuiaba enters its w. bank in lat. 17 20 , 
and long. 56 50 : these two rivers are of great ex 
tent ; that of Louren9o has its sources in lat 15, 
40 leagues e. of the town of Cuaiba, receiving (be 
sides the branches crossed by the road from 
Goiaz) other great streams on its e. side, such as 
the Paraiba or Piquiri, which receives the Jaquari 
and the Itiquira, all of moderate size, and navi 
gable. The Itiquira has been navigated to its 
heads, from whence the canoes were dragged 
ver land to the Sucuriu, which falls into the 



Parana four leagues below the mouth of the 
river Tiete on the opposite side. The rivers 
Itiquira and Sucuriu were found to have fewer 
and smaller falls than the Taquari, and the land 
passage is much shorter and more convenient 
than that of the Camapuao, so that this naviga 
tion is preferable to that by the two last-men 
tioned rivers : it is attended by only two obsta 
cles many Indians, and a want of provisions. 

The navigation to the town of Cuiaba by the 
river of that name, from its above-mentioned con 
fluence, is short and easy : in the first 10 leagues, 
after passing the two small islands on Ariacuni 
and Tarumas, occurs a large plantation of bana 
nas, formed on an embankment on the e. side of 
the river. Three leagues above this place the 
Guacho-uassu enters the Cuiaba by its e. bank, 
and on the same side, seven leagues farther, the 
Guacho-mirim. From this point the river winds 
in a n. n. e. direction, 11 leagues to the island of 
Pirahim, and from thence makes a large bend to 
the e. receiving numerous streams, and passes 
the town of Cuiaba, which is situated a mile to the 
e. of it. This town is 96 leagues to the e. of 
Villa Bella, and the same distance by water from 
the confluence of its river with the Paraguay. 
It is large, and, together with its dependencies, 
may at present contain 30,000 souls. It is well 
provided with meat, fish, fruits, and all sorts of 
vegetables, at a much cheaper rate than at the 
sea-ports. The country is well adapted for 
cultivation, and has rich mines, but in some 
places little water to work them in dry weather. 
They were discovered in 1718, and have been 
estimated to produce annually above 20 arrobas 
of gold of extremely fine quality. 

Twenty leagues s. w. of the town of Cuiaba is 
the settlement of St. Pedro del Rey, the largest 
of all the adjacent settlements, and contains full 
2,000 inhabitants. It is situate near the w. side 
of the rivulet Bento Gomez, which, at the dis 
tance of a league and a half s. of the settlement, 
forms a large bay, called Rio de Janeiro. The 
river Cuiaba has its sources 190 miles above the 
town, and its banks are cultivated through the 
greater part of its extent, including 14 leagues 
below the town, down the stream. Four leagues 
below the principal mouth of the river Porrudos, 
the Paraguay is bordered by the mountains that 
separate it from Gaiba on its w. bank, and in this 
place they obtain the appellation of Serra das Pe- 
dras de Amolar, from being composed of a stone 
of which whet-stones are made. This is the only 
spot which is not inundated by the floods of the 
river, and is therefore much visited by the canoes] 



PARAGUAY. 



45 



[that navigate it. These Serras terminate two 
leagues to the s. in those of the Dourados, imme 
diately below which there is a channel on the w. 
side of the Paraguay, which, piercing between the 
two high detached mounts, called Cheines, leads 
to the lake Mendiuri, six leagues long, and the 
largest on the Paraguay. 

From the Dourados, the Paraguay runs s. to the 
Serras of Albuquerque, where it touches direct 
ly on the n. point, on which is situated a town of 
that name. These Serras form a compact square 
of 10 leagues, and contain much calcareous stone ; 
the land is considered the best on either side the 
Paraguay, from the river downwards, and only 
equalled by that on the w. margins of the lakes 
Mandiuri and Gaiba. From Albuquerque the 
Paraguay, turns to the s. w. It skirts its Serras, 
which terminate at the end of six leagues higher 
up in the Serra do Rabicho, opposite which, on 
the n. bank of the river, is situated the lower s. 
mouth of the Paraguay -mirim. This is an arm 
of the Paraguay, which, terminating here, forms 
an island 14 leagues in length from n. to s. : it is 
the usual channel for canoes in times of inunda 
tion. From the mouth of the Paraguay-mirim 
the river takes a s. direction to the mouth of the 
Taquari, navigated annually by flotillas of canoes 
and other craft, which come from St. Paul s to 
Cuiaba, and even as far as the Register of Jau- 
ru, when their destination happens to be Villa 
Bella. 

As this navigation is an object of great impor 
tance, from its connecting two distinct districts, 
the following compendious description of the 
rout pursued in it may not prove uninteresting. 
It is abstracted from the diary of a man of science, 
who performed the journey a few years ago, in 
the month of October, when the Paraguay begins 
to retire to its own channel. The description 
may commence at the Taquari, as the voyage 
from thence to Cuiaba and the Jauru has already 
been detailed. The largest of the many mouths 
of the Taquari in the Paraguay is in lat. 19 12 , 
and long. 54 5 . In the first ten leagues of navi 
gation, the channel of the river is lost, as it crosses 
some large plains, covered with water to the 
depth of several feet. This is contiguous to Ta 
quari, a place where the river is much confined. 

From this place it is 20 leagues to the resting- 
place of Allegre, in lat. 18 12 , and this space 
contains, on both banks of the Taquari, many 
entrances into the paths, which lead in time of 
the floods to various distant places on the Para 
guay, Poi rudos, and Cuiaba. From this resting- 
place there are 30 leagues of navigation, on the 



course of the river e. to the fall of Barra, where 
it is impeded and unnavigable above a mile, 
though a part of it may be passed in a half-loaded 
and part in empty canoes. At the head of this 
fall the river Cochim enters the Taquari, and the 
navigation here quits the latter for the Cochim. 
At its mouth it is 20 fathoms broad, and a league 
upwards receives on its s. bank the Taquari-mi- 
rim, a river nearly as broad as itself. A little 
above this confluence is situated its first fall, 
which is called Da Ilha, and may be passed in 
empty canoes. A league above is the fall of 
Giquitaya, passed with half cargoes, and a league 
and a quarter farther, that of the Choradeira, the 
current of which is very rapid. Beyond this is 
the fall of Avanhandava-uassu, where the cargoes 
are carried over land for half a mile, and the 
canoes are conducted through a difficult channel 
of three fathoms, at the end of which they are 
pushed over the rocks in order to pass the head 
or cataract. Half a league above is the fall Do 
Jauru, so called from a river of that name, which 
enters the Cochim above it, on the n. side. From 
this confluence upwards there occurs seven falls 
in the course of five leagues and a half, in the 
midst of which distauce the river cuts and is en- 
channelled in a mountain, through which it runs 
smoothly, although scarcely five fathoms broad, 
and receives on its s. side the stream of the Pare- 
dao, which is said to be auriferous. Haifa league 
above the last of the seven falls before-mentioned 
are three successive ones, called Tres Irmdos, 
and at an equal distance above them, that of 
Das Furnas, which is passed laboriously with 
canoes unloaded. From this place the navigation 
continues on the Cochim through a succession of 
falls, until that river is joined by the Camapuao, 
eight yards in breadth at its mouth. From this 
point to its junction with the Taquari, the course 
of the Cochim is 30 leagues. 

The river Camapuao, along which the naviga 
tion is continued, becomes narrower on passing 
some rivulets that flow into it, and so shallow, as 
to be in general scarcely two feet deep, and the 
canoes are rather dragged than navigated along 
its sandy bed. After two leagues of this labour, 
they quit the Camapuao-uassu, leaving it on the 
right hand, choked with fallen trees, &c. and 
enter into the Camapuao-mirim, up which they 
proceed one league, when they reach the fazenda, 
or estate of the same name. This is an important 
establishment, belonging to the Portuguese, in 
the centre of those vast and desert regions that 
interverne between the great rivers Paraguay 
and Parana, 90 leagues s. s. w. in a direct line] 



PA R A G U A Y. 



[from the town of Cuiaba. The place seems very 
proper for a Register, to prevent the smuggling 
of gold in this route, and to fix the duties on 
goods passing to Cuiaba and Motta Grosso. 
*The canoes and cargoes are transported from the 
Fazenda de Camapuao by land about a mile to 
the river Sanguixuga, the principal source of 
the Rio Pardo. From the end of the land pas 
sages the navigation continues down the Sanguix 
uga, and, in the interval of three leagues, they 
pass four falls to the Rio Vermelho (so called 
from the colour of its waters), which enters the 
Pardo. Half a league from the mouth of the 
Vermelho the Pardo has the fall of the Pedras 
de A molar, and a league below receives on its s. 
side the river Claro, from which, after proceeding 
two leagues of level stream, there occur nine falls 
in the space of two leagues more. The passage 
of them occupies 12 or 14 days in going up the 
river, though only one returning. Below the 
last of these, called the Bangue, the river Sucuriu 
enters the Pardo on its s. side. Three leagues 
below the mouth of the Sucuriu, is the cataract 
of Curare, about eight yards high, to avoid which 
the canoes are hauled over-land through a pas 
sage of 100 yards. From this cataract, in the 
space of 10 leagues, there occur 10 falls, which 
occupy 15 or 20 days, in ascending the river, 
though only one in descending. The breadth of 
the Rio Pardo in this part is 22 fathoms. Two 
leagues below the last of these falls is a deep inlet 
of 390 fathoms ; half a league lower the canoes 
are hauled over a space of land of 150 yards. 
Haifa league further is the fall of Sirga Negra ; 
one league further, that of Sirga Matto ; and a 
little more than a league from thence, the great 
cataract, or Salto da Cajuru, ten yards in height, 
to avoid which, the canoes are hauled through a 
narrow channel here formed by the river. A t a 
distance equal to the preceding is the Cajurii- 
mirim, and immediately after is found the fall of 
Da Ilha, the thirty-third and last on this river. 
Six leagues below this fall, the Rio Pardo re 
ceives on its n. side the river Orelha da Anta, 
(so called from abounding with ants) ; and four 
leagues lower down, on the same side, the Orelha 
da Ou9a, from the mouth of which, after 11 
leagues of navigation, is found the junction whicli, 
the river Anhandery-uassu makes from the s. 
with the Pardo, which, from the passage of Cama 
puao to this point, completes a s. e. course of 45. 
leagues in extent. The Anhandery and the Par- 
do from their confluence, run 16 leagues of na 
vigation w. in one channel, and disembogue in 
the w. bank of the Parana in lat. about 21. The 



velocity of the current of the Rio Pardo is very 
irregular ; it may be navigated downward in five 
or six days, but cannot be ascended in less than 
20 or 30, and that by hauling, for the force of the 
the stream in some places is too great for oars. 

The river Parana is of great breadth and 
weight of water, and is navigated against its cur 
rent up to the mouth of the Tiete. In the first 
three leagues occurs the island of Manuel Ho- 
mem. Five leagues above this island the Rio 
Verde falls into the Parana, by a mouth of 42 
fathoms, on its w. bank, and at an equal distance 
above, on the opposite c. side, the river Agua- 
pehy enters, by a mouth apparently above 20 
yards wide. Eight leagues above this river, and 
on the w. side of the Parana, the large river Sucu 
riu has its mouth, at least 53 fathoms wide, and, 
after four leagues of navigation further, on the 
Parana, is found the mouth of the large and 
interesting river, the Tiete. The distance be 
tween the rivers Tiete and Pardo, according to 
the winnings of the Parana, may be estimated at 
thirty-five leagues ; the direction n. inclining to 
the e. Passing up the Tiete, in the first three 
leagues is found the great Salto de Itapura (a 
great cascade), to avoid which the canoes are 
dragged 60 fathoms over land. A league above 
is the difficult fall of Itapura-mirim ; another 
league upwards are the three falls, called Tres 
Irmaos, and little more than that distance onward, 
that of Itapuru, half a league long ; two leagues 
further is the fall of U-aicurituba-mirim, and in 
the upper part of it the small river Sucury enters 
the Tiete upon its n. bank. One league above it 
is the fall of Utupiba, a quarter of a league in 
length. The same distance above is the fall of 
Araracangua-uassu, which is passed with unload 
ed canoes. Five leagues above this is found the 
Araracangua-mirim ; one league further, the 
Arassatuba, and at the same distance, the U-aicu- 
rituba, from which, in the space of nine leagues, 
occur seven falls. Three and a half leagues 
above the last of them is that of the Escaramunca, 
so called from the abrupt windings of the river 
among a thousand rocks and stoppages. Two 
leagues above this is the large fall of A van- 
handava, where the canoes are unloaded, and 
their cargoes carried half a mile over land, and 
the canoes hauled the greatest part of the way, 
to avoid a cataract 16 yards perpendicular. A 
league and a half above this is the fall of Avan- 
handava-mirim, and very near it, that of the 
Campo, from which there are 14 leagues o clear 
navigation to those of the Camboyu-voca, and 
next to the Tambau-mirim and Uassu, both] 



PARAGUAY. 



47 



[within the compass of two leagues. One league 
further is the fall of Tambitiririca ; three leagues 
from thence, the U-amicanga, and a little more 
than two leagues upwards, the Jacuripipira enters 
the Tiete, on the n. side, and has a mouth 15 
fathoms broad. A league and a half above this is 
the Jacuripipira-mirim, six leagues from whence 
is the fall ofCongouha, a league in length. For 
the space of eight leagues from this there are six 
falls, of which the last is Banharem. From this 
it is three leagues and a half to the mouth of the 
Paraniaba, 38 fathoms broad : it enters the Tiete 
on the n. ; and the latter river from this point 
immediately narrows itself to 40 fathoms wide. 
From the mouth of the Paraniaba there is a 
navigation of four leagues to the small fall of 
Ilha, and 14 leagues more, with frequent wind 
ings, to that of Itahy, near a populous village, 
called Jundahy. Six leagues from this is the 
fall of Pedrenegoa, which is a quarter of a league 
long ; and half a league above it, the river Sore- 
caba, which comes from the town of the same 
name, in lat. 23 35 , empties itself on the s. into 
the Tiete. Near this town are several mountains, 
called Guaraceaba, some of which abound with 
rich oxide of iron, which, on smelting, has proved 
very good. Upon them grows fine timber for 
machinery, and wood of every size fit for re 
ducing into carbon. Numerous streams flow 
from them, which may be employed to great 
advantage, and their base is washed by the river 
Campanhes, near the Capivara, both of which 
empty themselves into the Tiete at a short dis 
tance. From the river Sorecaba it is only six 
leagues to Porto Felix, where all the embarkation 
is now made to Matto Grosso from St. Paul s, 
the distance being about 23 leagues from that 
city. Through this conveyance, salt, iron, am 
munition, clothing for the troops, &c. are sent 
annually by government. Trading parties fre 
quently arrive at St. Paul s from Cuiaba in the 
montl^of February, and return in April or May. 
Resuming our account of the Paraguay, it is 
to be observed that the Embotetieu enters that 
river five leagues below the mouth of the Ta- 
quari, and on the same side. It is now called 
Mondego, and was formerly navigated by the 
traders from St. Paul s, who entered by the An- 
handery-uassu, the s. branch of the Pardo. On 
the n. bank of the Mondego, 20 leagues above its 
mouth, the Spaniards founded the city of Xerez, 
which the Paulistas destroyed. Ten leagues 
above this place, in the mountains that form the 
upper part of the Embotetieu, there is a tradition 
that there are rich mines which w r ere discovered 



50 years ago. One league below the mouth of 
the Mondego there are two high insulated mounts, 
fronting each other on the Paraguay : at the ex 
tremity of the s. declivity of the mount on the 
W. side, near the bank of the river, is the garri 
son of New Coimbra, founded in 1775 ; it is the 
last and southermost Portuguese establishment on 
the great Paraguay. Eleven leagues to the s. of 
Coimbra, on the w. side of the Paraguay, is the 
mouth of Bahia Negra, a large sheet of water 
of six leagues in extent, being five leagues long 
from n. to s. : it receives the waters of the wide- 
flooded plains and lands to the 5. and zo. of the 
mountains of Albuquerque. At this bay the 
Portuguese possessions on both banks of the Para 
guay terminate. From thence the river con 
tinues to lat. 21, where, on its w. bank, is situ 
ated a hill known to the Portuguese by the name 
of Miguel Jose, crowned with a Spansihfort with 
four pieces of artillery, called Bourbon. Three 
leagues above this the little river Guirino falls 
into the Paraguay on the e. side. Nine leagues 
to the s. of the above fort, and in lat. 21 22 , are 
other mountains on both sides the Paraguay, 
which command this river ; for the c. side is sur 
mounted with a lofty chain, extending to the in 
terior of the country, near which is the sugar- 
loaf mount : the opposite side is equally moun 
tainous, but not so high or extensive ; and in 
the middle of the river there is a high rocky 
island, which, with the mountainous banks on 
each side, forms two channels of about a musket- 
shot across. This, in case of war between the 
neighbouring nations, would be a post of the 
highest importance, as it forms a natural barrier, 
which w r ould require little fortification to render 
it an effectual obstacle to invasion. Here ter 
minate those extensive inundations, to which 
both banks of the Paraguay are subject : the^y 
commence at the mouth of the Jauru, and to this 
point cover an extent of 100 leagues from n. tos. 
and 40 in breadth at their highest floods, forming 
an apparent lake, which geographers of former 
days, as well as some moderns, have termed the 
Xarayes. This inundation confounds the chan 
nel of the great Paraguay with those of its vari 
ous confluents, in such a manner that, from 20 
to 30 leagues above their regular mouths, it is 
possible, in time of the floods, to navigate across 
from one to the other, always in deep water, 
without ever seeing or approaching the banks of 
the Paraguay. During this wonderful inunda 
tion, the high mountains and elevated land which 
it incloses appear like so many superb islands, 
and the lower grounds form a labyrinth of lakes,] 



PARAGUAY. 



[bays, and pools, many of which remain after the 
floods have subsided. From the intricacy of 
these inundated plains, the navigation is rendered 
impracticable to all who do not unite experience 
with skill. From this position, (the only barrier 
on the Paraguay), the banks downward are in 
general high and firm, particularly the e. or 
Portuguese side. In lat. 22 3 5 , a considerable 
river empties itself into it, which the Spaniards, 
at the demarcation in 1753, would have to be the 
Corrientes, whereas the heads of this river are 
20 leagues n. of the real Corrientes mentioned in 
the treaty. 

Between the Paraguay and the Parana there 
runs from n. to s. an extensive chain of moun 
tains, which have the appellation of Amanbay ; 
they terminate to the s. of the river Iguatimy, 
forming a ridge running s. and w. called Mara- 
cayer. From these mountains spring all the 
rivers which, from the Taquari s. enter the Pa 
raguay, and from the same chain also proceed 
many other rivers, which, taking a contrary di 
rection, flow into the Parana ; one of them, and 
the most s. being the Igoatimy, which has its 
mouth in lat. 23 47 , a little above the Seven 
Falls, or the wonderful cataract of the Parana. 
This cataract is a most sublime spectacle, being 
distinguished to the eye of the spectator from 
below by the appearance of six rainbows, and 
emitting from its fall a constant cloud of vapours, 
which impregnates the air to a great distance. 
On the n. side of the Igoatimy, 20 leagues from 
its mouth, the Portuguese had formerly the for 
tress of Bauris, which was abandoned in 1777. 
The Igoatimy has its sources 10 leagues above 
this place, among high and rugged mountains. 
The river Xexuy enters the Paraguay on the e. 
side in lat. 24 II 7 , twenty leagues below the 
Ipane, another small river, called the Ipane- 
mirim, intervening. 

This is a summary description of Portugueze 
Paraguay, to the point where the territory ought 
(as our tourist observes) to extend ; and such is 
the situation of this great river, that the above- 
mentioned rivers, which concentrate towards the 
interior of Brazil, enter it on the e. side; not one 
enters it on the w. from the Jauru to the parallel 
of the Ipane. Many parts of the banks of all 
those rivers are laid under water at the time of 
the floods, and the plains are covered to a con 
siderable depth. 

A river of such vast size as the Paraguay, in a 
temperate and salubrious climate, abounding 
with tish, bordered by extensive plains and high 
mountains, intersected by so many rivers, bays. 



lakes, and forests, must naturally have drawn 
many of the Indian nations to inhabit its banks: 
but, immediately after the discovery of the new 
continent, the incursions of the Paulistas and 
Spaniards seem to have dispersed and destroyed 
the numerous tribes: the Jesuits transplanted 
many thousands to their settlements on the L T ra- 
guay and Parana. Other nations fled from the 
avarice of the new settlers to countries less fa 
voured, but more secure by reason of their dis 
tance, and the difficulty of approach. This emi 
gration of one nation to districts occupied by an 
other, became the fruitful source of inveterate 
and sanguinary wars among them, which tended 
to reduce their numbers. There are, however, 
still some Indians left on the borders of the Pa 
raguay, among whom theGuaycurus, or Cavalier 
Indians, are principally distinguished for valour. 
They occupy the lands from the river Taquari, 
extending s. along all the rivers that enter the 
Paraguay on the e. side, as far as the river 
Ipane, and in like manner, on the opposite 
bank, from the mountains of Albuquerque down 
wards. They have made war repeatedly on the 
Spaniards and Portuguese, without ever being 
subdued. They are armed with lances of extra 
ordinary length, bows, arrows, &c. They make 
long incursions on horseback into the neighbour 
ing territories ; they procure horses in exchange 
for stout cotton cloaks, called ponchos, which 
they manufacture. There are other Indian na 
tions inhabiting these large tracts, some of whom 
have intermixed both with the Portuguese and 
Spaniards, there being few of the latter on any 
part of the confines without some traces of In 
dian physiognomy. 

From the river Xexuy, downwards, the Para 
guay takes its general course s. for 32 leagues to 
the city of Asuncion, the capital of Paraguay, 
and the residence of its governor. This city is 
situated on an obtuse angle made by the e. bank 
of the river ; the population is by no means 
trifling, and there are some Portuguese among 
the inhabitants. The government is of vast ex 
tent, and its total population is given by dif 
ferent authorities at from 97,000 to 120,000 souls. 
The land is fertile, and contains many rich 
farms : its principal product is the matte, which 
is exported to Tucuman and Buenos Ayres, from 
whence it is sent to various parts of the Spanish 
dominions, along the coast of Chile and Peru, 
being a general article of consumption among all 
ranks of people. Its other products are hides, 
tobacco, and sugar. From Buenos Ayres large 
boats arrive at the city of Asuncion, after two or ] 



PAR 

three months passage ; the only difficulty in na 
vigating is the great weight of the waters of the 
Paraguay, which flow with great rapidity : but this 
disadvantage is lessened by favourable winds, 
which blow the greater part of the year from the s. 

Six leagues below Asuncion, on the w. side of 
the Paraguay, the river Pilcomayo enters that 
river by its first mouth ; its second is 14 or 16 
leagues lower. In this space some other smaller 
rivers enter on the e. side, and amongst them 
the Tibiquari, on an arm of which, 20 leagues 
s. e. from Asuncion, is Villa Rica, a large Spanish 
town, with much property in cattle on its exten 
sive plains. The river veimecho enters the a), 
side of the Paraguay, in lat. 26 45 . On a re 
mote upper branch of this river is the town of 
Salto, near an accessible fall : it is an important 
point to the Spaniards who are transporting their 
goods from Buenos Ayres, Tucuman, &c. to 
Upper Peru.] 

PARAGUAYAURA, a small river of the 
province and government of Cumana, which rises 
in the sierra of Imataca, runs s. and enters the 
Cuyuni by the n. side. 

PARAGUAYJES., a settlement of the province 
and government of Buenos Ayres ; situate near 
the river Hueque-Leuvu. Near it, on the s. are 
two large lakes abounding in salt. 

PARAGUAYO, an abundant river of the 
country of Las Amazonas, which rises in the 
mountains of the Andes in the kingdom of Peru, 
runs for many leagues towards the n. collecting 
the waters of many others, until it enters that of 
Las A mazonas. 

PAR A HAM, a settlement of the province and 
government of Guayana. 

PARAHIBO, a river of the kingdom of Bra 
zil, which rises in the country of the Mari- 
quitas Indians, runs n. and turning its course to 
n. n. e. enters the sea, forming a great mouth or 
port close to cape Negro. 

PARAIBA, a province and captainship of the 
kingdom of Brazil: one of the 14 which compose 
it, and of the smaller. It takes its name from a 
river, by which it is irrigated and fertilized ; 
bounded n. by the river Grande, e. by the Bra 
zilian sea, s. by the province of Itamaraca, and 
divided from the same by the river Paraiba, and 
w. by the territory of the barbarous nations of 
the Tiguares and Petiguares Indians. This pro 
vince abounds more than any other in Brazil 
wood, and has many engines for making sugar, 
this being its principal article of commerce with 
Europe. The Petiguares Indians, enemies to 
the Portuguese, continually infest and destroy 

VOL. IV. 



PAR 



49 



their settlements. The climate is benign and 
the soil fertile. The French took possession of 
this beautiful country, keeping it till 1584, when 
they were driven out by the Portuguese. 

pTfcis captainship was bestowed by John III. 
on the celebrated historian De Bauos ; but he 
was compelled to restore it to the government 
after having nearly ruined himself by his unsuc 
cessful attempts to colonize it.] 

PARAIBA, the capital, is of the same name, a 
city and head of the bishopric, called also City 
de Federico and Nuestra Senora de las Nieves. 
It is situate opposite the fort of Tamaraca, at 
the s. mouth and shore of the river of its 
name ; is large, well peopled, mercantile, and 
rich. The buildings are handsome, particularly 
the cathedral-church, which is magnificent. It 
is defended by three forts ; two situate on islands, 
with the names of San Antonio and La Restinga, 
and the third on the point of Santa Catalina. It 
enjoys a fine healthy air and good climate. The 
Dutch, commanded by Captains Longk and War- 
denburg, took it in 1635, but it was afterwards 
recovered by the Portuguese, being under the 
dominion of the kings of Spain. 

[The above capital was built at the expence of 
the king. It stands near the river Paraiba, at 
the mouth of which is the harbour. A handsome 
custom-house has been erected near it, and a 
pentagonal fort, named St. Catherine, which de 
fends the entrance into this harbour. Seven or 
eight ships of about 250 tons burden used an 
nually to enter this port from the mother-coun 
try, loaded with different articles for the use of 
the colony. Their homeward bound cargoes 
consisted chiefly of sugar, more of which is 
raised in the n. captainships than in those of the 
s. ; especially since the discovery of the gold 
mines, which have rendered the inhabitants of 
these last districts more negligent respecting the 
improvement of their plantations. There are 21 
sugar houses in this province, and the sugar mar 
nufactured in them is said to be superior to any 
other in Brazil. 

Besides sugar, they also export dying woods, 
several sorts of drugs, and other valuable com 
modities, and it is generally allowed that these 
. captainships are the most populous, and the 
inhabitants in very easy circumstances, though no 
mines have yet been wrought in these parts. 
The capital is computed to contain nearly 4000 
souls, and the province about 20,000.] In lat. 
6 57 30" s. Long. 35 W 30" w. 

PARAIBA, a large river of the above province 

d kingdom, which rises in the mountains of the o>. 



an 



50 



PAR 



P A R 



and runs e. fertilizing the country of the Tigua- 
res, Petiguares, and Viatanis Indians. Its shores 
are covered with villages and sugar engines, 
and in the woods are quantities of Brazil-wood. 
At its embouchure it forms the great bay of Pa- 
raiba, which has at its entrance the island of 
San Antonio. 

PAR AID A, another small river, in the province 
and captainship of Espiritu Santo in the same 
kingdom. It flows down from the mountains, 
runs e. and enters the sea. 

PA RAID A, another large river, in the pro 
vince and captainship of Rio Janeyro; it has its 
source in the captainship of Sao Paulo in the 
mountains, within 10 miles of the sea in the 
bay of Cairussu. [From its source it has a very 
peculiar course, for the first 95 miles it runs w. 
by s. then turns n. for 2a miles, afterwards e. ap 
proaching its source within 23 miles, then wind 
ing its course in a serpentine direction through 
the captainship of Rio Janeyro, and enters the 
Atlantic ocean very much augmented by nume 
rous inferior rivers. In lat. 21 34 30" s.~] 

PARAIBA, another river, of the province and 
government of Guayana, which rises in the in 
terior of the same, near the sources of the Caura, 
and running n. enters in a very abundant stream 
into the Orinoco ; and, according to Don Juan 
de la Cruz, first into the Caroni. 

PARAIGUA, SIERRA DE, some very lofty 
mountains of the province of Barcelona and go 
vernment of Cumana, which run nearly from e. 
to w. parallel with the river Orinoco. 

PARAI-GUAZU, a small river of the pro 
vince and government of Paraguay, which runs 
e . and enters this river near the city of Asun 
cion. 

PARAINABA, a large river of the province 
and country of Las Amazonas, entering with a 
large stream into the river of this name, after 
running many leagues and collecting the waters 
of 30 other rivers. 

PARAISANCOS, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Lucanas in Peru. 

PARAMARIBO, a city of the Dutch, in the 
part which they possess in Guayana ; the capital 
of the colony of Surinam ; situate on the w. side 
of the river, 10 miles from the sea, upon a sandy 
rock, which causes the streets to be very easy to 
the tread. It has this name from a settlement of 
Indians, which it formerly was. In the hot sea 
sons the sand becomes so burning as to penetrate 
the soles of the shoes and blister the feet. 

The houses, which amount to the number of 
800, are very regularly built, and nearly all of 



them without windows, on account of the heat ; 
and attached to them are pleasant gardens. To 
about three feet in height they are of brick, and 
upwards of wood, with the exception of the 
houses of the governor and commandant, which 
are of stone, although the former are sumptuous. 
In all the streets there is before the houses an 
orange-grove, which buds twice a year. The 
city-house is in a handsome spot, and surrounded 
also by orange-trees ; and here is the slave- 
market. It was, indeed, at first used as a bury- 
ing-ground, but from fear of any infection from 
the bodies, they were carried afterwards to the 
extreme part of the town, and interred in a rising 
ground. Divine service is performed here every 
Sunday, in Dutch in the morning, and after 
mid-day in French, there being two ministers 
for the former and one for the latter of these 
duties. Although a poor person is rarely seen 
here, there is a house for the reception of or 
phans, and of such as from age are incapacitated 
for labour, and thus the streets are entirely free 
of beggars. Here is a superb Lutheran church, 
situate on the shore of the river, where a sermon 
is preached every Sunday, morning and evening; 
also two synagogues of Portuguese and German 
Jews, that of the former being the best. 

The plaza, or place of arms, is garrisoned by 
two battalions of infantry, and these with the 
artillery-men form a body 1200 strong, whose 
pay is furnished one half by the society of the 
Jesuits, and the other half by the inhabitants of 
the colony : also for them is provided an hospi 
tal, with physicians, surgeon, drugs, &c. Besides 
this troop the inhabitants are formed into three 
companies of militia, who are obliged to take up 
arms at command ; and in the plantations on the 
banks of the river are as many more companies, 
who at the first signal gun are to repair armed 
to the city. 

The governor of this colony formerly settled 
all the differences without appeal, but a council 
was afterwards established, composed of 13 per 
sons, over which the governor is president ; nor 
can any one aspire to be of this council, except 
he have great influence in the country. [In lat. 
5 53 n. and long. 55 12 o>.] 

PARAMAXIBO, a settlement of the same 
colony and government as the former city ; si 
tuate on the shore of the river Surinam. It be 
longs to the Dutch, and has more than 400 
houses, and is of an healthy climate. 

PARAMERIN, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Todos Santos in Brazil. It 
runs w. and turning n. n. ?, enters the Rio Real, 



P A R 

PARAMOS. Some very lofty mountains of 
the cordillera of the Andes ; the heights of which 
are exceeding, but vary so much that the skirts 
of some rest upon the tops of others. They are 
the whole year round covered with snow, which 
is become hardened by time, so as to cause the 
temperature to be cold in the extreme, and to 
render them totally uninhabitable. 

The most celebrated of these mountains are in 
the kingdom of Quito ; and the lower parts of 
them are covered with a kind of straw like 
esparto (mat-weed), although less harsh, which 
grows in such abundance, and to such an height, 
as to be in some parts half a yard and in others 
three-quarters. Amongst this grows a tree, 
called quinual, of a strong wood and small dark 
green leaf, and rough to the touch ; also a plant, 
peculiar to the climate, called by the Indians palo 
de luz (tree of light), the which is about three 
feet high, grows in one perpendicular stem till 
the upper part, where it shoots some small 
branches, these also producing others, on each 
of which sprout two leaves. This plant being 
cut near the root and lighted when green, serves 
the Indians as a candle, and burns like one till 
the whole of the stick is consumed. There also 
grows in these paramos the achupalla, composed 
of stalks, like those of the savila, the trunk of 
which, when tender, serves for the Indians as 
salad, like that of the palmito. The canchalagua 
and the contrayerva, well known for their virtues, 
are also found here, as is the puchugchu^ which is 
a sort of bread formed of an herb, the leaves of 
which are round and of the figure of the musk- 
flower, and which unite and knit themselves to 
gether with such force as to form a body of two 
feet in diameter, so hard as to resist the weight 
of a man. 

Notwithstanding the severity of the climate of 
the Paramos, there are not wanting animals to 
breed upon them, such as deer and foxes : and 
birds, as partridges and condors, which are birds 
of prey, and of a magnitude above any of the 
feathered race ; and to them are these mountains 
peculiar, for they never leave them but in search 
of prey, when they fly into the valleys to pounce 
upon the lambs, which they carry up with their 
tallons in the air. The Indians have a method 
of catching them by anointing a concealed net 
with certain herbs which stupifies them ; but 
they are generally aware of the mischief, and 
betake themselves to flight. Here is also a 
bird which they call the zumbador^ which seldom 
allows itself to be seen though continually heard ; 
and another, to which they give the name of 
eancion, the note of which is like the bandurria. 



PAR 



51 



PARANA, a large and navigable river of the 
province and government of Paraguay, traversing 
this province from n. e. to w. It rises in the 
province of Minas Geraes to the s. of the city 
of Va. da. S. Joas del Rey, in some lofty 
sierras, and takes its course for the space of 
300 leagues, receiving innumerable other rivers 
which are on the n. part, the Iguayri, Pardo, 
Monici, Amamboy, Itaimbe, Guazuygua, Yaca- 
guaju, Itabo, Acaray, Munday, Tenibey, Pira- 
yubi, Pirapopo, Aguapey, and others ; and on 
the s. part those of Anemby, Aguapeyo, Para- 
napane, Huibay, Piquiri, Yari, Itapitay, Yacoy, 
Guiraitagua, Yequeimari, Piracabi, Cay, Iguazu, 
Paranay, Ibiray, Muruara, and others. 

At the distance of 125 leagues from its mouth 
it has two falls which impede its navigation, so 
that the boats are obliged to be carried for some 
little distance by land. The whole of that ex 
tent of its course s. from the river Paranape to 
27 or 28, is called Guayra. The country is of 
a fine temperature and very fertile, and popu 
lous in former times ; and in some valleys to 
wards the e. from the Uruguay, the territory 
of which they called Tape, dwelt some Indians, 
of whom are descended those of the missions of 
the present day, and lately converted. Those of 
the river Guayra call themselves Guaranis, and 
the others Tapes, being as it were a colony of 
the former. All of them spoke, and still speak, 
the same idiom, Avhich is the Guarani, and with 
greater or less purity, the other nations of the 
Guaicurus, the Chiriguanos, &c. 

This country was discovered by Alvar Nunez 
Cabeza de Vaca, in 1541, he being governor of 
Paraguay ; and he took possession of it in the 
name of the king, calling it the province of Vera. 
The inhabitants were laborious, lived in settle 
ments, sowed maize twice a year, cultivated 
yucas or mandioca, bred fowl, and eat human 
flesh, not only of their own prisoners, for they 
were very warlike, but even that of their own 
dead. 

Two monks of the order of San Francisco, 
called Fr. Bernardo de Armenta, and Fr. Alonso 
Lebron, who accompanied the governor in his 
voyage, were the first who gave these Indians 
the first insight into religion. Some years after 
wards others of their order came, and obtained 
great fruit by their labours ; but he that laboured 
most, and who stayed amongst them 50 years, 
was the venerable Fr. Luis de Bolanos, com 
panion of San Francisco Solano, who, accom 
panied by many other religious, erected many 
chapels or churches in Guayra, establishing six 
reductions^ and uniting the Indians in settlements 
H 2 



5*2 



PARANA. 



and in large and convenient parts on the shores 
of the rivers Ibajiba, Paranape, and Pirapo, 
and, for their instruction in their catechism, he 
made himself master of the Guarani tongue, 
many of his orations in this language having 
been since printed by the Jesuits. 

This great missionary, bent down with years 
and infirmities, and finding it impossible for him 
longer to fulfil his wonted duties, went with 
gladness to welcome the arrival of some Jesuits, 
entrusting them with his flock ; but such was the 
veneration of the Indians for their old masters, 
that they were with difficulty persuaded by the 
venerable Franciscan to accept of the offices of 
the new comers ; he at last, however, persuaded 
them, by assuring them that the Jesuits were 
their brothers, and that the only difference be 
tween the one and the other was the dress. The 
Jesuits followed up the advantages of their pre 
decessors, and founded some fresh settlements 
or doctrinal establishments in 1614. But the 
Mamelucos Paulistas of Brazil made various ir 
ruptions against those settlements, in order to 
entrap prisoners, which they might carry to sell 
to work in the mines of that kingdom and at the 
sugar engines ; nor did they carry thither less, 
at different times, than 100,000 souls ; and on 
this account the missionaries found themselves 
under the necessity of withdrawing the settle 
ments to a spot where they now stand ; where, 
being still infested, a permission was obtained 
from his majesty for these Indians to carry fire 
arms for their defence, in 1639, although they 
were not brought into action till some time 
after, when, being well instructed by the Jesuits, 
they succeeded in completely routing their ene 
mies. 

These settlements are nearer to Paraguay and 
Buenos Ayres than they were formerly, and of 
the 30, which was their number, 13 belong 
to the bishopric of the former, and the 17 others 
to the latter : the former were also of the tem 
poral government of that province till 1726, 
when the king ordered that they should all be 
dependent on the government of Buenos Ayres. 
They are of the following names : 
San Ignacio Guazu, Santa Rosa, 
San Cosme, Candelaria, 

Itapua, Santa Ana, 

La Trinidad, Loreto, 

Jesus, San Ignacio Miri, 

Santiago, Corpus Christi. 

NuestraSenora deFe, 

Of the which eight are to the s. of Parana, and 
the five others to the n. These last were ceded 
by the king to the crown of Portugal in 1755, in 



exchange for the colony of Sacramento; but this 
plan was disagreable to the Indians, who took 
up their arms against the Spaniards and Portu 
guese who were unitedly endeavouring to force 
them to the treaty, and such was their resolution 
that it was at last annulled. These settlement!? 
contain 41,000 souls, who cultivate the same fruits 
as those of Paraguay, but in greater abundance, 
namely wheat, maize, sugar, herb of Paraguay, 
tobacco, cotton, seeds, fruit and garden-herbs, 
besides the cutting of some trees to make planks. 
The territory abounds in such large and fine 
pastures that when the Jesuits quitted the coun 
try, there were found in the 30 settlements no 
less than 769,589 horses, 13,905 mules, and 
271,537 heads of sheep. The government, arts, 
and manufactures established here by the same 
missionaries, has for many years been a problem 
which could not be solved : whether, in fact, all 
this should prove, as some will have it, the per 
fection of a republic, or, as others, that it should 
be looked upon as a tyrannical despotism eager 
only for its own interests. More on this subject 
may be seen in the " Christianismo felice" of 
Muratori, the Italian, and in the general collec 
tion of the documents for the extermination of the 
Jesuits, printed by order of the government. 

In this province there is a constant tradition that 
the evangelist and apostle St. Thomas preached 
here. Dr. Xarque, dean of Albarracin, lays it 
down in his own mind as a fact, nor did he dwell 
a short time in the country. Besides this, there 
is in a certain road leading from Brazil, in the 
midst of unfrequented woods, a kind of bower or 
avenue, indisputably the work of art, which the 
Indians have always called the path of St. 
Thomas; also in the province of Paraguay is to 
be seen a cave, not a work of nature but of art, 
the which is seven yards long and proportion- 
ably wide, with a floor level and plain, and a 
roof composed of one flat stone, perfectly free 
from any inequalities of surface : this cave is in a 
lofty mountain, and both the mountain and the 
cave bear the name of St, Thomas ; and it is 
there thought that the saint used to make the 
same cave his abode, and that he there used to 
preach to the Indians of those valleys. Here also 
is found an hollow rock which is difficult of 
entrance, but in which is found the prints of 
feet and hands, the same phenomena existing in 
other parts of the coast of Paraguay ; and all 
agree in asserting that they are of that apostle, 
and that he first taught them the use of the herb 
of Paraguay. This at least cannot be doubted 
but that they knew the use of it before the arrival 
of the Spaniards. 



PAR 

The Indians of Brazil concur with this tradi 
tion, and assure us that the apostle St. Thomas 
landed at the port of Todos Santos, opposite the 
bar of San Vincente. Now, if to all these asser 
tions we take into consideration the information 
given by the Indians to the conquerors of Peru, 
respecting the orgin of the cross of the settle 
ment of Carabuco in the province of Omasuyos ; 
if we consider the stone which was found in the 
curacy of Ay aviri, of the province of Yauy os ; the 
signs at Caxamarca, and the vestiges of our reli 
gion found in a cave near Tarija, it may be in 
terred that it is most probable that St. Thomas 
did actually preach the gospel in these coun 
tries. 

[But to return to the description of the Parana. 
This great river (observes the traveller Mawe), 
which the first discoverers considered as the 
chief, on account of its abundant waters, unites 
with the e. side of the Paraguay in lat. 27 16 ; 
and their united streams take the name of the 
Rio de la Plata, which originated in the follow 
ing circumstance. Martini de Jousa, the first 
donatory of the captainship of St. Vicente, fur 
nished Alexo Garcia with an adequate escort to 
explore the hitherto untrodden wilds to the w. 
of the extensive coast of Brazil. This intrepid 
Portuguese, by the route of the Tiete, reached 
the Paraguay, which he crossed, and penetrated 
considerably into the interior, from whence he 
returned, it is said, loaded with silver, and some 
gold ; but he halted on the Paraguay, and waited 
for the coming of his son, a youth of tender 
years, with some of his people, whilst he sent 
forward an account of the discovery. He was 
surprised by a body of Indians, who killed him, 
took his son prisoner, and carried off all his 
riches ; the year following, 60 Portuguese, who 
were sent in search of Garcia, shared the same 
fate. The Spaniards who first settled on this 
river, seeing so much silver amongst these In 
dians, and supposing it to be the produce of the 
country, called the river La Plata. The Parana 
derives its principal sources from the w. side of the 
mountains of Mantiqueira, 25 leagues w. of the 
town of Paraty. For further descriptions con 
nected with this article, see Paraguay.] 

PARANA, a settlement of the island of Joanes 
or Marajo in Brazil ; on the n. coast, at the same 
mouth or entrance of the river of Las Amazonas. 

PARANA, another, a small river of the king 
dom of Brazil, which runs w. n. e. and enters the 
Preto or De Palma. 

PARANAGUA, a town of the province and 
captainship of San Vincente, in Brazil ; situate 



PAR 53 

on the shore of the river of its name, at the en 
trance of the bay of Ipetuba. 

The aforesaid river runs e. and enters the sea 
in the bay of Ipetuba. 

PARANAIBA, a large and abundant river of 
the province and captainship of Portoseguro in 
Brazil ; it runs s. s. e. for many leagues, and 
enters by the n. side into the Grande del Parana 
near its source. The ex-Jesuit Coleti asserts 
that it enters the Maranon by the w. part, below 
where it receives the Ginapape. On its shores 
dwell many nations of barbarous Indians, who 
are not known. 

PARANAIBA, another abundant river, in the 
province and government of Guayana. It is an 
arm of the Maranon, which runs out forming a 
curve, and returns to enter the same river, form 
ing the large island of Ramos. 

PARANAMERIN, or PARAMERI, a small 
river of the province and captainship of Seara in 
Brazil, which runs n. and enters the sea between 
the rivers Paragii and Iquarazii. 

PARANAMIRI, a river of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas. It is an arm of this 
which communicates with the lake Araraba, and 
forms the island of Variquiri. 

PARANAPANE, MINAS DE, some very rich 
and abundant gold mines of the province and 
captainship of San Vincente in Brazil. They lie 
between the rivers Yapo and Yaguariba, near 
where the Jesuits had the settlement of their 
missions, called San Francisco Xavier, in the 
province of Guayra, and which w r as destroyed by 
the Portuguese of San Pablo. 

PARANAPE, a large and abundant river of 
the province and government of Paraguay, and 
which enters the Parana. 

PARANAPITINGA. See YAGUXPIRI. 

PARANAPURAS, ENCARNACION DE, a set 
tlement of the province and government of Mai- 
nas in the kingdom of Quito ; a reduction of the 
missions of this name by the Jesuits, on the shore 
of the river also so called. 

This river rises in the cordillera of the Andes, 
runs e. and, making a curve, enters the Guallaga, 
by the side of the settlement of Yurimanguas. 

PARANAUNA, a river of the province and 
captainship of Portoseguro in Brazil. It rises in 
the mountains near the coast, runs n. and enters 
the head of the Grande del Francisco. 

PAR ANA Y, a small river of the province and 
government of Paraguay, which runs w. and 
enters the Parana between those of Caruguampu 
and Piray. 

PARANGATECUTIRO, SAN JUAN DE, a 



54 



PAR 



settlement of the head settlement of the district of 
Uruapan, and cdcaldia mayor of Valladolid, in the 
province and bishopric of Mechoacan. It con 
tains 62 families of Indians, and is 10 leagues e. of 
its head settlement and 18 from the capital, and 
in it is a beautiful convent of the monks of San 
Agustin. 

PARANGS, a barbarous nation of Indians, 
who inhabit the woods of the province and govern 
ment of Nainas, between the river Blanco to the 
$. and the Curaray to the n. and bounded w. by 
the nation of the Iquitos. 

PARAPAMENA, a large and abundant river 
of the province and captainship of San Pablo in 
Brazil. It rises w. of the capital, and running 
w. n. w. enters the Parana. Don Juan de la 
Cruz wrongly calls it Paranapane. 

PARAPITI, a river of the province and 
government of Santa Cruz de la Sierra in Peru. 
It rises in a large lake in the territory of the 
Pampas de Huanacos, and shortly after loses 
itself in another lake, where the river Ubay 
heads. Some call it the Apure ; on its shores are 
seen the ruins of the antient capital of the province 
which was destroyed by the infidel Indians. 

PARAPITINGA, a lake of the province and 
captains/lip of Portoseguro in Brazil. It is form 
ed from a waste water of the river Paracatus, to 
the e. of the town of Minas Generates. 

PARAPU, a small river of the province and 
government of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia, 
which rises n. of the lake in which the river Ma- 
caoza heads, runs e. and enters the Maranon. 

PARAPURA, a settlement of the province and 

S>vernment of Venezuela in the Nuevo Reyno de 
ranada ; situate on the shore of the river Gua- 
rico, and s. s. e. of the lake Tacarigua. 

PARAQUARO, a settlement of the head set 
tlement of the district and akaldia mayor of 
Tanzitaro in Nueva Espana. It is of an hot 
temperature, situate in a beautiful and spacious 
valley ; abounding in salubrious waters, and 
affords fine crops of rice, with which the various 
provinces of the kingdom are supplied, and in 
the traffic of which this place is always filled 
with traders, 11 leagues s. of the capital. 

PARAQUARO, another settlement, with the de 
dicatory title of San Agustin, in the province 
of Cinagua of the same kingdom. It is of an hot 
temperature, contains 27 families of Indians, and 
is annexed to the curacy of Turicato ; abounds in 
maize, fruit, and larger cattle. But it is subject 
to the epidemic disorder of garrapalas (ticks), 
which the Indians call turicotas^ and which are 
extremely noxious ; 37 leagues s. e. of its capital. 



PAR 

PARARCA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Parinacochas in Peru. 

PARARE, a river of the province and govern 
ment of San Juan de Los Llanos in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada. It runs nearly due e. and 
enters the Cazanare close to the settlement of the 
reduction of San Salvadar. 

PARARIN, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Guailas in Peru. 

PARARUMA, a very lofty rock of a pyrami- 
dical form on the shore of the river Orinoco, the 
base of it being more than half a league in circum 
ference ; it is all of one piece, and can only be 
ascended on two sides with great difficulty. The 
top, which at a distance appears like a spear, is a 
plain of an oval figure, surrounded by a border or 
breast-work of the same stone ; but the soil is 
very fertile. The Indians of the Saliva nation 
have here a beautiful garden, always irrigated by 
an hidden stream of water which flows in the same 
rock. Here are plantains, pines, and various 
fruits in abundance ; but the greatest attraction 
of this spot is a certain bower, whither the In 
dians come to shelter themselves from the heat, 
and occasionally to amuse themselves, observing, 
from that eminence, the vessels passing along the 
river, and which are discernible at an immense 
distance. 

PARAS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Vilcas Huaman in Peru ; annex 
ed to the curacy of Totos, celebrated for the 
first quicksilver mine, having been discovered 
there by Pedro Contreras, native of San Lucar 
de Barrameda in 1560, in company with Enrique 
Garces, a Portuguese, the viceroy of Peru at the 
time being Don Garcia Hurtado de Mendoza, 
Marquis of Canete ; but this mine was abandoned 
after three years, the profit not equalling the 
expenccs. 

PARASIS, a nation of barbarous Indians, who 
inhabit the n. w. shore of the river Paraguay, 
and the w. of the lake of Los Xarayes ; bounded 
on this part by the Moxos, and s. by some tribes 
of the Chiquitos. 

PARATAPA,asmall river of the province and 
government of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia, 
which runs e. in a serpentine course, and enters 
the Ami by this rhumb. 

PARATARI, a small river of the province 
and country of Las Amazonas, in the territory 
possessed by the Portuguese. An arm of this 
river returning into its native bed, forms a small 
island. 

PARATECA, a village and settlement of the 
Portuguese, of the province and captainship of 



P A 11 



PAR 



Todos Santos in Brazil ; situate on the w. shore 
of the Grande de San Francisco, and at the mouth 
where this enters the Rans. 

[PARATEE, a bay on the s. w. side of the 
island of Jamaica. It is s. e. of Banister bay ; 
its s. e. point is also called ParateeJ] 

PARATI, or ANGRA DE Los REYES, a small 
town of the province and captainship of Rio Ja- 
neyro in Brazil : situate near the coast, and 
opposite the Isla Grande. 

PARATINGA, a large river of the kingdom 
of Brazil, which rises in lat. 8, runs many leagues 
to s. s. w. and enters the Tocantines, opposite the 
Real of La Asuncion. 

PARATININGA. See XINGU. 

PARATINI, a river of the province and cap 
tainship of Hey in Brazil, which runs 5. and turn 
ing e. enters the grand lake of Los Patos. 

PARATIPANA, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Para in Brazil, which runs n. 
n. w. and enters the Xingu. 

PARAVARI, a large river of Peru, which 
rises in the province and corregimiento of Cara- 
baya, afterwards unites itself with the Beni, and 
thus forms the Castela. On its shores are many 
Indian nations, of whom nothing is known. 

PARAVINANAS. SeePARiME. 

PARAUPASA, a river of the kingdom of 
Brazil, which rises in the mountains of the Caria- 
putangas Indians, runs e. and enters the Piloens 
near the town of Boa. 

PARAUTE, a settlement of the province and 
government of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; situate on the e. shore of the lake of 
Marcaibo, and of the river of its name. 

This river, which is small, rises in the country 
of Giraharas Indians, runsty. and enters the lake. 

[PARAYBA. See PARAIBA.] 

PARAZU, a small river of the province and 
captainship of Seara in Brazil, which runs n. and 
enters the sea between the Iguarazu and the 
Paranamerin. ^ 

PARCELA, BAXO DE, a shoal on the coast of 
the province and captainship of Rio Janeyro in 
Brazil, close to cape Santo Tome. 

PARCO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Chilques and Masques in Peru; 
annexed to the curacy of Acchaamansaya. 

PARCOS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Angaraez, in the same kingdom 
as the former ; 16 leagues from Guamanga, and 
13 from Guancavelica. 

PARCU, an ancient and small province of 
Peru, belonging at present to Cuzco. It was 
conquered and united to the empire by the Inca 
Viracocha, eighth emperor. 



PARDO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Paraguay, which runs 5. and enters the 
great river of the Portuguese. It is also called 
Anemby. 

PARDO, another, a small river in the territory 
ofCuyaba of the kingdom of Brazil, which runs 
s. s. w. and enters the Parana. 

PARDO, another, called also Colorado, which 
runs nearly s. and turning n. n. w. enters the 
Parana by the s. side in a very large stream. 

PARDORA, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of Pernambuco in Brazil ; situate w. 
of the city of San Augustin, near the coast. 

[PARt)UBA, a bay on the coast of Brazil, 10 
leagues w. n. w. of Brandihi bay.] 

PARE, a settlement of the corregimiento of the 
jurisdiction of Velez in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, of a hot but healthy temperature ; and 



having a soil abounding 



111 



wheat and maize, of 



which it gathers two crops annually, in yucas, 
plantains, and sugar canes, which are worked in a 
great number of sugar engines which it has, and 
which render it a settlement of as considerable 
commerce as any in that kingdom. It contains 
600 housekeepers, and is seven leagues from the 
city of Velez. 

PARE, a small river of the province and 
government of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia, 
which rises n. of the settlement of San Joseph de 
Mapoyes, runs e. and then turning s. enters the 
Manapiari. 

PAREDONES, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Maule in the kingdom of 
Chile, annexed to the curacy of Vichuquen. 

PAREDONES, another settlement, in the island 
of Cuba ; on the n. coast, opposite the isle of 
Guinchos. 

PAREDONES, some shoals or rocks, near the 
coast of the province and government of Carta 
gena and Nuevo Reyno de Granada. 

[PAREN, a lake of Chile, S. America.] 

[PARHAM, town and harbour, on the n. side 
of the island of Antigua, in the W. Indies. The 
harbour is defended by Byram fort, at Barnacle 
point, on the w. side, and farther up by another 
fort on the e. side. The town is regularly built, 
and lies at the head of the harbour, and in St. 
Peter s parish.] 

PARHAM, a city of the island of Antigua, one 
of the Antilles; on the n. coast, with a good 
port. 

PARI, a settlement of the province and corre 
gimiento of Canta in Peru. 

PARI, an abundant river of the above province 
and kingdom, which rises in the lake Chinchai- 
cocha of the province of Tarma. laves the pro- 



56 PAR 

vinces of Canta, Xauja, and Huanta, runs s. till 
it reaches the province of Guarochiri, where it 
forms an elbow, and turning e. after collecting 
the waters of various other rivers, enters the 
Maranon, with which some have wrongly iden 
tified it. 

PARI, another, a small river of the province 
and government of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia, 
one of those which enters the Orinoco by the e. 
side. 

PARIA, a province and corregimiento of the 
kingdom of Peru, in the archbishopric of Char- 
cas ; bounded n. by the provinces of Pacages, 
n. e. by the jurisdiction of the town of Oruro, e. 
and s. e. by that of Porco, s. w. by that of Lipes, 
and za. by that of Carangas. It is of a cold tem 
perature, and the vegetable productions are those 
peculiar to the sierra ; such as papas, bark, 
barley, &c. It has large breeds of smaller cattle, 
some also of larger, and of llamas, vicunas, and 
huanacos. Here are salt mines, and a lake from 
which much is extracted ; also various streams of 
warm water. 

The corregidors of Oruro being alcaldes may- 
ores of the mines of the district of Veinte Leguas 
and Paria, the capital of this province, and the 
settlement of Sepulturas, being included in the 
same limits ; they appropriated to themselves, 
some years since, some silver mines of the cor- 
dillera of Condocondo, and some gold mines, of 
which many have filled with water, and others 
are not worked from the great expence. In this 
province runs a large river from the province of 
Pacages, which is called the Desaguadero, taking- 
its source in the great lake Titicaca or Chu- 
cuito ; and which being passed in various parts 
in rafts made of tortora or reed, runs s. e. and 
forms a lake of three to four leagues long and 
two wide, in which breeds a fish, called by some 
suckes, and by others bagres. 

This river, as being very abundant, and the 
lake continuing always at one height, it caused a 
suspicion that its waters had a subterraneous 
vent ; and in fact it is found to have a whirlpool, 
over which some old rafts being permitted to 
float, where, after giving two or three turns, 
sucked down. The water is thought to find itself 
a passage into the sea under the cordillera, and 
through the shore, close to the port of Iqueique. 
In 1748 its waters increased to an immense 
height, and it was concluded that some raft had 
blocked up its subterraneous passage ; a circum 
stance most likely, since, after a time, they sub 
sided to their ordinary state. One part of this 
province is inundated in the rainy seasons for 
many leagues. 



PAR 

The inhabitants, who amount to 10,000, make 
cheeses of sheep s milk, much esteemed in other 
provinces for their delicacy. Its corregirtor used 
to have a repartimiento of 50,200 dollars, and 
paid an alcava/a of 401 dollars yearly: the capital 
is the town of the same name. 

[The natives of this province, as well as those 
of Guayana and Debaiba, were originally very 
zealous in their worship of the devil and idols, to 
whom they sacrificed men, and then eat them ; 
when their gods were angry, they punished them 
selves with fasting. Their priests were stoned or 
burned, if they married against their vow of 
chastity. They believed in rewards and punish 
ments after this life. The spot in the moon they 
held to be a man imprisoned there for incest with 
his sister. They fed yearly the departed souls 
with maize and wine. They held the souls of great 
men only, and such as were buried with them, 
immortal. Their great men s funeral pomps 
were celebrated yearly with much lamentations, 
drinking, and bestial ceremonies, both men and 
women casting aside all modesty. These sub 
jects are further treated off by the authors, P. 
Martyr, Gomara, Linschoten, Cieza, &c.J 

PARIA, the lake of which we have above spoken, 
which receives the waters of the river by a chan 
nel of 80 fathoms. These waters are of very 
bad quality, but abound in excellent fish, and are 
thought, with great reason, to have a subterrane 
ous vent. 

PARIA, a province. See ANDALUCIA. 
PARIA, a gulf, between the coast of the province 
of Cumana to the s. s. w. and w. n. w. and the 
island Trinidad to the n. e. and s. e. terminating 
by the n. at the cape of Las Salinas and that of 
San Joseph, and by the e. at the cape or point of 
Blanquizales ; its entrance at the former part 
being by the mouth of the Drago or Dragon, at 
the latter by the point of Galera. Its extent 
from e. to w. is 88 miles, and from n. to s. 50, 
and off the coast of the island of Trinidad is very 
good anchorage. 

[This gulf is called by the Spaniards Triste 
(Sad), but as the whole of the coast of Tiera 
Firme which surrounds the gulf goes by the 
name of Paria, the English and the French geo 
graphers have given that name to the gulf itself. 
What these two latter nations mean by the gulf 
Sad, is a gulf which lies between cape Coderas 
and point Hicacos. 

From the two lands to the n. of this gulf, jut 
out two points, between which are three islands, 
which are nearly e. and w. of each other, and con 
sequently close the gulf to the n. excepting four 
channels left between the islands called Dra- 



PAR 

gon s mouths. The largest of these channels, 
being 6 miles broad, is that to the w. between 
the point Pena of Cumana, and the island named 
Chacachacares. There are several rocks above 
water in the channel lying close to the point, 
and one hidden rock two cables length from the 
island. 

Between this island and the next, which is 
called Navios, there is a second channel named 
Ship Channel (des vaisseaux,) which, as it runs 
from n. to n. e. is very good for vessels entering 
the gulf, but very bad for going out. The third 
channel is formed by the preceding island, and that 
which lies next to the e. named Monos ; it is called 
de Huevos, or Channel of Eggs. It runs from 
n. n. e. to 5. s. e. ; it is, like the preceding, better 
for entering than leaving the gulf. The fourth 
channel is formed by the preceding island M o- 
nas, and the w. n. w. point of Trinidad, and is 
called Apes Mouth. It is narrow and danger 
ous, on account of a rock in the middle of the 
passage. The small vessels that enter by this 
passage always pass between the rock and Tri 
nidad. 

This gulf forms one of the finest ports in the 
world ; its size and extent has been already men 
tioned ; it has in every part good anchorage, the 
bottom being mud, except by Camana, where 
there are some sands and banks, and the water is 
shallow. On the 5. some of the mouths of the 
Orinoco fall into the gulf in many branches, and 
with great velocity. It is probable that the 
Orinoco originally may have separated the island 
of Trinidad from the main land, and have also 
produced the four channels which are above des 
cribed. The current is certainly always run 
ning out, and for which reason, it is impossible 
for ships to enter if the winds are not favourable 
and sufficiently strong. 

On the coast of Paria there are several ports 
and roadsteads, which render the communication 
with Trinidad very easy.] 

PARIA, a point of the coast of the former gulf, 
which runs into the sea for many leagues, opposite 
the island ofTrinadad, and which is called alsode 
Megillones : in lat. 9 12 n., long. 62 I w. 

PARIACACA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Huarochiri in Peru. 

PARIACOTO, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Guailas in Peru ; annexed 
to the curacy of Llautan in the province of Santa. 

PARIAGUAN, a settlement of the province 
of Barcelona and government of Cumaana, at 
the foot of the sierra of Paraigua, on the shore of 
the river Ipire. 

VOL. IY. 



PAR 



57 



PARIAHUANCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Xauja in Peru, annexed to 
the curacy of Cochangara. 

PARIAMARCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Canta in Peru, annexed to 
the curacy of its capital. 

PARIANCHARCA, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Tama in Peru. 

PARIARCA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Guamalies in Peru. 

PARICATUBA, a lake of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas, in the Portuguese 
possession, opposite the strait of Pauxis. 

PARIDA, CAYO DE LA, a rocky isle or shoal 
near the coast of Florida, at the extremity of the 
same between El Gran Martin and the Cayo 
Vizcaino. 

[PARILLO, a town of Peru, generally called 
Santa ; which see.] 

PARIME, an immense lake of the province of 
Dorado, being the deposit of the waters of in 
finite rivers, some of which are very large, which 
enter by a very wide arm of the river Branco 
and others. Some modern authors would have 
it, that this lake is merely fabulous and imaginary ; 
but, according to the late advices, it is said to be 
real and existing. Its extent is not known, but 
it varies according to its different parts : it is of 
a square figure, and the greater part of the tra 
vellers allow it to be 82 leagues long from e. to w. 
so as to resemble a little sea, its waters even 
being salt. 

From the mountains to the w. of it, flow down 
many rivers, all of which run into it, and on the 
n. side it has a channel by which it runs out into 
the river Paraba. In the midst of it are many 
islands, and in the mountains dwell many na 
tions of infidel Indians, supposed to be in pos 
session of that beautiful country the Dorado, but 
which, from the solicitude it has caused, has 
been fatal to so many. 

On the n. n. e. the river Cuyuni rises from this 
lake, and laves the territory of the Dutch colo 
nies, and afterwards unites itself with the Eseqiu> 
bo ; on the s. rises the Parana-piiinga or Ya- 
guapira, which means white water, the which 
enters the Maranan by three mouths by the n. 
part, and was discovered in 1745. Another 
river, also of the same name as the lake, issues 
from it. 

[It is now discovered beyond all question, and 
according to the latest maps and manuscript 
drawings of that country? that this lake is nothing 
but an overflow of tne head branches of the 
Branco, in the valley of Parimo.] 
I 



58 



PAR 



The above-named river, which is very large, 
runs continually s. collecting the waters of several 
other rivers, and, making various turns, enters 
the Negro by four mouths or arms, called Dara, 
Podaviri, Varaca, and the Principal mouth. From 
the spot where the first arm divides itself to its en 
trance into the Negro, it is called Paravillanas. 

PARINA-COCAS. See PARINACOCHAS. 

[PARINA, a point n. w. of the harbour of 
Payta, on the coast of Peru. The country within 
the point is high and mountainous. Between 
Payta and it is a large bay, having shoals. The 
land is low, and some white hills are found all 
the way.] 

PARlNACOCHAS, a province and corregimi- 
ento of the kingdom of Peru ; bounded n. by the 
province of Aimaraes, n. w. by that of Vilcas 
huaman, e. by that of Chumbivilcas, s. by that 
Condesuyos de Arequipa, and w. by that of 
Lucanas. Its length from n. e. to s. w. is 35 
leagues, and its width 12 by the opposite rhomb, 
though rather irregular, as are all the provinces 
of the sierra. Such being its situation, it is ex 
tremely cold, with exception of some ravines, 
where the temperature is so benign that pears, 
and other kinds of fruits, except chirimoyas, 
will grow all the year round, and this more par 
ticularly in the settlement of Pause, and in some 
others, where they grow wheat, beans, and bar 
ley in abundance. Here are breeds of cattle, 
particularly of the lanigerous sort, from the 
fineness and plenty of the pasture. They weave 
here some cloth, which they call chuspas^ ciimbes^ 
and lliellas of beautiful fabric, for which purpose 
they cultivate a sort of grain which they call the 
magno. In the mountains are found many hua- 
nacos, which are used in droves for carrying 
light burthens. 

In the curacy of Pullo,are various mines of gold, 
which they dress with quicksilver ; but the qua 
lity of that metal is uncertain, and the emolument 
it produces is not easily calculated ; but it ought 
not to be small, as a very considerable proportion 
of labourers and traders find employment by it. 

There are here salt mines, various streams of 
warm medicinal waters, and a lake of seven leagues 
long and one wide, on which breeds a kind of 
white bird, whose name, in the language of the 
country, is panuira, and it is from a corruption 
of this word, and the adjunct cucha. which sig 
nifies lake, that we have parinacocha. Many of 
the inhabitants, as well Indians as Mustees, are 
engaged in the occupation of drovers, and carry 
from the province of Cumana to that of Cuzco 
and other parts, wine, brandy, /V, olives, dried 



PAR 

fish, and prawns ; taking in exchange dried beef, 
tallow, papas , chuno, and clothes. The inha 
bitants, who are divided into 30 settlements, 
should amount to about 11,300. The corregidor 
used to have a repartimiento of 86,400 dollars, 
and it paid an alcavala of 691 dollars annually. 
The capital is the settlement of Pausa ; the 
others are, 

Coracoa, Quechualla, 

Chumbi, Pampamarca, 

Pullo, Huanicatas, 

Pararca, Huarhua, 

Pausa, Taurisma, 

Cascara, Ampi, 

Colta, Pausa. 

Oyolo, Mongui, 

Corculla, Arcos, 

Lam pa, Chiapi, 

Zayla, Quilcata, 

Charcana, Huataca, 

Andamarca. Opahuacho, 

Rebacaico, Alpabamba. 

Bellinga, Casiri. 

PARINACOTA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimicnto of Arica in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Copta. 

PARIQUIZES, a river of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas in the Portuguese pos 
sessions. It rises between the rivers Juamunda 
and Guatuma, runs s. and enters the second just 
before this enters the Maranon. 

PARIS, a settlement of the island of Barba- 
does, in the district and parish of S. Thomas, on 
the w. coast, n. e. of the city of Bridge-town. 

PARIS, a small river of Louisiana in N. Ame 
rica, which runs w. and enters the Mississippi, 
between those of Mine and La Roche. 

[PARIS, a thriving township of excellent land 
in New York state, Herkemer county. It is 
s. w. of Whitestown six miles, from which it 
was taken, and incorporated in 1792. In 1795 
four townships were taken from it, viz. Hamil 
ton, Sherburne, Brookfield, and Sangersfield. 
It contained, by the state census of 1796, 3459 
inhabitants, of whom 564 were electors. Iron 
ore is found in the vicinity of Paris. Hamil 
ton academy is situated in this town, in Clinton 
parish, where also a Congregational church has 
lately been erected, and marks of rapid progress 
in improvements and wealth are visible.] 

[^PARIS, an island on the coast of S. Carolina; 
which see.] 

PARITA, a settlement of the alcaldia mayor of 
Nata in the kingdom of Tierra Firme, near the 
coast of the S. sea. It produces maize, yucas. 



PAR 

and pigs, with which it supplies the capital of 
Panama, from whence it is 40 leagues distant. 

PARIVA, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Rejno de Gra 
nada. It enters the Zaripa. 

[PARKER S Island, in Lincoln county, dis 
trict of Maine, is formed by the waters oflienne- 
beck river on the w. by the sea on the s. by Je- 
remysquam bay on the e. and by a small strait 
which divides it from Arrowsick island on the n. 
It derives its name from John Parker, who pur 
chased it of the natives in 1650 ; and a part of 
it still remains to his posterity. It is in the 
township of Georgetown ; which see.] 

[PARKER S River, takes its rise in Rowley, 
in Essex county, Massachusetts, and after a 
course of a few miles, passes into the sound 
which separates Plumb island from the main 
land. It is navigable about two miles from its 
mouth, where a bridge crosses it 870 feet long 
and 26 feet wide, consisting of solid piers and 
eight wooden arches. It is on the post-road 
from Boston n. and was built in 1758. It is 
supported by a toll.] 

PARMUNCA, an extensive and beautiful 
valley of the kingdom of Peru, to the n.w. of 
Cuzco. It is fertile, of a sandy soil, and was 
anciently called Chimu, a name of one of the 
Indian chiefs. The Inca Pachacutec subjected 
and united it to the empire. La Martiniere calls 
it Parmonga, citing Mr. de 1 Isle, who is no au 
thority ; but Garcilaso Inca calls it Parmunga. 

PARNAIBA, a river of the kingdom of Brazil, 
in the territory of Cuyaba. It is small, runs 
s.s.w. and enters that of Las Porrudos. 

PARNAPICABA, a settlement of the province 
and captainship of San V^incente in Brazil; at 
the skirt of a mountain of the same name, and 
near the river Itaman. 

PARNASO, a very lofty mountain of the pro 
vince and government of Guayana, or part of 
the country of Las Amazonas possessed by the 
Dutch. 

PARO, a small island of the S. sea, near the 
coast of the province and government of Costa 
rica in the kingdom of Guatemala. It is in the 
gulf of Nicoya in the middle of its entrance. 

PAROQUE, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Todos Santos in Brazil, which 
rises near the coast, runs s. and enters the sea 
by the side of the bay. 

PARQUIN, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Chancay in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Canchas. 

PARRA, a small island of the gulf of Pa- 



P A R 



59 



nama, between the islands Chapira and Cheto, 
and one of those called Las Perlas, on account 
of the pearls found there. In lat. 8 26 n. 

PARRAL, SAN JOSEPH DEL, a settlement 
and real of silver mines, of the province of 
Tepeguana, and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya, 
and one of the most populous settlements in that 
kingdom : of a mild temperature, fertile, and 
abounding in fruits, grain, and cattle ; situate 
on the bank of the stream of Oro. In its vi 
cinity are several mines, and different missions 
which were held by the Jesuits, as also the sum 
mer retreats which they call Del Canutillo. At 
nine leagues distance to the n. is a. cultivated 
estate, and where there are large breeds of 
cattle, called San Pedro. Seventy-five leagues 
n. n. w. of the capital, Guadiana, in lat. 27 10 . 
long. 261 30 . 

[PARRAMORE, one of the small islands in 
the Atlantic ocean, which line the e. coast of 
Northampton county, Virginia.] 

PARRAS, a town of the same province and 
kingdom as the former settlement ; situate in the 
vicinity of the -lake of its name, or of San Pedro 
and the stream of the Guanabal. In its district, 
especially to the s. are many cultivated estates 
and grazing lands, such as are those of Los Pa- 
tos, El Alamo, La Pena, and Oldin. Fifty 
leagues n. w. of the capital, Guadiana, in lat. 
26 35 . Long. 263 40 . 

[A species of wild vine found in this beau 
tiful situation has procured it the name of Par- 
ras from the Spaniards. The conquerors trans 
planted to this place the vitis vinifera of Asia ; 
and this branch of industry has been found to 
succeed very well.] 

PARRAS, another settlement, in the the same 
province and kingdom as the former town : one 
of those which compose the missions which were* 
held by the Jesuits. 

PARRAGOTES, a nation of barbarous In 
dians of Equinoctial France, near the n. coast 
of Cayenne ; bounded by the nation of the Su- 
payes, and having a communication and com 
merce with the Dutch, but being inveterate 
enemies to the French, fighting them whenever 
they meet them. Some geographers call them 
Paracotes. 

PARRILLA, SANTA MARIA DE LA. See 
SANTA. 

PARRIPARIES, a barbarous nation of In 
dians of the Nuevo Reyno de Granada, de 
scendants of the Panches. They dwell to the 
w. of the grand river of La Magdalena, and 
are bounded by the Amurcas and Calandaimas, 
i 2 



60 



PAR 



are few in numbers, but ferocious and cruel, and 
consequently feared by other nations. 

[PARR Town, a new and thriving town in 
Nova Scotia.] 

[PARR S Point, is the s.e. point of Half- 
moon bay, on the n. e. side of the island of St. 
Christopher s, in the W. Indies. The coast here 
is rocky.] 

[PARSONSFIELD, a township of the dis 
trict of Maine, in York county; situate on the 
New Hampshire line, between Great and Little 
Ossipee rivers, and is 98 miles n. of Boston. 
It was incorporated in 1785, and contains 655 
inhabitants.] 

PARTIDAS, ROCAS, some shoals of the S. 
sea, close to the coast of the province and go 
vernment of Veragua in the kingdom of Tierra 
Firme, opposite the settlement of San Pablo. 

PARTIDO, a river of the province and alcal- 
dia mayor of Nicoya, in the kingdom of Guate 
mala. It rises near its capital, runs n. n. w. and 
enters the great lake of Nicaragua. 

[PARTIDO, a small island, under the high 
hill of St. Martin, in the s.w. part of Campea- 
chy gulf. It lies in the fair- way across the bay 
from cape Catoche to Vera Cruz.] 

[PARTRIDGEFIELD, a township of Mas 
sachusetts, in Berkshire county ; 26 miles w.n.w. 
of Northampton, and 128 w. of Boston. It was 
incorporated in 1775, and contains 1041 inha 
bitants.] 

PARU, a town of the province and country 
of Las Amazonas, in the part settled by the Por 
tuguese ; situate towards the n. and on the shore 
of that river, where the Portuguese have built a 
fort. The town is in lat. 1 39 s. 

PARU, a river of this province, called by the 
Portuguese, Ginapape, it flows down from the 
Sierras de Tumucucuracjue to the s. and enters 
the Amazonas on the n. side, at no great distance 
from its mouth. 

PARU, another river, of the province and go 
vernment of Caguan, in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. It rises in a llanura^ runs n. e. and 
enters the Caura. 

PARU, a whirlpool of the river Caura, very 
large and rapid in the part where this river is 
entered by the Iniquari. 

PARUASI, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Guayana, or Nueva Andalucia. It 
runs n. through the territory of the Mapoyes In 
dians, abounds in excellent fish, and enters the 
Orinoco by its s. part. 

PARUIPA, a small river of the province and 
captainship of Portoseguro in Brazil. It rises 



PAS 

near the coast, runs e. and enters the sea be 
tween the rivers Caravelas and Perecipe. 

PARULARI, a river of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas in the Portuguese 
possessions. It is the same as the Apulaila- 
vare, which at its source has this name. 

PARARUMA, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia. It 
is one of those which enter the Orinoco, opposite 
the mouth of the Sinaruco. Mr. Bellin calls it 
Paruma. 

PARUPO, a river of the same province and 
government as the former. It rises from a lake 
which is near the settlement of Tapia, and enters 
the Arui by the e. part. 

PARURO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimicnto of Chilques and Masques in Peru. 

PASAGE, or DOTACIONES, a settlement 
and garrison of the kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya. 
where there are 33 men and a captain to guard 
against the incursions of the infidel Indians. 
It is situate in a very fertile territory, where 
there are many gardens, in which are culti 
vated in abundance fruit trees and vines. It 
is equally surrounded by many estates, which 
are fertile in grain and cattle. Towards the 
n. runs a spacious and pleasant plain. Thirty 
leagues n. n. e. of the capital. 

PASAGE, a small city of the island of Ja 
maica; situate in the road which leads from 
Puerto Real to Spanish Town, seven miles s. e. 
of the latter, at the mouth of the river Cobre, 
where the English have a fort furnished with 10 
or 12 canon. It is a place of much commerce, 
and its population consists of 400 houses. 

PASAGE, a settlement of Indians of the nation 
of Los Colorados, who dwell in the mountains 
of this name in the province and corregimiento of 
Latacunga in the kingdom of Quito. 

PASAGE, another, of the province and go 
vernment of Tucuman in the district and juris 
diction of the city of Salta; situate on the shore 
of the river of its name, or otherwise called 
Salado. 

PASAGE, a river of the same province. See 
SALADO. 

PASAGE, another river, in the strait of Ma 
gellan, which enters the sea opposite the narrow 
pass of this name. 

PASAGE. This narrow pass is where the 
strait is most contracted, and is the third and 
last pass to enter the S. sea. 

PASAGERO, a small isle of the N. sea, be 
tween the Antilles, e. of the island of Puerto 
j and between this and St. Thomas. 



PAS 

PASAGOCHI, a settlement of the missions 
which were held by the Jesuits in the province 
of Taramara and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya. 
Thirty -two leagues w. s.w. of the town and real 
of the mines of San Felipe de Chiguagua. 

PASAMACADIE. [See PASSAMAQUODDY.] 

PASAMACADIE, an island situate near the 
coast, of the same province, within a bay, to 
the n. of Grand Menan. 

PASAMAYO, or PASAMAYU, a river of the 
kingdom of Per . It rises in the province and 
corregimiento of Canta, in the sierra which di 
vides this province from that of Chancay, from 
whence it runs w. and then into the S. sea, form 
ing a small bay. Eighteen miles s. of the town 
of Chancay. 

PASAO, or PASADO CABO, a point of the 
coast of the S. sea, in the province and govern 
ment of Guayaquil and kingdom of Quito. It is 
about 25 miles to the s. of the equinoctial line, 
and on it is a signal-house to give intelligence of 
vessels appearing on the coast. 

PASAOS, or PASAVES, a barbarous nation 
of Indians, of the province and government of 
Guayaquiland kingdom of Quito. They inhabit 
the w. part, and were bounded formerly by the 
Ration of the Mantas. The emperor Huaina- 
Capac, thirteenth monarch of Peru, conquered it, 
and fixed in its territory the boundary of the 
empire by this part, on the coast of the Pacific 
sea. This nation is at the present day extinct. 

PAS AT ARIA, a river of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas in the Portuguese pos 
sessions. It is an arm of the Maranon or Ama 
zonas, which runs in a curve, and forming an 
island, returns back into itself. 

PASATRES, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of Rey in Brazil ; situate at the 
source of the river Negro. 

PASCA, a settlement and head settlement of 
the district of the corregimiento of this name, in 
the Nuevo Rey no de Granada. It is of a benign 
temperature, abounding in the vegetable produc 
tions of a warm and cold climate, and is very 
healthy. Forty-eight miles s. with a slight in 
clination to the w. of Santa Fe. 

PASCA, another settlement, of the province and 
corregimiento of Cicasica in Peru ; on the shore 
of the lake Chinchaicocha. 

[PASCA, another, of the province and govern 
ment of Mariquita, in the Nuevo Reyno de Gra 
nada, on the shore of the river Cauca.] 

PASCA, another, a large and abundant river 
which irrigates theprovince of Tocayma, in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada, and which united 



PAS 



(31 



with the Sumapaz, enters the grand river Mag- 
dalena, with the name of Fusagasuga. In its 
vicinity a famous battle was fought between Sa- 
guanmachipa, zipa or king of Bogota, and Uza- 
tama of Tunja, when the former was victorious. 

PASCAGOULA, a settlement of Indians of 
the province and government of Louisiana, on 
the shore and at the mouth of the river of its 



name. 



[These Indians live in a small village on Red 
river, about 60 miles below Natchitoches ; are 
emigrants from Pascagola river in W. Florida ; 
25 men only of them remaining speak Mobilian, 
but have a language peculiar to themselves ; 
most of them speak and understand French. 
They raise good crops of corn and garden 
vegetables ; have cattle, horses, and poultry 
plenty.] 

PASCAGOULA, a bay of the above province, 
between the bay of Movila and the river Pas- 
cagpula. 

PASCAGOULA, this river runs s. e. and enters 
the sea between the former bay and that of San 
Luis. 

[The river Pascagoula passes through the 
Georgia western territory, pursues a s. by e. 
course through W. Florida, and empties into the 
gulf of Mexico by several mouths, which toge 
ther occupy a space of three or four miles ; which 
is one continued bed of oyster-shells, with very 
shoal water. The westernmost branch has four 
feet water, and is the deepest. After crossing 
the bar there is from three to six fathoms water 
for a great distance, and the river is said to 
be navigable more than 150 miles. The soil 
on this river, like that on all the others that 
pass through Georgia into the gulf of Mexico, 
grows better as you advance to its source.] 

PASCAMAYO, a port of the coast of Peru 
in the province and corregimiento of Sana : near 
it are the ruins of the ancient Lambayeque. 

PASCATA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Asangaro in Peru ; annexed 
to the curacy of Sandia, in the province of Ca- 
rabaya. 

[PASCATAQUA, or PISCATAQUA, is the 
only large river whose whole course is in New 
Hampshire. Its head is a pond in the n. e. corner 
of the town of Wakefield, and its general course 
thence to the sea is s. s. e. about 40 miles. It 
divides New Hampshire from York county in 
the district of Maine, and is called Salmon Fall 
river, from its head to the lower falls at Berwick, 
where it assumes the name of Newichawannock, 
which it bears till it meets with Cochecho river. 



62- 



P A S 



which comes from Dover, when both run toge 
ther in one channel to Hilton s point, where the 
w. branch meets it : from this junction to the 
sea the river is so rapid that it never freezes ; 
the distance is seven miles, and the course gene 
rally from s. to s. e. The w. branch is formed 
by Swamscot river, which comes from Exeter, 
Winnicot river, which comes through Greenland, 
and Lamprey river, which divides Newmarket 
from Durham; these empty into a bay four 
miles wide, called the Great Bay. The water, 
in its further progress, is contracted into a lesser 
bay, and then it receives Oyster river, which 
runs through Durham, and Back river, which 
comes from Dover, and at length meets with 
the main stream at Hilton s point. 

The tide rises into all these bays, and branches 
as far as the lower falls in each river, and forms 
a most rapid current, especially at the season of 
the freshets, when the ebb continues about two 
hours longer than the flood ; and were it not for 
the numerous eddies, formed by the indentings 
of the shore, the ferries would then be impas 
sable. 

At the lower falls in the several branches of 
the river are landing-places, whence lumber and 
other country produce is transported, and vessels 
or boats from below discharge their lading ; so 
that in each river there is a convenient trading 
place not more than 12 or 15 miles distant from 
Portsmouth, with which there is constant com 
munication by every tide. Thus the river, from 
its form and the situation of its branches, is ex 
tremely favourable to the purposes of navigation 
and commerce. A light-house, with a single 
light, stands at the entrance of Piscataqua har 
bour, in lat. 43 n. and long. 70 43 .] 

PASCO, a settlement of the province and corrc- 
gimiento of Xauja in Peru ; the residence of the 
treasurer, and place of the royal coffers. 

PASCO, another settlement, in the province and 
corregimiento of Tarma, of the same kingdom. 

PASCONO, a settlement of the province and 
government of Antioquia in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada ; situate on the shore of the grand river 
Magdalena. 

[PASCUARO. See PASAUARO.] 

PASIGA, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Darien in the kingdom of Tierra Firme. 
It rises in the mountains of the 5. coast, and runs 
into the sea at the side of the point of Men- 
glares. 

PASIMONI, an abundant river of the pro 
vince and government of Guayana or Nueva 
Andalucia. It rises in the mountains to the w. 



PAS 

of the great lake Parime, and enters, divided into 
two arms, by the one into the river Negro, by 
the other into the channel of Casiriaque, forming 
a great island. Its shores are covered with trees 
of wild cacao. 

PASO, a settlement of the province and cor 
regimiento of Cochabamba in Peru. 

PASO, another settlement, which is small, in 
the government of Neiva and Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada ; situate on the shore of the grand 
river Magdalena, where it is entered bv the Pao. 
It is much reduced, and its inhabitants, who 
scarcely amount to 20 Indians, are employed in 
procuring the gold from the lavaderos (washing- 
places) in which it abounds. It is eight leagues 
from its head settlement. 

PASO, another settlement and garrison, with 
the additional title Del Norte, in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Vizcaya of N. America ; founded to 
restrain the infidel Indians. One hundred and 
seventy-five leagues n. of the capital, Durango. 

[This presidio, or military post, on the right 
bank of the Rio del Norte, is separated (says 
Humboldt) from the town of Santa Fe by an un 
cultivated country of more than 300 miles in 
length. We must not confound this place, 
which some manuscript maps in the archives of 
Mexico consider as a dependance of New Bis 
cay, with the Presidio del Norte, or De las Jun 
tas, situated further to the s. at the s. side of the 
mouth of the Rio Conchos. Travellers stop at 
the Paso del Norte to lay in the necessary pro 
visions for continuing their route to Santa Fe. 
The environs of the Paso are delicious, and re 
semble the finest parts of Andalucia. The fields 
are cultivated with maize and wheat ; and the 
vineyards produce such excellent sweet wines 
that they are even preferred to the wines of 
Parras in New T Biscay. The gardens contain 
in abundance all the fruits of Europe, figs, 
peaches, apples, and pears. As the country is 
very dry, a canal of irrigation brings the water 
of the Rio del Norte to the Paso. It is with 
difficulty that the inhabitants of the presidio can 
keep up the dam, which forces the waters of the 
rivers when they are very low to enter into the 
canal (azequia). During the great swells of the 
Rio del Norte, the strength of the current de 
stroys this dam almost every year in the months 
of May and J une. The manner of restoring and 
strengthening the dam is very ingenious. The 
inhabitants form baskets of stakes, connected to 
gether by branches of trees, and filled with earth 
and stones. These gabions (cestones) are aban 
doned to the force of the current, which, in its 



PAS 

eddies, disposes them in the point where the canal 
separates from the river.] 

PASO, another, with the dedicatory title of 
Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe. See this article. 

fPASPAYA, a province in the archbishopric 
of La Plata. It is mountainous, but abounds in 
grain, pulse, and fruits.] 

PASPAYA, a settlement and capital of the 
above province and corregimiento, [about 76 miles 
s. of the city of Chusiquisaca or La Plata.] 

PA SPAY A, a river of this province and corre- 
gimiento. 

PASPE, a bay of the s. coast of Nova Scotia 
or Acadia, between port Prospect and point 
Blanche. 

PASPEBIA, a settlement of the same province 
and colony as the former bay ; situate near the 
s. coast, in the interior of the port of Castors. 

PASQUA, a valley of the province and go 
vernment of Cumana, on the confines of the 
province of Venezuela, between the rivers Huare 
and Manapire. 

PASQUA, an island near the coast of the pro 
vince and captainship of Ilheos in Brazil ; situate 
at the mouth of a great port formed by the bar 
of Camamu and the point Saguaripa Vieja. 

PASQUA, a point, with the surname of Mala, 
in the island of Puerto Rico, and looking to the 
island of S. Thomas. 

PASQUAL, a small river of the province and 
captainship of San Vincente in Brazil. It runs e. 
and enters the sea in the bay of San Vincente. 

PASQUAL, a point of land on the s. coast, and 
in the part possessed by the French of the island 
S. Domingo ; between the bay of Mesle and the 
isle of Orange. 

PASQUAL, a mountain of the province andcp- 
tainship of Portoseguro in Brazil; between the 
rivers Jaco and Sarnabitiva. 

PASQUARO, or UTZILA, the capital of the 
province and bishopric of Mechoacan in Nueva 
Espana, once the court of the king Calzontzi. 
It is of a cold and moist temperature. The 
principal buildings are not without elegance, 
and it is situate in a delightful country, as 
being just at the entrance of the sierra, sur 
rounded by mountains covered with fine foli 
age ; also in the gardens, which it has in its 
llanuras, are abundance of fruits and flowers of 
different kinds. 

Towards the n. part is a great lake, 12 leagues 
in circumference, and so abounding in excellent 
fish as not only to provide this city but also that 
of Valladolid and other settlements ; great por 
tions also being at times sent to Mexico, where 



PAS 



63 



they are sold as great dainties. In the middle 
of this lake are some small islands, inhabited 
by Indians living in huts, who make a daily trade 
by the fish they catch in their canoes. 

The plain on which the city stands being sur 
rounded with rising grounds, there is an en 
trance by a wide causeway entirely of stone, 
and the first building which you discover on 
the e. side is a chapel, in which is venerated 
the image of Christ crucified ; which spot they 
call the Humilladero (place of humiliation), since 
here it was that the Indians surrendered them 
selves to the Spaniards. The parish-church, 
which was first began to be erected where it now 
stands, by the first bishop, but which, from not 
being concluded, was removed to Valladolid, is 
as to what exists of it, a sumptuous edifice. One 
nave only is finished out of the five which should 
render it complete ; but this is the admiration of 
architects, who confess that were it finished ac 
cording to the design, it would be unrivalled by 
any building in America. In this church are two 
winding stair-cases made of stone, and which are 
so nicely constructed that it is a common amuse 
ment for the Indians to seat themselves at the 
top and let them slip round and round to the 
bottom. The other staircase is a lofty pillar, 
with two fans leading different ways, so that two 
persons may descend out of different doors, and 
without seeing each other. 

This city Tias the convents of the religious 
orders of San Francisco, San Agustin, San Juan 
de Dios, a college which belonged to the Jesuits, 
and which is the second that was founded in 
Nueva Espana after that of Mexico, its general 
being Francisco de Borja, who sent to it one of 
the images of Santa Maria of Rome. In this 
college are interred Don Vasco de Quiroga, se 
cond bishop of that diocess, and the venerable 
brother Pedro Calzontzi, nephew of the king of 
the province, who, taking the habit of the Je 
suits, lived a holy life in the profession of 
school-master, and died by an epidemic dis 
order which he caught in the discharge of his 
duties, and whilst assisting the sick. Here is 
also another sumptuous temple, dedicated to 
Maria Santisima, with the title of La Salud, 
destined as a monastery for the nuns of Santa 
Catalina. In one of the wards of the city is 
venerated a miraculous effigy of Santo Christo 
de Tupataro, found by an Indian in 1748, in the 
heart of a tree which he was cutting down, with 
the cross, nails, and other insignia, perfectly 
wrought. 

The population of this city is composed of 500 



64 PAS 

families of Spaniards, Mustees, and Mulattoes, 
and of 2000 Indians, who occupy themselves in 
the commerce and labour of the copper mines in 
the vicinity of the city, as also in making sugar, 
and in selling the merchandise of the country. 
It is the head of the alcaldia mayor, and the 
residence of the alcalde mayor, who nominates 14 
lieutenants for so many other districts of the ex 
tensive jurisdiction into which it is divided. 
[Thirty-one miles s. w. of Valladolid, and 125 w. 
of Mexico, in lat. 19 29 30" n. and long. 101 
21 .] 

The settlements of which its jurisdiction con 
sists are the following : 

Tacambaro, San Juan Copaquaro, 

Cocupao, Arentapaqua, 

S. Francisco Iguatzeo, Quintzio, 
San Pedro Cucuchu- Turiquaro, 

chau, Santa Clara del Cobre, 

San Diego Cocupa, Opopeo, 
Santa F6, S. Francisco Uruapan, 

S. Geronimo Purun- Jucotacato, 

choquaro, San Gregorio, 

Reyes de Tirindaro, San Lorenzo, 
NaVanja, Santiago Angagua, 

S. Francisco Tarexero, San Juan Parangare- 
Cuenco, cutiro, 

Sipiajo, San Salvador, 

Comauja, San Pedro Sacan, 

Santiago Azajo, Santa Ana Tzirosto, 

Santa Ana Zacapo, San Marcos Apo, 
S. Francisco Etuquaro, Xapuquirio, 
San Miguel del Monte, San Francisco Corupo, 
Capuyo, San Felipe de los Cer- 

Indaparapeo, ros, 

Santiago Inguyo, Guango, 

S. Miguel Tarimbaro, San Antonio Urecho, 
Santiago de la Pnente, Echucandiro, 
Santa Maria Siqui- Santiago Undameo, 

nam, Tiripitio, 

San Luis Naguatzen, Aruramba, 
San Francisco Cheran, Acutzio, 
Santa Maria Coma- San Juan Puruandiro, 
chuen, San Francisco Anga- 

San Geronimo Arant- moqutiro, 

zan, Santiago Conguripo, 

S. Pedro Paracho, S. Andres Panindi- 

S. Juan Pomaquaran, quaro, 
S. Mateo Aguiran, Sta. Maria Aquanato, 

Santa Maria U rap ichu, S.Miguel Epexam, 
S.BartolomeCucucho, Santiago Numaran, 
Sta Cruz Tanaco, Rincon de Zaragoza. 

[The town of Pa c quaro seems for nothing more 
notable than for containing the ashes of a man, 
whose memory, after a lapse of two centuries 



P A S 



and a half, is still venerated by the Indians, the 
famous Vasco de Quiroga, alluded to by our au 
thor, and who died in 1556 at the village of Urua- 
pa. This zealous prelate, whom the indigenous 
still call their father ( Tata don Vasco) , was more 
successful in his endeavours to protect the unfor 
tunate inhabitants of Mexico than the virtuous 
bishop of Chiapa, Bartholome de las Casas. 
Quiroga became in an especial manner the bene 
factor of the Tarasc Indians, whose industry 
he encouraged. He prescribed one particular 
branch of commerce to each Indian village. 
These useful institutions are in a great mea 
sure preserved to this day. The height of Pas- 
cuaro is 2200 metres (or 7217 feet). Its present 
population 6000.] 

[PASQUIARO, a small town of the inten- 
dancy of Durango, to the s. of the Rio de Nasas. 
Population 5600.] 

[PASQUOTANK, a county of N. Carolina 
in Edenton district, n. of Albemarle sound. It 
contains 5497 inhabitants, including 1623 slaves.] 

fPASQUOTANK, a small river of N. Carolina, 
which rises in the Great Dismal Swamp, and 
passing by Hertford, falls into Albemarle sound.] 

[PASSAGE Fort, a small town of the island 
of Jamaica ; situate in the road between Port 
Royal and Spanish town, seven miles s. e. of 
the latter, and at the mouth of Cobre river, 
where is a fort with 10 or 12 guns. It has a 
brisk trade, and contains about 400 houses, the 
greatest part of them houses of entertainment.] 

[PASSAGE Island, lies across the mouth of the 
river Cobeca, near the n. w. part of the island of 
Porto R co. The harbour for ships is at the e. 
end of the island.] 

[PASSAGE Islands, Great and Little, two of 
the Virgin islands in the W. Indies, near the e. 
end of the island of Porto Rico. Lat. 18 20 w. 
Long. 65 17 / w.~] 

[PASSAGE Point, in the straits of Magellan, 
lies at the a\ end of Royal Reach, and five leagues 
W.n.zo. of Fortescue s bay.] 

[PASSAIK, or PASAICK, is a very crooked 
river. It rises in a large swamp in Morris 
county, New Jersey, and its course is from 
w. n. w. to e. s. e. until it mingles with the 
Hackinsak at the head of Newark bay. It is 
navigable about 10 miles, and is 230 yards wide 
at the ferry. The cataract, or great falls, in this 
river, is one of the greatest natural curiosities in 
the state. The river is about 40 yards wide, and 
moves in a slow, gentle current, until, coming 
within a short distance of a deep cleft in a 
rock which crosses the channel, it descends and 



PASSAMAQUODDY. 



[falls above 70 feet perpendicular, in one entire 
sheet, presenting a most beautiful and tremen 
dous scene. The new manufacturing town of 
Patterson is erected on the great falls of this 
river ; and its banks are adorned with many 
elegant country seats. It abounds with fish of 
various kinds. There is a bridge 500 feet long, 
over this river, on the post road from Philadel 
phia to New York.] 

[PASSAMAQUODDY, a bay and river, near 
which is the division line between the British 
province of New Brunswick and the United 
States of America. The island of Campo Bello, 
in the N. Atlantic ocean, is at the middle or w. 
passage of the bay, in lat. 45 n. and long. 66 
52 / w. The distance of Cross Isle, Machias, to 
W. Passamaquoddy head is nine leagues n. e. by 
e. and from the head over the bar to Allen s Isle 
n. n. w. two leagues. When you corne from the 
$. w. and are bound into W. Passamaquoddy, 
you must give the Seal Hocks a birth of three 
quarters of a mile before you haul in from the 
harbour, as there is a whirlpool to the e. of them. 
The bay is about a league from this point. It is 
high water here at the full and change of the 
moon, about the same time as at Boston. There 
are three rivers which fall into this bay ; the 
largest is called by the modern Indians, the 
Scoodick ; but by De Mons and Champlaine, 
Etchemins. Its main source is near Penobscot 
river, and the carrying-place between the two 
rivers is but three miles. See NEW BRUNSWICK. 
The mouth of Passamaquoddy river has 25 fathoms 
water. 

The following official document consists of the 
joint address of his Majesty s council and the 
house of representatives of the province of New 
Brunswick, in general assembly, respecting the 
islands in Passamaquoddy Bay, which had been 
claimed by the Americans, and gives a just idea 
of their importance to the British government. 

Having long entertained a confident hope, that 
the possession of Moose island, Dudley island, 
and Frederic island, in Passamaquoddy Bay, 
usurped by the state of Massachusetts, would 
never be sanctioned by an act, or avowed acquies 
cence on the part of his Majesty s government ; 
but that his Majesty s indisputable right to these 
islands would in due time be effectually asserted ; 
it is with very great concern that we now find, 
from a passage in a letter from Mr. Merry to 
your honour, stating the communications made 
to him by Mr. Madison, the American secretary 
of state, on the subject of these islands, that the 
United States do actually consider their present 

VOL. IV. 



possession as having been so sanctioned ; and 
that they are prepared to construe his Majesty s 
forbearance in his behalf, as having already war 
ranted their claim of an entire right to these 
islands. 

In the letter above referred to, Mr. Merry states, 
" that the American minister observed to him, 
that since his Majesty s government have allowed 
the United States to remain in possession of the 
above-mentioned islands, the waters which sur 
round them, to the distance to which the jurisdic 
tion of any territory is usually understood to ex 
tend, ought equally to be considered as American ; 
and added, that although he could not properly 
refer, on this occasion, to the convention between 
his Majesty and the United States, concluded in 
London, on the 12th of May, 1803, because it had 
not been ratified, nevertheless, by that convention, 
the islands in question were declared to belong to 
the United States ; an arrangement which would 
probably be confirmed whenever the matter of the 
boundary line between the two territories should 
again be brought into discussion ; the more so, 
because it was not the article respecting the e. 
boundary on the side of New Brunswick which 
occasioned the convention to remain unratified." 

As a hope may be entertained that the conven 
tion referred to by Mr. Madison respecting these 
islands may not yet be ratified, we request your 
honour to transmit to his Majesty s ministers 
this our joint address, on a subject of such im 
portance to his Majesty s government, and the 
rights and interests of his faithful subjects in this 
province. 

After the full discussion of the question of 
right to these islands, in the correspondence 
between his Majesty s ministers and his excel 
lency the lieutenant-governor of this province, 
on former occasions, particularly his excellency s 
dispatch to his Grace the Duke of Portland, 
dated 5th August, 1799, and the letters and do 
cuments therein mentioned, it may be thought 
superfluous to do more than generally to refer to 
those papers on the present occasion. We trust, 
however, that the magnitude of the object will 
justify our attempt to bring within a small com 
pass the result of those discussions, adding thereto 
some further observations which more imme 
diately press upon our attention, and which we 
hope will merit the consideration of his Majesty s 
ministers. 

That part of the second article of the treaty of 
peace between his Majesty and the United States 
which respects the present question is expressed 
as follows : " East, by a line to be drawn along] 

K 



PASSAMAQUODDY. 



[the middle of the river St. Croix, from its mouth 
jn the Bay of Fundy, to its source, &c. compre 
hending all islands within 20 leagues of any part 
of the shores of the United States, and lying 
between lines to be drawn due e. from the point 
where the aforesaid boundaries between Nova 
Scotia on the one part, and E. Florida on the 
other part, shall respectively touch the Bay of 
Fundy, and the Atlantic Ocean, excepting such 
islands as now are, or heretofore have been, 
within the limits of the said province of Nova 
Scotia." 

6 The islands hereby granted are evidently such, 
and such only, as are within 20 leagues of the 
coast, and also lie between those parallels of 
latitudes by which the shores of the ceded country 
are limited at their n. and s. extremeties. Hence 
all islands, not with those parallels, however near 
they may be to the shore, are certainly excluded 
from the grant : and of those which are within 
the parallels, all such as then were, or ever had 
been, within the limits of Nova Scotia, are also 
excluded. From the treaty of peace, therefore, 
the United States can derive no shadow of claim 
to the islands in question ; and his Majesty s 
original right to them remains entire and incon- 
testible. 

* For, we believe, it has never been contro 
verted, -even by the American government, that 
these islands always before the treaty of peace, 
were comprehended within the limits, and con 
stituted a part of the province of Nova Scotia, 
which it was the obvious intention of the treaty 
to reserve to his Majesty, by its utmost limits ; 
a reference to the original boundaries of the 
province in Sir William Alexander s patent, and 
to the description of the boundaries in all the 
commissions to his Majesty s governors of the 
province and the actual grant of two of these 
islands to Francis Bernard, and others, by letters 
patent under the seal of the province of Nova 
Scotia, bearing date the 30th October, 1765, 
place this fact beyond all dispute. 

These islands, at the time when the province of 
New Brunswick was erected in the year 1784, 
were all possessed and inhabited by his Majesty s 
subjects ; they were, by an act of the general as 
sembly of the province, passed in January 1786, 
for the purpose of dividing the several countries 
into towns and parishes, expressly made a part of 
the parish of W. Isles, in the county of Charlotte ; 
and their inhabitants yielded obedience to the 
laws of the province, in attending to the several 
duties which they were called upon to perform 
by the courts and magistrates established and 



appointed in that county ; and we cannot but 
consider it as a matter of serious regret, that 
the possession of these islands, shortly after 
wards usurped by the State of Massachusetts, 
and hitherto continued, has given rise to a claim 
of territorial right, on the part of that state, 
founded merely upon that possession. 

We now beg leave briefly to hint at some of 
the mischiefs and inconveniences which have re 
sulted from this continued usurpation. Very 
large quantities of lumber, furnished from the 
neighbouring parts of the province, are purchased 
by the American subjects, and carried to these 
islands for exportation ; which lumber is paid for 
with prohibited articles from the United States; 
and they in the same manner engross almost the 
whole of the produce of the fisheries among these 
islands, which is also paid for in the same man 
ner ; and thus we sustain a double injury. The 
W. India islands are, in a great measure, pre 
cluded from receiving their supplies of fish and 
lumber in British bottoms ; and large quantities 
of contraband goods are introduced into this pro 
vince, to the great injury of the commercial 
interests of Great Britain, as well as of the fair 
merchants and traders residing here. 

Their situation enables the inhabitants of these 
islands to engross a very great proportion of the 
plaster trade from this and the neighbouring pro 
vince of Nova Scotia, which is now become of 
great magnitude and extent, whereby his Majes 
ty s subjects are deprived of a very highly valu 
able carrying trade in this article. 

These islands are become places of refuge for 
insolent debtors, and disorderly persons of every 
description, particularly of deserters from his 
Majesty s service : all attempts to recover whom 
are insolently resisted. 

By the possession of these islands, great facility 
is given to the conveyance, in small vessels, of 
contraband articles of every description to vari 
ous parts of this province and Nova Scotia : so 
that the fair British merchant can have no equal 
competition with these illicit traders, even in the 
sale of British and W. Indian goods. 

Whereas, on the contrary, if these islands were 
in the possession of his Majesty s subjects, very 
large quantities of fish and lumber would be 
thereby furnished by them for the supply of the 
British W. [ndia islands, the present ruinous 
contraband trade greatly interrupted, and a very 
beneficial carrying trade, in the article of plaster 
of Paris, in a great measure secured. 

Or, if the Americans were dispossessed of these 
islands, there is no other situation in that neigh-J 



PASSAMAQUODDY. 



67 



[bourhood which could give them the advantages 
arid opportunities to injure the trade of this pro 
vince, which they now enjoy. 

4 To these considerations it may be added, that 
in case of hostilities at any time in the United 
States, or countenance given by them to hostile 
attacks from any other country, the province, by 
the possession of these islands, would, in that 
quarter, be rendered more secure from attack, 
and capable of defence. 

Impressed with the importance of the foregoing 
considerations, we indulge the hope, that the 
transmission of the address by your honour to 
his Majesty s ministers may be productive of 
important benefits to the interests and welfare of 
his Majesty s subjects in this province. 

(Signed) 

G. D. Ludlow, Speaker of the Council. 
A.Botsford, Speaker of the House of Assembly. 

Presented in March, 1807. 
Transmitted in June, 1807.] 

[PASSAMAQUODDY Post-Office, on the above 
described bay, is kept at a little village at the 
mouth of Cobscook river, 17 miles this side Bre 
wer s, the easternmost post-office in the United 
States, 20 n. e. of Machias, 378 n. e. of Boston, 
and 728 in alike direction from Philadelphia ; the 
above distances includingthe turnings of the road.] 

[PASSAM AQUODDlES, a tribe of Indians 
who inhabit near the waters of Passamaquoddy 
Bay.] 

[PASSAO, a cape on the coast of Peru, on the 
S. Pacific ocean, under the equator.] 

[PASSO MAGNO, a river of Florida, in lat. 
S6n.l 

[PASSUMPSIC, a small river of Vermont, 
runs a s. course and empties into Connecticut 
river, below the Fifteen-Mile-Falls, in the town 
of Barnet.] 

[PASSYUNK, a township in Philadelphia 
county, Pennsylvania.] 

PASTA, a settlement of the province and 
government of Popayan and Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada; founded near the coast of the S. Sea, 
on the shores of a lake of the same name, and w. 
of the capital. 

PASTAGOROS, or PANTAGOROS, a nation 
of barbarous Indians of the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, who inhabit the woods to the e. of the 
grand river Magdalena. They are cruel, feroci 
ous, and treacherous, and use poisoned arrows. 

PASTAR, a settlement of the province and 
government of Popayan in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. 



PASTAZA, or PASTACA, a large and naviga 
ble river of the kingdom of Quito ; which rises 
in the sierra of the provinces of Riobamba and 
Latacunga, runs for more than 100 leagues till it 
enters the Maranon or Amazon by the s. shore, 
with four mouths, and forming three islands near 
the settlement of Banos, by which it passes. It 
receives on the e . side 25 rivers, and on the w. 
15, and from that place takes the name of Pas- 
taza, first running into those of San Felipe, 
Patate, and others of the villages by which it 
passes. In the woods of its vicinity towards the 
w. dwell some barbarian Indians, the Muratas 
and Xibaros, and towards the e. the Gaes, Semi- 
gaes, and Mainas Zimarrones. Its mouth is in 
lat. 48 3" s. 

PASTEPEC, SAN JOSEPH DE, a settlement 
of the district and head settlement of Tlacolula, 
and alcafdia mayor of Xalupa in Nueva Espana ; 
founded at the skirt of a mountain, which gives 
it its name ; of a mild temperature, but far from 
being fertile. One league and a half e. n. e. of 
its head settlement. 

PASTO, a district and corregimiento of the 
province and government of Popayan in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada; one of the 11 into 
which the same is divided, and the most s. : bound 
ed s. by the province of Ibarra. It is extremely 
abundant in fine pastures, and consequently in 
cattle, so that, on this account, its first founders 
gave it this name. It is irrigated by several 
large rivers, which incorporate themselves with 
the Napo and Putumayo, to enter the Maranon 
or Amazon ; and on the s. flow down from the 
cordillera, the river Guachicono, S. Jorqe, and 
Masamorras, which enter the Patia. 

It is of an hot temperature, and produces much 
wheat and of so fine a quality, that in no part of 
the world is the bread so fine as here. It has 
some gold mines, which are little worked from 
the want of Indians and Negroes ; the former 
being exempt from this labour by a royal edict, 
and devoting themselves rather to agricultural 
pursuits. In the woods are certain trees which 
distil a resin here called mopa-mopa, and of which 
they make all sorts of varnish, which is so durable, 
that neither have boiling water or acids any 
effect on it. The method of applying it is by 
putting into the mouth a part of the resin, and, 
when it is moistened, by rubbing the brush upon it, 
and then applying it to the object to be painted, 
when it becomes dry, and of a most beautiful and 
lively colour, imitating the China colours ; and 
with this particular recommendation, that it 
never fades, nor does moisture have any effect 



08 PAS 

upon it. The pictures and articles painted in 
this manner, are carried by the Indians to be 
sold at Quito and the other settlements of the 
kingdom, where they are in high estimation. 

In this province the rivers of Guaitara and 
Juanambu are passed en taravita, each person 
paying a silver-real, and the same being the 
price for every horse-load ; and the settlements 
of the above names take care to be well provided 
with ropes, and other articles necessary for this 
purpose. The population consists of 33 settle 
ments, which are as follows : 

Yascual, Pupiales, 

Ancuya y Abades, Potosi, 

Biusaco and Juan- Gualmata, 

ambu, Ingenios, 

Sapuyes, Sibunday, 

Tambo Pintado, Huacca, 

Jongobito, Tulcan, 

Mocoa, Carlozama, 

Yayanquer, Cumbal, 

Funes, Mayasquer, 

Sucumbios, Mallama, 

Puntal, Puerres, 

Tussa, Males, 

Hipiales, Canchala, 

Tuquerres, Galea, 

Mocondino, Anope or Guaypi, 

Nanegal, Esmeraldas. 

The capital is the city of the same name, with 
the dedicatory title of San Juan, and the surname 
of Villaviciosa ; founded by captain Lorenzo de 
Aldana, in 1539, in an extensive llanura. It is 
of a severe climate, but healthy, and fertile in 
vegetable productions, seeds, and sugar canes, 
of which they make much sugar. It is situate at 
the skirt of a mountain, at the top of which is a 
volcano, which, ever since the conquest, had 
never ceased to vomit fire and ashes until the 
year 1727, since which time, as no eruption has 
appeared, it is thought that all the inflammable 
materials have been consumed. 

It has a very good parish church, the convents 
of the order of San Francisco, Santo Domingo, 
San Agustin, La Merced, a college which belong 
ed to the Jesuits, a monastery of nuns of LaCon- 
cepcion, and two hermitages at the entrance and 
egress of the city. 

Its population is composed of 8000 souls, 
amongst whom are many noble, though poor, 
families. The natives are very clever and indus 
trious workmen ; their wooden manufactures 
are much esteemed in all parts, and they have a 
method of varnishing them with something that 
resembles japan. Eighty five miles nearly s. s. w. 



PAT 

of Popayan, and 115 n. n. e. of Quito, in lat. 1 
14 , and long. 77 6" w. 

PASTOCA, a very lofty mountain of the pro 
vince of Pasto in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada, 
near its capital ; on its top is a lake of more than 
24 leagues long, and in its waters, which are 
always very cold, no fish will breed. 

PASTORA, LA DIVINA, a settlement of the 
province and government of La Guayana or 
Nueva Andalucia ; situate on the shore of the 
river Yaruario. 

PASTORIA, a large lake of the province of 
Tepeguana in Nuevo Vizcaya. It is formed of 
different streams of very fresh and wholesome 
water, and on its shores graze an infinite number 
of lesser cattle. 

PASUCHUA, a very lofty mountain or paramo 
of the kingdom of Quito, continually covered 
with snow. 

PASUDO, ASUNCIONDE, a settlement of the 
province of Pataz and of the missions of Caxa- 
marquilla, which are held at the charge of the 
religious observers of San Francisco ; on the 
shore and at the source of the river Guallaga. 

PASUNDELE, a settlement of the Indians of 
the kingdom of Chile, on the shore of the river 
Comoleuun. 

PASUQUE, a settlement of the Nuevo Mex 
ico in N. America ; situate on the shore of the 
river Grande del Norte, between those of Sitaj 
and Tesuque. 

PATA, a settlement of the province and corre- 
gimiento of Angaraez in Peru, annexed to the- 
curacy of Yulcamarca. Its natives are much 
given to carpenters-work, and make with great 
neatness tables, saddles, and benches, with which 
they trade with the other provinces. 

PAT A, a settlement in the province and govern 
ment of S. Juan de Los Llanos in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada. 

PATA, a river, of the same province and king 
dom as the former settlement, which enters the 
Magdalena, opposite the settlement of Neiva 
Vieja. 

[PATAGOA, a river on the coast of Brazil, 
which enters the ocean s. w. of Rio Janeyro.] 

PATAGONES, or TIRUMENOS, a barbarous 
nation of Indians, who live in the mountains and 
woods of the lands of Magellan, n. of the strait, 
and e. of the kingdom of Chile, in the province 
called Chica. They go entirely naked and wan 
der about, sustaining themselves by the chace. 
They are of lofty stature, well made and valorous, 
but treacherous ; some have pretended that they 
were formidable giants, and called their country 



PAT 

de Los Gigantes (of the giants). The father 
Torrubia, in his Gigantologia, printed in 1756, 
to prove the existence of the giants, quotes the 
Patagonians of the lands of Magellan ; but who 
ever scrutinizes the strength of what he adv ances, 
will see that according to all appearance and 
agreeably with the assertion of D. Proxpero del 
Aguila, he brings forward nothing of greater 
authenticity than what had already been pro 
duced. Mr. Fraser, in his voyage to S. America, 
assures us of the existence of these giants, not 
only as he had seen them himself but by an im 
plicit credit of others who had also been eye-w it- 
nesses to them ; and he thus asserted them to 
be of nine or 10 feet in height. 

The general received opinion is, that they are 
certainly above the common stature, but not 
giants ; and with all the proofs and reasons pro 
duced by the father Torrubia, we cannot but 
rather give our assent to what is told us by Sir 
Hans Sloane, in his celebrated work inserted in 
the Philosophical Transactions, No. 404, and ex 
tracted as a supplement to the celebrated Cham 
bers Dictionary, as also to what has been so 
judiciously suggested on the subject by Dr. D. 
Casimiro, first professor of botany in the royal 
garden, in the translation of the voyage of com 
mandant Byron. Fernando de Magallanes was 
the first who knew these Indians, when he arrived 
at port S. Julian, in 1519. 

The country abounds in stags, wolves, bears, 
tigers and ostriches. The names given by Mr. 
de la Martiniere to the different tribes of Envo, 
Kemenetes, Kennecas, and Karaykes, are mere 
fables and inventions, of which we cannot discover 
the origin, as are also the provinces in which the 
said tribes are said to live, and which that author 
calls Cossi, Karay, Karamay, Morena, Coin, &c. 
Now, all that we can assert on the subject, is, 
that we call the coast of the Patagonians all 
that extent from the mouth of the river La 
Plata as far as the straits of Magellan, and that 
the same was reconnoitred, by order of the king, 
in 1745, by the naval captain D. Joaquin de 
Olivares, accompanied by the fathers Joseph Ca- 
rodiel and Joseph Quiroga, of the company of 
Jesus, and the pilot D. Diego Varela ; and that 
the extent of coast, included under the above 
title, is between lat. 36 40 and 52 20 s. and 
extends from Cape Antonio, to the bay of S. 
George, to the 5. e. From all the above we con- 
elude, that the Patagonians are a very large race 
of men, and that they are very numerous. 

PATAGAHATCHE, a river of the province 



PAT 



(39 



and colony of S. Carolina, which runs s. and 
enters the Chichachas. 

PATAHUASI, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Catabambas in Peru ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Llaqua. 

PATAMACK. [See PATOWMACK.] 

PATAMBA, a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district, and alcaldia mayor of Peri- 
ban in Nueva Espaiia. It contains 292 fami 
lies of Indians, and 12 of Spaniards, Mustees, 
and Mulattoes ; also a convent of the monks of 
S. Francisco. Its commerce consists in making 
cups, jars, and other vessels of a very cele 
brated clay found in its district, and much 
esteemed in the other jurisdictions as giving a 
great fragrance to the water when drank, and 
inasmuch as it is also asserted to have bene 
ficial virtues against the flux of blood. A little 
more than eight leagues e. of its capital. 

PATAMBUCO, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Carabaya in Peru; annexed 
to the curacy of its capital. 

PATAMfcRAGOUCHE, a settlement of In 
dians of Nova Scotia, on the e. coast and at 
the strait of Canseau. 

PATANEIMA, a port of the province and 
government of Caracas in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, to the w. and at a small distance from 
Port Cabello. 

PATAPA, SANTA MARIA DE, a settlement 
of the head settlement of the district, and al 
caldia mayor of Tehuantepec in Nueva Espana. 
It is of a mild temperature, contains a convent 
of the order of S. Domingo, and has a scanty 
population, employed in agriculture. Twelve 
leagues n. of its capital. 

[PATAPSCO, a navigable river of Mary 
land, which empties from the n. w. into Chesa- 
peak bay ; its mouth being formed by North 
point, and Bodkin point on the s. which last is in 
lat. 39 W n. It rises in York county, Penn- 
sylvani, and pursues a s. and s. e. course till it 
reaches Elkridge landing, about eight miles s. w. 
of Baltimore ; it there turns e. over falls, and 
widens into a broad bay-like stream to its mouth. 
It is about 30 or 40 yards wide just before it 
communicates with the bason, on which stands 
the large commercial town of Baltimore. The 
first discoverer called it Bolus river, from the 
red earth found near it, resembling bole-am 
moniac. It is navigable for vessels drawing 18 
feet water to Fell s point at Baltimore ; but the 
falls a little above Elkridge landing, prevents the 
navigation farther.] 



70 



P A T 



PATAQUENA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Chumbivilcas in Peru ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Libitaco. 

PATARI, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Esmeraldas in the kingdom of Quito ; 
which runs from e. to w. and united with the 
Agua Sucia, forms the Tululvi. 

PATASASA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Guanta in Peru ; annexed to the 
curacy of Guamanguilla. 

PATATE. a district of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Ambato in the kingdom of Quito. 
It extends between two low chains of mountains, 
and is divided by the river of its name : is of an 
hot temperature, and territory fertile in all kinds 
of vegetable productions, and particularly in 
sugar canes. The mountain Tunguraqua, which 
is situate to the s. renders it somewhat unplea 
sant, from the continual winds blowing from that 
quarter ; but it is well peopled, and has some 
pretty and well cultivated gardens. 

Its name is taken from that of the principal 
settlement, situate on the e. shore of the river. 
Here is manufactured much sugar, the which is 
greatly esteemed in all the kingdom from the su 
perior quality of the sugar canes. There is one 
day in the week fixed for a holiday or public 
fair, at which meet numbers of people from Am 
bato, Tacunga, Rio Bamba, and Quito. In lat. 
lSlf 

PATATE, the aforesaid river rises in the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Tacunga, of the same 
kingdom. It is formed by other smaller rivers, 
such as that of San Felipe, which rises in the 
paramo of Cotopaxi, that of San Miguel, near the 
settlement of this name, and that of Ambato. It 
takes, itself, its name from the settlement by 
which it passes in a large stream, following its 
course to s. e. until it enters the river Pastaza, 
in the province and government of Mainas. 

[PATAVIRCA. See PATIVILCA.] 

[PATAZ, a jurisdiction in the diocess of 
Truxillo in S. America. It is situate among 
the mountains, and lias a variety of products, 
of which gold is the chief. The capital is the 
city of the same name, 97 miles e. of Truxillo.] 

PATAZ. See CAXAMARQUILLA. 

PATAZ, a settlement of the former province 
and corregimiento : also thus called as being the 
capital. 

PATAZCACHA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Larecaja in Peru ; annexed 
to the curacy of Guamanguilla. 

PATCOOTYEAK, a river of the province 



P A T 

and colony of Nova Scotia, which rims s. then 
turns s. e. and enters the great bay of Fundy. 

[PATEHUCA, or PATIOCA, a town of Mexico 
in N. America, having a silver-mine in its vi 
cinity ; n. n. e. of Mexico.] 

PATESONS, a small river of the province 
and colony of Virginia in N. America. It 
runs n. e. 

PATI, a river of the province of Bogota in 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It rises from the 
lake Guatavita, and forming nearly a circle, di 
rects its course through Santa Fe to enter the 
Magdalena. 

PATIA, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Popayan in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. 

PATIA, a large and abundant river of this pro 
vince, which is the boundary line to the kingdom 
of Quito. It runs from n. to s. for many leagues, 
traversing the celebrated valley to which it gives 
its name, and after collecting in its course the 
waters of the Mayu, turns w. laves the province 
of Barbacoas, and enters the Pacific or S. Sea by 
1 1 mouths which form different islands ; between 
lat. 2 W n. 

PATIA, the aforesaid valley is between the two 
chains of mountains, or cordilleras, in the pro 
vince of Popayan, and extend from n. to s. for 
many leagues. The climate is very hot and un 
healthy, and consequently barren. The territory 
is unpeopled, but produces excellent cotton, of 
which no use is made. 

[PATIENCE, an island in Narraganset bay, 
Rhode Island, and lies s. e. of Warwick neck, 
three-fourths of a mile. .It is about two miles 
long and one broad.] 

PATINO, a point on the coast of the pro 
vince and government of Darien, and kingdom of 
Tierra Firme of the S. Sea, within the gulf of 
San Miguel. 

PATIVA, a small river of the province and 
captainship of Los Ilheos in Brazil. It rises near 
the coast, runs e. and enters the sea between the 
rivers Grande and Juzia. 

PATIVILCA, or PATIVIRCA, as others have 
it, a settlement of the province and corregimiento 
of Santa in Peru ; situate in the road which they 
call De Valles, and which leads from Paita to Lima : 
[74 miles n. of that city.] It has 50 or 60 houses, 
with a proportionate number of inhabitants, but 
very few Spaniards. In its vicinity, towards the 
n. are seen the ruins and remains of a palace and 
fortress of the Incas of Peru, which, from the size 
of the stones and thickness of the walls, should 



PAT 



PAT 



71 



appeal; to have been works of great magnificence. 
Along; the whole road from this settlement to the 
town of Guarmey, we find ruins of other edi 
fices equally sumptuous ; and it is proved that 
these were the places which the Incas used for 
their recreation. 

PATLA, SANTA MARIA DE, a settlement of 
the head settlement of the district of Olintla, and 
alcaldia mayor of Zacatlan in Nueva Espana ; 
situate in a delightful glen, watered and fertilized 
by various rivers. Nine leagues from its head 
settlement. 

PATO, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, and of the district of the Rio del 
Hacha ; situate on the shore of this river, to 
the n. of its capital. 

PATO, a river of the province and government 
of Popayan in the same kingdom ; which rises in 
the paramo of Guanacas, runs s. c. and enters the 
Caqueta by the n. part, in lat. 1 31 n. 

PATO, a small island, situate at the mouth of 
the gulf of Triste or Los Dragos, near the coast, 
in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. 

PATO, another, a small river of the province 
arid government of Guayana or Nueva Andalu- 
cia, which, according to Mr. Bellin, enters the 
Meta. 

PATOS, LAGUNA GRANDE DE, a large lake 
in the province and captainship of Rey in Brazil. 
It is many leagues in length from n. to s., is 
near the coast, and on its side the Portuguese 
have established two guards, called, the one Del 
Norte, the other De la Cabellada. 

PATOS, another lake, in the province and cap 
tainship of Todos Santos in the same kingdom. 
It is at the foot of the sierra of Mongavein, 
between the river Real and that of Paramerin. 

PATOS, a river in the province and govern 
ment of Florida, which runs s. and enters the 
sea to the w. of the river Apalacliicola. 

PATOS, another, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Rey in Brazil, which runs e. 
and enters the sea in the bay of Biraguera. 

[PATOWMACK, or POTOMACK, a large and 
noble river, which rises by two branches, the n. 
and the s. which originate in and near the Al- 
leghany mountains, and forms, through its whole 
course, part of the boundary between the states 
of Virginia and Maryland. Its course is n. e. 
to Fort Cumberland, thence turning to the e. it 
receives Conecochague creek from Pennsylvania; 
then pursuing a s. e. course, it receives the She- 
handoah from the s. w. ; after this it runs a s. e. 
and s. course till it reaches Maryland point ; 



thence to its mouth it runs s. e. In its course it 
receives several considerable streams, which are 
described under their respective heads. The 
distance from the capes of Virginia to the termi 
nation of the tide water in this river, is above 
300 miles including the windings ; and navigable 
for ships of the greatest burden nearly that dis 
tance. From thence this river, obstructed by 
four considerable falls, extends through a vast 
tract of inhabited country towards its source. 
Early in the year 1785, the legislatures of Vir 
ginia and Maryland passed acts to encourage 
opening the navigation of this river. It was esti 
mated that the expence of the works would 
amount to 50,000 sterling, and 10 years were 
allowed for their completion. This noble river 
passes by many flourishing towns; the chief of 
which are, Shepherdstown, Georgestown, Wash 
ington city, Alexandria, New Marlborough, and 
Charlestown or port Tobacco. It is 7| miles 
wide at its mouth, 4 at Nomony bay, three at 
Aquia, 1 1 at Hallowing point, and 1| at Alex 
andria. Its soundings are seven fathoms at the 
mouth, five at St. George s island, 4| at Lower 
Matchodic, three at Swan s point and thence up 
to Alexandria. The tides in the river are not 
very strong, excepting after great rains, when 
the ebb is pretty strong ; then there is little or 
no flood, and there is never more than four or 
five hours flood, except with long and strong s. 
winds. In order to form just conceptions of this 
inland navigation, it would be requisite to notice 
the long rivers which empty into the Patow- 
mack, and survey the geographical position of 
the w. waters. The distance of the waters of 
the Ohio to Patowmack will be from 15 to 40 
miles, according to the trouble which will be 

. . 

taken to approach the two navigations. The 
upper part of this river, until it passes the Blue 
ridge, is called, in Fry and Jefferson s map, 
Cohongoronto.l 

[PATRICK, St. a small town, the chief of 
Camden county, Georgia ; situate on Great Sa- 
tilla river, about 32 miles from its mouth, and 
the same distance n. zo. of the town of St. 
Mary sJ 

[PATTERSON, a town in Bergen county, 
New Jersey, called so in honour of the governor 
of the state of that name, and now oiie of the 
judges of the supreme federal court. It was 
established in consequence of an act of the le 
gislature of New Jersey, in 1791, incorporating 
a manufacturing company with peculiar privi 
leges. Its situation on the great falls of Pas- 
saic river, is healthy and agreeable. It now con- 



72 P A T 

tains about 50 dwelling-houses, independent of 
those appropriated for tli machinery ; and it is 
certainly one of the most convenient situations 
for a manufacturing town of any on the conti 
nent. This company was incorporated to en 
courage all kinds of manufactures, and the sum 
of 500,000 dollars was soon subscribed ; but for 
want of experience, and a proper knowledge of 
the business, much was expended to little pur 
pose ; and they were at last reduced to the ne 
cessity of having recourse to a lottery to assist 
them in carrying their plan into execution. It 
is said that matters are now conducted more 
judiciously, and that the undertaking promises to 
be useful to the public, and beneficial to the pro 
prietors. It is 19 miles n. e. of Morristown, and 
10 n. of Newark.] 

[PATUCKET, a small village about four 
miles n. e. of Providence, a busy place of con 
siderable trade, and where manufactures of seve 
ral kinds are carried on with spirit. Through 
this village runs Patucket, or Pawtucket river, 
which empties into Seehonk river at this place. 
The river Patucket, called more n. Blackstone s 
river, has a beautiful fall of water, directly over 
which a bridge has been built, on the line which 
divides the commonwealth of Massachusetts from 
the state of Rhode Island ; distant about 37 miles 
s. by w. of Boston. The confluent stream emp 
ties into Providence river about a mile below 
Weybossctt, or the Great bridge. The fall, in 
its whole length, is upwards of 50 feet ; and the 
water passes through several chasms in a rock, 
which, extending diametrically across the bed of 
the stream, serves as a dam to the water. Se 
veral mills have been erected upon these falls ; 
and the spouts and channels which have been 
constructed to conduct the streams of their re 
spective wheels, and the bridge, have taken very 
much from the beauty and grandeur of the scene ; 
which would otherwise have been indescribably 
charming and romantic.] 

PATUGOA, a river of the province and cap 
tainship of San Vincente in Brazil ; runs s. and 
enters the sea opposite the Isla Grande. 

PATURE, a point on the w. coast of the 
island S. Domingo, and in the part possessed by 
the French, between the Cayo Icarnier and the 
Trou Forban. 

PATUTE, a settlement of Indians of the 
Tuneba nation, a reduction of missions which 
were held by the Jesuits in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada ; situate near the river Cazanare. The 
natives are weak, idle, and are subject to a dis 
order similar to St. Anthony s fire, which they 



P A U 

call carate, and paint their skin of various co 
lours. They maintain themselves by collecting 
and selling the resins of certain trees of two 
kinds, called, the one carana, and the other 
otoba : they both have a fetid smell, but are 
good for curing the itch, worms which are apt 
to breed in the feet, and crab-lice. After the 
abolition of the order of the Jesuits, these mis 
sions fell under the charge of the religious order 
of S. Domingo. 

PATUXED, a large, handsome, and conve 
nient bay, of the province and colony of New 
England. 

PATUXENT, or PATUXET, a river of the 
province and colony of Maryland in N. America. 
[This river, which is navigable, rises about 10 
miles w. e. of Washington, empties into the w. side 
of Chesapeak bay, between Drum and Hog island 
points, 15 or 20 miles n. of the mouth of the Pa- 
towmac. It admits vessels of 250 tons to Not 
tingham, nearly 35 miles from its mouth, and of 
boats to Queen Anne, eight miles higher. Pa- 
tuxent is as remarkable a river as any in the 
bay, having very high land on its n. side, with 
red banks or cliffs. When you double Drum 
point, you come too in 2^ and 3 fathoms water, 
where you will be secure from all winds.] 

PAUCANNA, a river of the province and 
government of San Juan de los Llanos in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It rises s. of the 
Sinaruco, and, forming a curve in its course to 
the e. enters the Orunuco, collecting in its mid- 
career the waters of the Sinaruco. 

PAUCAR, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Tarma in Peru ; annexed to the 
curacy of Caina. 

PAUCARA, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Angaraez in the same kingdom 
as the former. Seven leagues from Guancavelica 
and 22 from Guarnanga. 

PAUCARA, another settlement, in the province 
and corregimicnto of Lucanas in the same king 
dom ; annexed to the curacy of Paico. 

PAUCARBAMBA, a settlement of the pro 
vince and corregimicnto of Guanta in the same 
kingdom. 

PAUCARBAMBILLA, a settlement of the 
same province and kingdom as the former ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Mayoc. 

PAUCARCOLLA, a province and corregimi- 
cnto of Peru : bounded n. e. by the lake of Ti- 
ticaca, and being surrounded on the e. by the 
lake and the province of Chuicuito, n. by that 
of Lampa, w. by the province Moquehua, and 
s. by the provinces of Arica and Pacajes. It is 



, PAD 

86 leagues long, and 28 broad. The principal 
rivers by which it is laved are, the Suches and 
the Taraco. It is of a generally cold temperature, 
and in the parts near the lake are cultivated 
papas, bark, barley, and other seeds peculiar to 
Puno. 

The principal occupation of the inhabitants is 
in breeding neat cattle, sheep, and pigs, as also 
sheep of the country, or llamas. Here are many 
vicunas, xizcachas, deer, cut/es, partridges, and 
water fowl of the lake ; from which also there 
is a good supply of fish, both for this and the 
other provinces situate on its shore. The natives 
make voyages to the other provinces of the coast 
to carry chunos, dressed hides, and thread, and 
to take in exchange wines, brandies, and other 
productions. From the wools of the cattle the 
Indians fabricate their clothes, dying them of 
various colours. 

The capital of this province was the settlement 
of the same name, and afterwards, from the po 
pulation of this having declined, it was that of 
Huancane, until the discovery of the mines of 
Laicacota, when the latter asiento became the 
chief town ; and after that, and at the present 
day, the town of Puno. 

This province has various other rich mines 
in the mountains of Cancharani and of San Jo 
seph, which have been worked with great be 
nefit ; particularly the former. On the n. of the 
aforesaid mountains is the mountain called Del 
Azogue (quicksilver), as having veins of this 
metal, and which in the time of the viceroy, the 
Count de Alva de Liste, was worked to such ad 
vantage as to excel both in the quality and 
quantity of its metal the mine of Guancavelica : 
for motives, however, of higher consideration, its 
further working was prohibited by the govern 
ment ; but since that time large proportions of 
silver have still been extracted from those moun 
tains, and from that of Cancharani not less than 
50,000 marks annually. 

The Indians of some settlements of this pro 
vince, who breed cattle, have a traffic of carrying 
to the mineral engines and mills much cow-dung, 
which they call taquia, and which they use for 
heating the metal instead of wood and coal, these 
articles being extremely dear. This practice is 
also adopted in the other provinces of the same 
temperature. 

It had a repartimiento of 102.880 dollars, and 
it paid an alca cala of 832 dollars annually. Its 
inhabitants consists of more than 26,000 souls, 
divided into the following settlements : 

VOL. IV. 



P A U 



73 



Huancane, 

Toqupani, 

Hinchupalla, 

Ticani, 

S. Pedro de Vilques, 

Cojata, 

Moxa. 



Concepcion de Puno, 

S. Pedro de Icho, 

Paucarcolla, 

Tiquillaca, 

Conima, 

Coata, 

Capachica, 

Iscallani, 

PAUCARCOLLA, a settlement of this province, 
which, as we have observed, was the capital, 
until that having greatly fallen off in population 
it resigned this title in favour of the settlement 
of Huancane. It is situate on the shore of the 
lake Titicaca. Its natives became voluntarily 
subject to Iloque Yupanqui third emperor of 
Peru. It is inhabited by some Spanish families, 
and is of an healthy but cold climate. 

PAUCARPATA, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Arequipa in Peru. 

PAUCARTAMBO, a province and corregi 
miento of Peru ; bounded n. w. and w. by that 
of Calca and Lares, n. e. and e. by the frontier 
of the infidel Indians, and s. by that of Quispi- 
canchi. Its length is 26 leagues from n. to s. 
and from six to seven in width. Its temperature 
is cold on the heights, but in the low parts mo 
derately warm. It produces a good quantity of 
wheat, barley, maize, papas, seeds, and other 
fruits. It is a ravine or large valley terminating 
in the mountains of the Andes, in which different 
fruit trees grow, such as papayas, lemons, water 
melons, some cotton, and coca in abundance. 
The trees here are of excellent wood, and amongst 
the rest are fine cedars. Also here are parrots 
of different kinds, monkeys, tigers, and venom 
ous reptiles. 

Through this province passes a river, which 
comes from the lakes of the cordillera of Vilca- 
nota, which, augmented by the waters of vari 
ous small rivers and streams, forms a consider 
able body of water, in which they catch soles, 
dories, olive-fish, and other fish ; this river bear 
ing^ the name of the province. 

Towards the frontiers of the infidel Indians it 
is not remembered that any conversions having 
been made ; but, in 1767, a Dominican priest of 
the province of Quito, who arrived here whilst 
on the charitable commission of collecting funds 
for the building of the church of his convent, 
visited the mountain, and brought back with him 
some 300 barbarian Indians who, notwithstand 
ing their inconstancy and rudeness, give grounds 
of expectation of a numerous conversion. 

In the mountains of this province are clear in- 



74 



P A U 



dications of mines both of silver and gold, since 
the Indians, in some of the streams, pick up 
little lumps of these metals. There are no mines, 
however, that are worked, although there is 
evidently one of quicksilver. Its corregidor had 
a repartimiento of 59,600, dollars, and it paid an 
alcabala of 467 dollars annually. The inhabi 
tants should amount to about 8000. The ca 
pital is the settlement of the same name, situate 
on the e. shore of the river of its name, 33 miles 
e. n. e. of the city of Cuzco, in lat. 13 28 s. 
nnd the settlements of its jurisdiction are, 
Paucartambo, Huayac, 

Calle, Huancana, 

Colquepata, Cedros, 

Challabamba, Chimor, 

Catca, Amparaez. 

Catcay, 

PAUCARTAMBO, a settlement and asiento of 
mines of the former capital. 

PAUCARTAMBO, another, of the province and 
corregimiento of Tarma in the same kingdom : 
where a fort has been built to restrain the incur 
sions of the infidel Indians, the Chunchos inhabit 
ing the mountains. 

PAUCARTAMBO, a river of the province and 
corregimiento of its name, which rises near the 
capital, runs n. and joining itself with the Vil- 
comayo, the Vilcobamba, and afterwards the 
Apurimac, runs many leagues with various wind 
ings through the territory of the missions of 
Caxaraarquilla, and reaches the Maranon or 
Amazon with the name of Ucayale, with a much 
enlarged stream. 

PAUCAS, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Conchucos in Peru ; annexed to 
the curacy of Uco. 

PAUCHUTLA, a settlement of the head 
settlement of the district and alcaldia mayor of 
Zochiacatlan in Nueva Espana : of an hot tem 
perature, and containing 50 families of Indians. 
Two leagues n. of its capital. 

PAUCURA, a large and extensive valley of 
the province and government of Autoquia, in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada; bounded by the 
valley of Picara. 

PAUHANAM, a river of the province and 
colony of Virginia in N. America. 

PAU JI, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Venezuela in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada, on the coast. 

[PAUKATUCK, a small river which empties 
into Stonington harbour, and forms a part of 
the division line between Connecticut and Rhode 
Island.] 



P A U 

[PAUL S BAY, ST. on the n. w. shore of the 
river St. Lawrence, in N. America, is about six 
leagues below Cape Torment, where a chain of 
mountains of 400 leagues in length terminate 
from the w.~] 

[PAUL S BAY, ST. on the n. w. coast of New 
foundland Island. Lat. 4950 / w. long.5745 a>.~l 
[PAUL S ISLAND, ST. an island in the strait 
between Newfoundland and Cape Breton islands. 
It is about 15 miles n. e. of North Cape, in Cape 
Breton. Lat. 47 W n. long. 60 2 . w.] 

[PAUL, ST. a town of N. America, in New 
Mexico, situated at the confluence of the two 
main head branches of the Rio Bravo.] 

[PAUL, ST. the most s. of the Pearl islands, in 
the gulf of Panama, S. America. In the n. side 
is a safe channel ; where, if necessary, there is a 
place for careening ships.] 

[PAUL S, ST. a parish in Charlestown dis 
trict, S. Carolina, containing 3433 inhabitants; of 
whom 276 are whites, and 3202 slaves.] 

[PAULINGSTOWN, or PAWLING, a town 
ship in Duchess county, New York, lying on the 
w. boundary of Connecticut, and has South and 
East Town on the s. In 1790, it contained 4330 
inhabitants, of whom 42 were slaves ; in 1796, 
there were 560 of the inhabitants qualified 
electors.] 

[PAULIN S KILL. See SUSSEX COUNTY, 
New Jersey.] 

PAULO, S. or S. PABLO, a city of the pro 
vince and captainship of S. Vicente, in the king 
dom of Brazil, the capital of a small republic, 
separate from the government of the Portuguese, 
having its own laws, but tributary to this crown. 
It had its origin from some Mamelucs, a people 
composed of desperate banditti of all nations and 
colours, who, not conforming to the customs of 
more civilized life, and alike averse to all law, 
retired to the mountainous parts of the country, 
the same, however, not being deficient in natural 
fertility, and even in gold-mines. Here their 
numbers daily increased, till they became so 
formidable and independent as to call themselves 
the Paulistas, or inhabitants of the city of S. 
Paulo. This was the capital of their territory, 
and great was the zeal and skill they have mani 
fested in its defence, and in the maintenance of 
their self-established rights : they were, however, 
at last overcome, and rendered so far tributary 
to the Portuguese monarch, that they were to 
pay to him the fifth part of what they extracted 
from their mines. These mines are exceedingly 
rich, and to work at them they are sedulous in 
their endeavours to entrap Spaniards, Portu- 



PAULO. 



75 



o-uese, and Indians. They have no religion 
whatever, but some dealings with the Spaniards 
and Portuguese of Paraguay. 

The city is situate on an eminence, surrounded 
by the most craggy and inaccessible mountains, 
on the s. shore of the river Harihambu, or Tiete, 
in 46 38 to. long. 23 32 lat. s. 

[The following particulars relating to this city 
are extracted from the work of Mr. Mawe, the 
traveller St. Paul s, he observes, although on 
an elevated site, is not observed at any great 
distance in the road from Todos Santos. In its 
immediate neighbourhood the river runs parallel 
to the road, which it sometimes partially over 
flows, and covers with sand. To his left he ob 
served a large astallage, or inn, where numbers 
of mules are unloaded, and travellers commonly 
pass the night. It consists of a very large shed, 
supported upon upright pieces of timber, with 
separate divisions for receiving the cargoes or 
burdens of the mules, each traveller occupying 
as many as his goods require ; and there is a 
piece of ground, of about a hundred yards in 
circumference, planted with small upright stakes 
at ten or fifteen feet distance, to which the 
bridles of the mules are tied while they are fed, 
saddled, and loaded. These astallages are com 
mon in all parts of Brazil. 

On entering the town, he was struck with the 
neat appearance of its houses, stuccoed in va 
rious colours ; those in the principal streets were 
two or three stories high. 

St. Paul s is situated on a pleasing eminence 
of about two miles in extent, surrounded on 
three sides by low meadow-land, and washed at the 
base by rivulets, which almost insulate it in rainy 
weather ; it is connected with the high-land by 
a narrow ridge. The rivulets flow into a pretty 
large stream called Tieti, which runs within a 
mile of the town in a s. w. direction. Over them 
there are several bridges, some of stone and 
others of wood, built by the late governor. 
The streets of St. Paul s, owing to its elevation, 
(about 50 feet above the plain) and the water 
which almost surrounds it, are in general re 
markably clean ; the material with which they 
are paved is lamillary grit-stone, cemented by 
oxide of iron, and containing large pebbles of 
rounded miartz, approximating to the conglo 
merate. This pavement is an alluvial formation 
containing gold, many particles of which metal 
are found in the chinks and hollows after heavy 
rains, and at such seasons are diligently sought 
for by the poorer sort of people. 

This city was founded by the Jesuits, who were 



probably tempted by the gold mines in the vici 
nity, more than by the salubrity of its air, which 
however is not excelled by any on the whole 
continent of South America. The medium of 
the thermometer here is between 50 and 80 de 
grees ; in a morning Mr. Mawe observed it at 
48, and even lower, though he was not there 
in the winter months. The rains are by no 
means heavy or of long continuance, and the 
thunder-storms are far from being violent. The 
cold in the evenings was frequently considerable. 

Here are several squares, and about thirteen 
places of religious worship, namely, two con 
vents, three monasteries, and eight churches, the 
greater part of which, as well as of the whole 
town, is built of earth. The mode of erecting 
the walls is as follows : a frame is constructed of 
six moveable planks placed edge-wise, opposite 
each other, and secured in this position by cross- 
pieces bolted with moveable pins. Earth is put 
in by small quantities, which the workmen beat 
with rammers, and occasionally moisten with 
water to give it consistency. Having filled the 
frame or trough, they remove it and continue the 
same operation till the whole shell of the house 
is completed, taking care to leave vacancies, and 
put in the window-frames, door-frames, and 
beams, as they proceed. The mass, in course of 
time, becomes indurated, the walls are pared 
perfectly smooth inside, and take any colour the 
owner chooses to give them ; they are generally 
enriched with very ingenious devices. This 
species of structure is durable ; some houses thus 
built have lasted two hundred years, and most of 
them have several stories. The roofs are made 
to project two or three feet beyond the wall, in 
order to throw off the rain to a distance from the 
base ; spouts might be a more effectual preserva 
tive against wet, but their use is little known 
here. They cover their houses with gutter-tiles; 
but though the country affords excellent clay and 
plenty of wood, very few bricks are burnt. 

The population of this place amounts to full 
15,000 souls, perhaps nearer 20,000 ; the clergy, 
including all ranks of religious orders, may be 
ranked at 500. They are in general good mem 
bers of society, free from that excessive bigotry 
and illiberality which is the reproach of the neigh 
bouring colonies : and their example has so be 
neficial an effect on the rest of the inhabitants, 
that, according to Mr. Mawe s testimony, no 
stranger will be molested while he acts as a gen 
tleman, and does not insult the established re 
ligion. 

No endemial diseases at present prevail here.] 

L2 



PAULO. 



[The small-pox formerly, and indeed of late, made 
great havoc among- the inhabitants ; but its pro 
gress has been checked by the introduction of 
vaccine innoculation. Professors attended at a 
large hall belonging to the governor, to which 
the public were invited, and the operation was 
performed gratis. It is to be hoped, that the 
credit of this preventative will make its way 
among the people here, for they are not compe 
tent to enter into the merits of that controversy 
which injured it in Europe. 

Here are few manufactures of any consequence ; 
a little coarse cotton is spun by the hand, and 
woven into cloth, which serves for a variety of 
wearing apparel, sheets, &c. They make a 
beautiful kind of net- work for hammocks, which 
are fringed with lace, and form an elegant piece 
of furniture, being slung low, so as to answer 
the purpose of sofas. The ladies are particu 
larly fond of using them, especially when the 
heat of the weather disposes them to ease and 
indolence. The making of lace is a general em 
ployment for females, some of whom excel in it. 
The shopkeepers here are a numerous class, who, 
as in most colonial towns, deal in almost every 
thing, and sometimes make great fortunes. Here 
are few doctors of medicine, but many apothe 
caries ; some silversmiths, whose articles are 
equally indifferent both in metal and workman 
ship ; tailors and shoemakers in great numbers ; 
and joiners, who manufacture very beautiful 
wood, but are not so moderate in their charges 
as the former classes of tradesmen. In the out 
skirts of the city live a number of Creolian In 
dians, who make earthen-ware for culinary pur 
poses, large water-jars, and a variety of other 
utensils ornamented with some taste. The 

freatest proportion of the inhabitants consists in 
irmers and inferior husbandmen, who cultivate 
small portions of land, on which they breed large 
stocks of pigs and poultry for sale. With these 
the market is generally well supplied, and in the 
fruit season is also stored with pines, grapes, 
guavas, bananas, a few apples, and an enormous 
quantity of quinces. 

Esculent plants are grown in great profusion 
and variety. Here is a favourite bulbous root 
called the cara, which is equal to the best potatoe, 
and even more farinaceous ; it grows to about 
five inches in diameter, and affords excellent 
food, either boiled or roasted. Here are fine 
cabbages, salad-herbs, turnips, cauliflowers, arti 
chokes, and potatoes ; the latter, though very 
good, are little used : the sweet potatoe is in 
greater request among the natives. Maize, beans. 



green-peas, and every species of pulse, flourish 
amazingly. Fowls are cheap ; some are bought 
at three-pence and six-pence each ; small pigs 
from one to two shillings, and flitches of bacon, 
cured after the mode of the country, at about 
two-pence per pound. Turkeys, geese, and ducks, 
are abundant, and reasonable in price ; the latter 
are of the Muscovy breed, enormously large, 
some weighing ten or fourteen pounds. Here is 
a singular breed of cocks ; they resemble the 
common English in plumage and shape, but they 
crow very loud, and continue their last note for 
a minute or two. When their voice is good, 
they are much esteemed, and are sent for as cu 
riosities from all parts of Brazil. The cattle are 
in general good, considering that so little atten 
tion is paid to feeding them; when their pastures 
are full of grass, they are tolerably fat, but when 
otherwise, they become lean. A drove may be 
bought at 24s. or 30s. a head ; beef at about a 
penny or three halfpence per pound. The cur 
riers have a singular method of blackening- cow 
hides and calf-skins : when they have prepared 
them for that operation, they search tor some 
mud-hole at the bottom of a ferruginous stratum, 
a ditch for instance ; with the mud they cover 
that side of the skin required to be stained ; and 
they prefer this material to the solution of cop 
peras, probably with reason, as the sulphate of 
iron formed by the decomposed pyrites acts more 
mildly in this state than when applied in the 
common way. 

The horses are very fine, and in general do 
cile ; when well trained they make excellent 
chargers. Their size is from 12| to 14| hands, 
and they vary in price from 3 to 12. Mules 
are considered more useful beasts of burden. 
The breed of sheep is quite unattended to, and 
mutton is rarely or never eaten. Here is a very 
fine and large breed of goats, whose milk is 
generally used for domestic purposes. The dogs 
are very indifferent, and of no distinct race. 

Mr. Mawe, in his walks round the city, had 
frequent opportunities of examining the singular 
succession of horizontal strata, that form the 
eminence on which it stands. They lie in the 
following order: first, one of red vegetable 
earth of variable depth, impregnated with oxide 
of iron ; below that, sand and adventitious matter 
of different shades of colour, as ochre-red, brown, 
and dusky yellow, together with many rounded 
pebbles, which indicate it to be of rather recent 
formation ; it varies in depth from three to six 
feet, or perhaps to seven, and its lower part is 
uniformly yellow : under this is a bed of ex-] 



PAULO. 



77 



fceedingly fine clay of various colours, but for the 
the most part purple ; the white and yellow is 
the purest in quality ; it is interveined with thin 
layers of sand in various directions. Then suc 
ceeds a stratum of alluvial matter, which is very 
feruginous ; it rests on a half-decomposed sub 
stance, apparently migrating from a granite, in 
which the proportion of feld-spar exceeds that 
of the quartz and mica. The whole is incum 
bent on compact granite. The sides of the mount 
are steep, and in some places nearly perpen 
dicular. 

The fertility of the country around St. Paul s 
may be inferred from the quantities of produce, 
with which, as we have stated, its market is sup 
plied. About a century ago, this track abound 
ed with gold ; and it was not until they had 
exhausted it by washing, that the inhabitants 
thought of employing themselves in husbandry. 
As they did so more from necessity than from 
choice, they were tardy in pursuing those im 
provements which other nations have made in 
this noble art, and, pining at the disappearance 
of the precious mineral, considered their new 
occupation as vile and degrading. Indeed 
throughout the whole of Brazil, the husbandmen 
have ever been considered as forming a class 
greatly inferior in point of respectability to the 
miners ; and this prejudice will in all likelihood 
subsist until the country shall have been drained 
of its gold and diamonds, when the people will be 
compelled to seek in agriculture a constant and 
inexhaustible source of wealth. 

Mr. Mawe thus describes the system of farming 
which at present prevails in the neighbourhood 
of St. Paul s. Land, in this extensive empire, is 
granted in large tracks, on proper application ; 
and we may naturally suppose that the value of 
these tracts depends more or less on their situa 
tion. It therefore becomes the first object of a 
cultivator, to look out for unoccupied lands as 
near as possible to a large town ; good roads and 
navigable rivers are the desiderata next in point 
of consequence which he attends to. When he 
has made choice of a situation, he applies to the 
governor of the district, who orders the proper 
officers to mark out the extent required, generally 
a league or a league and a half square, sometimes 
more. The cultivator then purchases as many 
Negroes as he can, and commences his operations 
by erecting habitations for them and himself, 
which are generally miserable sheds, supported 
by four posts, and commonly called ranches. 
His Negroes are then directed to cut down the 
trees and brushwood growing on the land, to 



such an extent as he thinks they will be able 
to manage. This done, they set fire to all they 
have cut, as it lies on the ground. Much of the 
success of his harvest depends on this burning ; 
if the whole be reduced to ashes he expects a 
great crop ; if, through wet weather, the felled 
trees remain only half burnt, he prognosticates a 
bad one. When the ground is cleared, the Ne 
groes dibble it with their hoes, and sow their 
maize, beans, or other pulse ; during the operation 
they cut down any thing very much in the way, but 
never think of working the soil. After sowing 
as much seed as is thought requisite, they prepare 
other grounds for planting cassada, here called 
mandioca, the root of which is generally eaten as 
bread by all ranks in Brazil. The soil for this 
purpose is rather better prepared ; it is raked up 
in little round hillocks, not unlike mole-hills, 
about four feet asunder ; into which are stuck 
cuttings from branches of the plant, about an inch 
thick, and six or eight long ; these soon take root, 
and put forth leaves, shoots, and buds. When 
enough has been planted for the entire consump 
tion of the farm, the owner, if he is rich enough, 
prepares means for growing and manufacturing 
sugar. He first employs a carpenter to cut 
wood, and build a mill with wooden rollers for 
crushing the canes, by means of water if a stream 
is at hand, if not, by the help of mules. While 
some of the Negroes are assisting the carpenter, 
others are employed in preparing ground in the 
same way as for mandioca. Pieces of cane, con 
taining three or four joints, and in length about 
six inches, cut from the growing stem, are laid in 
the earth nearly horizontally, and are covered 
with soil to the depth of about four inches. They 
shoot up rapidly, and in three months have a 
bushy appearance not unlike flags ; in 12 or 15 
months more they are ready for cutting. In 
rich virgin soil it is not uncommon to see canes 
12 feet high, and astonishingly thick. 

The Indian corn and pulse are in general ripe 
in four months or 18 weeks. The average return 
is 200 for one ; it is a bad harvest when it falls 
short of 150. 

The mandioca is rarely ready to take up in less 
than 18 or 20 months ; if the land be suitable, it 
then produces from six to 12 pound weight per 
plant. They grow very little indigo in this 
neighbourhood, and what they have is of indif 
ferent quality. Their pumpkins are of enormous 
size, and sometimes are served up as table-vege 
tables, but more frequently given as food to the 
horses. Melons are here scarcely palatable. 

In no branch of husbandry are the farmers so] 



PAULO. 



[defective as in the management of cattle. No 
artificial grasses are cultivated, no enclosures are 
made, nor is any fodder laid up against the season 
of scarcity. The cows are never milked regu 
larly ; they seem to be considered rather as an 
encumbrance to a farm than a valuable part of 
the stock. They constantly require salt, which is 
given them once in 15 or 20 days, in small pro 
portions. Their dairies, if such they may be 
called, are managed in so slovenly a manner, 
that the little butter that is made becomes rancid 
in a few days, and the cheese is good for nothing. 
In this essential department they are deplorably 
deficient ; rarely indeed is there to be seen a 
farm with one convenience belonging to it. For 
want of proper places in which to store their 
produce, they are obliged to lay it in promiscuous 
heaps ; and it is not uncommon to see coffee, 
cotton, maize, and beans, thrown into the corners 
of a damp shed, and covered with a green hide, 
one half is invariably spoiled by mould and putri 
dity, and the remainder is much deteriorated, 
through this idle and stupid negligence. 

They feed their pigs on Indian corn in a crude 
state ; the time for confining them to fatten is at 
eight or 10 months old ; and the quantity con 
sumed for the purpose is eight or 10 Winchester 
bushels each. When killed, the lean is cut off 
the sides as clean as possible, the fat is cured 
with very little salt, and in a few days is ready 
for market. The ribs, chine-bone, and lean parts 
are dried for home consumption. 

The farm-houses are miserable hovels of one 
story, the floor neither paved nor boarded, and 
the walls and partitions formed of wicker-work 
plastered with mud, and never under-drawn. 
For an idea of the kitchen, which ought to be the 
cleanest and most comfortable part of the dwell 
ing, the reader may figure to himself a filthy 
room with an uneven muddy floor, interspersed 
with pools of slop-water, and in different parts 
fire-places formed by three round stones to hold 
the earthen pots that are used for boiling meat ; 
as green wood is the chief fuel, the place is almost 
always filled with smoke, which, finding no chim 
ney, vents itself through the doors and other 
apertures, and leaves all within as black as soot. 
Indeed, the kitchens of many opulent people are 
in not much better condition. 

It may well be imagined that in a country like 
this, a stranger finds the greatest comfort and 
enjoyment out of doors. The gardens in St. 
Paul s and its vicinity, are laid out with great 
taste, and many of them with curious elegance. 
The jasmine is every where a favourite tree, and 



in this fine climite bears flowers perennially, a? 
does the rose. Carnations, pinks, passion-flowers, 
cocks-combs, &c. grow in great plenty; one of 
their most estimable shrubs is the Palma Christi, 
which gives fruit the first year, and yields abun 
dance of castor-oil, which all families possess in 
such quantity, that no other sort is burnt. 

Bees are by no means uncommon ; they are 
easily domesticated, and, we believe, are perfectly 
harmless. Their honey is pleasant; the wax, 
particularly that generally sold, which is taken 
from their nests in old forest-trees, is very foul, 
but might be purified by a very simple process. 
The woods contain a great variety of animals of 
the monkey kind, and also beasts of prey, some 
of which have tolerable good fur. Among these 
may be classed a peculiar species of the otter. 
Insects are numerous, but the mosquitos are not 
so offensively so as in the Rio de la Plata. The 
animalculum, called the niagua, or jigger, is trou 
blesome ; it beds itself under the nails of the toes,, 
and sometimes of the fingers, but it may easily be 
banished by extracting it and its bag of eggs with a 
needle, and filling the cavity with calomel or snuff, 
for fear any should have remained. Reptiles are 
very numerous ; toads are accustomed in the 
evenings to crawl upon the foot paths, and even 
infest the streets of the city. The sorocooco or 
jararraca (serpents) are said to be very dan 
gerous. 

The woods produce large and durable timber, 
well calculated for building. Of their trees, all 
of which retain their Indian names, some yield 
very fine gums. The jacaranda, called in Eng 
land rose-wood, is here very common. Many 
of their shrubs bear beautiful flowers, and are 
very aromatic. Among the innumerable creep 
ing plants which clothe the soil of their uncleared 
lands, there are some distinguished as infallible 
antidotes to the bite of venomous reptiles ; one 
in particular, called the corazao de Jesu, with 
heart-shaped leaves, is universally esteemed. 

Mr. Mawe, during his stay at this city, was 
invited by the governor to visit the old gold 
mines of Jaragua, the first discovered in Brazil, 
which were now his property, together with a 
farm in their vicinity, distant about 24 miles from 
the city. 

He thus explains the mode of working these 
mines, more fitly to be denominated washings. 

Suppose a loose gravel-like stratum of rounded 
quartzose pebbles and adventitious matter, in 
cumbent on granite, and covered by earthy 
matter of variable thickness. Where water of 
sufficiently high level can be commanded, the] 



PAULO. 



79 



[ground Is cut in steps, each 20 or 30 feet wide, 
two or three broad, and about one deep. Near 
the bottom a trench is cut to the depth of two or 
three feet. On each step stand six or eight 
Negroes, who as the water flows gently from 
above, keep the earth continually in motion with 
shovels, until the whole is reduced to liquid mud 
and washed below. The particles of gold con 
tained in this earth descend to the trench, where, 
by reason of their specific gravity, they quickly 
precipitate. Workmen are continually employed 
at the trench to remove the stones, and clear 
away the surface, which operation is much as 
sisted by the current of water which falls into it. 
After five days washing, the precipitation in the 
trench is carried to some convenient stream, to 
undergo a second clearance. For this purpose 
wooden bowls are provided, of a funnel shape, 
about two feet wide at the mouth, and five or six 
inches deep, called gamellas. Each workman 
standing in the stream, takes into his bowl five or 
six pounds weight of the sediment, which gene 
rally consists of heavy matter, such as oxide of 
iron, pyrites, ferruginous quartz, &c. of a dark 
carbonaceous hue. They admit certain quan 
tities of water into the bowls, which they move 
about so dexterously, that the precious metal, 
separating from the inferior and lighter sub 
stances, settles to the bottom and sides of the 
vessel. They then rinse their bowls in a larger 
vessel of clean water, leaving the gold in it ; 
and begin again. The washing of each bowlful 
occupies from five to eight or nine minutes ; the 
gold produced is extremely variable in quantity, 
and in the size of its particles, some of which are 
so minute, that they float, while others are found 
as large as peas, and not unfrequently much larger. 
This operation is superintended by overseers, 
as the result is of considerable importance. 
When the whole is finished, the gold is borne 
home to be dried, and at a convenient time is 
taken to the permutation office, where it is 
weighed, and a fifth is reserved for the prince. 
The remainder is smelted by fusion with muriate 
of mercury, cast into ingots, assayed, and stamped 
according to its intrinsic value, a certificate of 
which is given with it : after a copy of that in 
strument has been duly entered at the mint-office, 
the ingots circulate as specie. 

But to return to the description of St. Paul s. 
This city is seldom visited by foreigners. The 
passes to it from the coast are so singularly si 
tuated, that it is almost impossible to avoid the 
guards who are stationed in them, to inspect 
all travellers and merchandize passing into the 



interior. Soldiers of the lowest rank on these 
stations have a right to examine all strangers 
who present themselves, and to detain them and 
their property, unless they can produce passports. 
The dress of the ladies abroad, and especially 
at church, consists of a garment of black silk, 
with a long veil of the same material, trimmed 
with broad lace ; in the cooler season black 
cassimere or baize. In the same veil they almost 
always appear in the streets, though it has been 
partially superseded by a long coat of coarse 
woollen, edged with velvet, gold lace, fustian, or 
plush, according to the rank of the wearer. This 
coat is used as a general sort of undress, at home, 
in their evening walks, and on a journey, and the 
ladies, whenever they wear it, appear in round 
hats. The appellation of Paulista is considered 
by all the females here as a great honour ; the 
Paulistas being celebrated throughout all Brazil 
for their attractions, and their dignity of cha 
racter. At table they are extremely abstemious ; 
their favourite amusement is dancing, in which 
they display much vivacity and grace. At balls 
and. other public festivals they generally appear 
in elegant white dresses, with a profusion of gold 
chains about their necks, their hair tastefully dis 
posed and fastened with combs. Their conver 
sation, at all times sprightly, seems to derive ad 
ditional life from music. Indeed the whole range 
of their education appears to be confined to super 
ficial accomplishments ; they trouble themselves 
very little with domestic concerns, confiding what 
ever relates to the inferior departments of the 
household to the negro or negra cook, and leav 
ing all other matters to the management of ser 
vants. Owing to this indifference, they are total 
strangers to the advantages of that order, neat 
ness and propriety, which reign in an English 
family : their time at home is mostly occupied in 
sewing, embroidery, and lace-making. Another 
circumstance repugnant to delicacy is, that they 
have no mantua-makers of their own sex ; all 
articles of female dress here are made by tailors. 
An almost universal debility prevails among 
them, which is partly attributable to their ab 
stemious living, but chiefly to want of exercise, 
and, in some degree, to the frequent warm bathings 
in which they indulge. They are extremely 
attentive to every means of improving the de 
licacy of their persons, perhaps to the injury of 
their health. 

The men in general, especially those of the 
higher rank, officers, and others, dress superbly ; 
in company they are very polite and attentive, 
and show every disposition to oblige ; they are] 



80 



P A U 



[great talkers and prone to conviviality. The 
lower ranks, compared with those of other colo 
nial towns, are in a very advanced state of civili 
zation. It were to be wished that some reform 
were instituted in their system of education ; the 
children of slaves are brought up during their 
early days with those of their masters ; they are 
play-mates and companions, and thus a familiar 
equality is established between them, which has 
to be forcibly abolished when they arrive at that 
age, at which one must command and live at his 
ease, while the other must labour and obey. It has 
been said, that by thus attaching the slave to his 
master, in early youth, they ensure his future 
fidelity ; but the custom seems fraught with many 
disadvantages, and ought at least to be so modi 
fied as to render the yoke of bondage less galling 
by the recollection of former liberty. 

The religious processions here are very splen 
did, grand, and solemn ; they have a striking 
effect, by reason of the profound veneration and 
enthusiastic zeal manifested by the populace. 
On particular occasions of this kind all the inha 
bitants of the city attend, and the throng is fre 
quently increased by numbers of the neighbour 
ing peasantry for several leagues round. The 
balconies of those houses, which command the 
best views of the spectacle, are crowded with 
ladies in their gala dresses, who consider the day 
as a kind of festival ; the evening is generally 
concluded by tea and card parties or dances. 

A traveller has no difficulty in accommodating 
himself in the general mode of living at St. Paul s. 
The bread is pretty good, and the butter tolera 
ble, but rarely used except with coffee for break 
fast or tea in the evening. A more common break 
fast is a very pleasant sort of beans, called feijones^ 
boiled or mixed with mandioca. Dinner, which 
is usually served up at noon or before, commonly 
consists of a quantity of greens boiled with a little 
fat pork or beef, a root of the potatoe kind, and a 
stewed fowl, with excellent salad, to which suc 
ceeds a great variety of delicious conserves and 
sweet-meats. Very little wine is taken at meals ; 
the usual beverage is water. On public occa 
sions, or when a feast is given to a large party, 
the table is most sumptuously spread; from 
30 to 50 dishes are served up at once, by which 
arrangement a succession of courses is obviated. 
Wine circulates copiously, and toasts are given 
during the repast, which usually occupies two or 
three hours, and is succeeded by sweet-meats, 
the pride of their tables ; after coffee the com 
pany pass the evening in dancing, music, or 
cards. 



P A U 

On the two first days of Lent, which are here 
celebrated with great festivity, persons of both 
sexes amuse themselves by throwing at each 
other balls, of artificial fruit, such as lemons or 
oranges, made very delicately of wax, and filled 
with perfumed water. The lady generally be 
gins the game, the gentleman return it with such 
spirit that it seldom ceases until several dozens 
are thrown, and both parties are as wet as if they 
had been drawn through a river. Sometimes a 
lady will dexterously drop one in to the bosom of 
a gentleman, which will infallibly oblige him to 
change his linen, as it usually contains three or 
four ounces of cold water. On these days of 
carnival the inhabitants parade the streets in 
masks, and the diversion of throwing fruit is 
practised by persons of all ages. It is reckoned 
improper for men to throw at each other. The 
manufacture of these missiles, at such periods, 
affords no inconsiderable occupation to certain 
classes of the inhabitants ; and in the capital of 
Brazil many hundreds of people derive a tem 
porary subsistence from the sale of them. The 
practice is very annoying to strangers, and not 
unfrequently engenders quarrels, which terminate 
seriously .J (Mawe s Travels.) 

[PAULSBURGH, a township in Grafton 
county, New Hampshire, on the head waters of 
Amonoosuck river, and through which passes 
Androscoggin river.] 

[PAULUS Hook, in Bergen county, New Jer 
sey, is on the w. bank of Hudson river, opposite 
New York city, where the river is 2000 yards 
wide. Here is the ferry, which is perhaps more 
used than any other in the United States. This 
was a fortified post in the late war. In 1780, 
the frost was so intense, that the passage across 
the river here was practicable for the heaviest 
cannon.] 

PA UN A, GRANDE, a settlement of the juris 
diction of Muzo and corregimiento of Tunja, in 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It is of an hot 
temperature, abounding in maize, cotton, sugar 
cane, rice, 1/ucas, and plantains. The natives 
make much thread, linens, and sweetmeats, of 
which their commerce consists. The population 
should be 100 housekeepers and 50 Indians. 

[PAUNCH Indians, of N. America, who are 
said to be a peaceable, well-disposed nation. 
Their country is a variegated one, consisting of 
mountains, valleys, plains, and woodlands, irre 
gularly interspersed. They might be induced to 
visit the Missouri, at the mouth of the Yellow 
Stone river; and from the great abundance of 
valuable furred animals, which their country, as 



PAW 

well as that of the Crow Indians, produces, their 
trade must become extremely valuable. They 
are a roving people, and have no idea of exclu 
sive right to the soil.] 

PAURAUTE, a river of the province and 
government of Venezuela, in the same kingdom 
as the settlement of Pauna. It rises in the moun 
tains of Carora, runs w. and empties itself into 
the lake of Maracaibo, in lat. 10 12 n. 

PAUSA, a settlement and captainship of the pro 
vince and corregimiento of Parina Cochas, in Peru. 

PAUSA, another, in this province, annexed to 
the curacy of Pacca. 

PAUTE, a large and abundant river of the 
province and corregimiento of Cuenca, in the 
kingdom of Quito : it rises in the mountains of 
Tarqui, to the s. of that city, from the union of 
the rivers Machangara and Matadero, which 
unite themselves half a league from the settle 
ment of Jadan, and of two others, called Yu- 
nuncay and Tarque. These four running to the 
n. and receiving, after five leagues, those of 
Azogues and Santa Barbara, arrive at Cuenca, 
and there turning to e. n. e. and then e. till they 
pass the settlement to which they give a name, 
water and fertilize the valley ; and here they 
take their name, forming together one large na 
vigable stream, which, afterwards changing that 
name for Mayu, enters the Santiago in lat. 4 1 
s. On its shores is abundance of gold, and, in 
the district of Cuenca, they are covered with 
sugar-cane plantations and gardens, which ren 
der then very agreeable. By this river you may 
reach, by a four day s voyage, the province and 
country of the Xibaros Indians. 

PAUTE, a settlement of the same province and 
kingdom. 

PAUTE, a large, beautiful, and fertile valley of 
the same. 

PAUTIGUI, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Caxamarquilla in Peru. 

PAUTO, a settlement of the missions that 
were held by the Jesuits of the province and go 
vernment of San Juan de los Llanos of the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada, to the e. of the moun 
tains of Bogota. It is a reduction of Indians of 
the Guajiba nation, situate near the source of 
Ihe river of its name ; is of an hot climate and 
fertile territory, and abounding in cotton, dates, 
and plantains, and other fruits peculiar to the 
country. 

PAUTO, a river of this province and kingdom, 
which rises near the settlement of Cazanare, and 
enters the Meta, being just before divided into 
two arms. 

[PAWLET, a township in Rutland county, 
VOL. iv. 



PAX 



81 



Vermont, having 1458 inhabitants. Jt stands 
on the New York line, has Wells on toie . and 
Rupert in Bennington county on the s. and is 
watered by Pawlet river, which joins Wood creek 
and the confluent stream, falls in South bay at 
Fiddler s Elbow. Haystack mountain is in this 
township.] 

[PAWTUCKET Falls, in Merrimack river, 
are in the township of Dracut.l 

[PAWTUXET, a village in the township of 
Cranston, Providence county, Rhode Island.] 

PAUXIS, a strait called Pungu or Puerta, 
where the Maranon or Amazonas is found en 
trenched in a very narrow channel. Here the 
Portuguese have a fort on the n. shore, [called 
Obidos orPauxis. The river Maranon or Ama 
zonas is 905 fathoms wide, and at this place ends 
the tide-water.] Just before this strait the Ma 
ranon or Amazon receives the waters of the river 
of Los Trompetas, in about lat. 2 s. 

PAXARA, a large island of the N. Sea, in the 
province and government of Maracaibo, in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada, at the mouth of the 
great lake of this name. 

PAXAROS, Island of, which is small, within 
the port Deseado, on the coast between the river 
La Plata and the straits of Magellan, opposite 
the island of Olivares. 

PAXAROS, another, a small island of this name; 
and one of those which are at the s. point of the 
Caico Grande and the Panuelo Quadrado. 

PAXAROS, another, a small isle near the coast 
of Brazil, in the province and captainship of Por- 
toseguro, close to the bank of Los Escollos. 

PAXAROS, another island near the coast of the 
kingdom of Chile, in the province and corregi 
miento of Coquimbo, close to that of this name. 
[See PAJAROS.] 

PAXAROS, some other small isles or farallones 
of the Archipelago of the Antilles, between the 
islands Granada and Bequia. 

PAXAROS, some other islands, near the coast 
of the province and captainship of Sergipe, in 
Brazil, at the mouth or entrance of the river 
Grande de San Francisco. 

PAXAROS, a mountain, called Ancon de Paxa- 
ros, on the w. coast of the straits of Magellan, 
between the point of Nuestra Senora de Gracia, 
and the Entrada Real del Portete. 

PAXAROS, a point of land, on the coast of 
the province and corregimiento of Coquimbo, of 
the kingdom of Chile. 

PAXAROS, another, in the same province and 
kingdom ; distinct from the former ; between the 
point of Choros and that of Yervabuena. 

PAXAROS, three small lakes of tke province 



M 



82 PAY 

and government of Santa Marta in the Nuevo 
Reyno fee Granada, and of the district of the 
Rio del Hacha, situate on the shore of the Saco 
de Maracaibo. 

[PAXTON, UPPER and LOWER, two town 
ships in Dauphin county, Pennsylvania.] 

[PAXTON, a township of Massachusetts, situ 
ated in Worcester county, eight miles w. of Wor 
cester, and 44 w. of Boston. It was incorporated 
in 1765, and contains 558 inhabitants.] 

PAY, LA. See NUESTRA SENORA BE. 

PAYA, a settlement of the jurisdiction and 
district of the city of Santiago de la Atalaya, 
and government of San Juan de Los Llanos in 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada : situate at the 
foot of the mountains of Bogota on the e. and 
at the entrance of the Llanos of Gazanare and 
Meta. It is of an hot temperature, abounding 
in neat cattle, as also in cotton, maize, yucas, 
and plantains. The natives, who should amount 
to about 150 Indians, fabricate much linen and 
woven stuffs of cotton in a very nice manner ; 
and of this consists their commerce : 68 miles 
e. n. e. of Tunja. 

PAYA, a river of the province and government 
of the kingdom of Tierra Firme : which rises 
in the interior, runs w. and enters the Grande of 
Tuira just after the source of this. 

PAYAGUAS, a barbarous and cruel nation 
of Indians of Paraguay, who dwell to the n. and 
to the w. of the city of La Asuncion. They are 
pirates, and infest the rivers Paraguay and Pa 
rana in canoes and small barks. Their arms are 
bows and arrows, and clubs of a very heavy 
wood. 

PAYAGUAS, a settlement in the province and 
country of Las Amazonas of Indians of the afore 
said nation : situate on the shore of the river 
Marauon. 

PAYAGUAS, a river of the same province, 
which rises in the territory of the aforesaid In 
dians, runs s. and enters the Maranon. 

PAYAMINO, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Quixos and Macas in the kingdom 
of Quito ; which runs s. and receives the waters 
of the Tutapisco, Pauxi-yacu, Puninu, and others 
of less note , rises in the mountains called La 
Galera, runs 60 miles, and enters by the n. into 
the Napo, in lat. 12 X s. 

PAYANA, a river of the province and corre- 
gimiento of Piura in Peru, which runs w. and 
enters the sea in the bay of Machala. 

PAYANA, other two rivers, of the same name, 
in this province and kingdom, which run near 
to the above, and are distinguished by the titles 
of Second and Third. 



P A Z 

PAYANSOS, a barbarous nation of Indians, 
who dwell to the n. of the city of Guanuco, in 
the mountains of the Andes : bounded by the na 
tion of the barbarian Panataguas, and occupying 
a beautiful llanura^ surrounded by mountains, 
upwards of five leagues in extent. It is nume 
rous and warlike ; and their conversion was be 
gun in 1644 by the religious observers of San 
Francisco de Lima, who formed some settlements 
of them. 

PAYEL, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Yucatan, which enters the sea between 
the Niseco and the bay of Asension. 

PA YEN, a settlement of the kingdom of Chile, 
situate on the mountains, between the city of La 
Concepcion and Santiago. It is celebrated for 
an excellent mine of copper, from whence some 
pieces have been extracted of 50 to 100 quintals 
weight; but it is little worked, from the scarcity of 
hands ; [as also in consequence of the opposition 
of the Puelches, who inhabit that district. As 
fine a mine lias been since discovered at Curico.] 

[PAY JAN, a small town in the jurisdiction 
of rruxillo, in Peru, eight leagues s. of St. Pe 
dro.] 

[PAYRABA, a town and captainship in the n. 
division of Brazil.] 

[PAYTA. See PAITA.] 

PAYURUYAY, a river of the province and 
government of Mainas, in the kingdom of Quito; 
which rises s. of the lake Pachina, runs s. and 
enters the Maranon between the settlements of 
Yameos and Amaguas. 

PAZ, NUESTRA SENORA DE LA, or CHUQUI- 
AVO ; called also Pueblo Nuevo, a city of the 
kingdom of Peru : founded by Alonzo de Men- 
doza in 1548, and not in 1558, as some assert, in 
the ancient province of Pacajes, and in a beauti 
ful llanura, called Chuquiavo, by order of the 
licentiate Pedro de la Gasca, gov ernor of Peru : 
who gave it this name in memory of the pacifi 
cation of that kingdom from the civil wars it had 
experienced. 

It is the head of a bishopric, erected in 1605 
by the pontiff Paul V. It has a beautiful cathe 
dral-church, in which is venerated an image of 
Nuestra Senora del Pelar of Zaragoza, the gift 
of the emperor Charles V. ; four parishes, which 
are, El Sagrario, in which is reverenced a very 
small image of Jesus Nazarens, which, in 1622, 
underwent a miraculous sweat for several times, 
and to the evidence of the people ; Santa Bar 
bara; San Sebastian and San Pedro: five con 
vents of the religious orders of San Francisco ; 
Santo Domingo ; San Agustin ; La Merced ; 
San Juan de Dios, with an hospital; and a col- 



PAZ 



-e, which belonged to the Jesuits ; two monas 
teries of nuns, one of La Conception, another 
of barefooted Carmelites : a seminary college, 
with the dedicatory title of San Geronimo, for 
the instruction of youth, under the care of the 
Jesuits : and a house for recluse women. 

The territory of its situation is rough and un 
even, and its temperature cold, as bearing only 
three leagues from the cordillera. From this 
flows down a stream which intersects the town, 
and over which is thrown three stone bridges of 
one arch each. By this stream are frequently 
found washed up bits of gold of the finest quality; 
and, in 1730, a bit was found of the value of 
12,000 dollars, which was sent to the king. In 
the middle of the chief square is a beautiful 
fountain sprouting from three bodies of white 
stone. The country is fertile, pleasant, and 
abundant, in barley, papas, and coca. The word 
Chuquiavo is corrupted from Choqueyapu, which, 
in the Aimaran language, which is that of the 
natives, signifies an inheritance of gold. 

The bishop is suffragan to the archbishopric of 
Charcas, and not of Lima, as Mr. Martiniere as 
serts. The arms of this city, which were granted 
by the emperor Charles V., are a shield, and in 
the highest part of it an helmet and a dove with 
a branch of olive in its beak ; in the centre a 
crown ; below this, on one side, a lion, and on 
the other a lamb, both standing under a river, 
the motto being as follows : 

" Los discordes encontrados 
En paz y amor sejuntaron ; 
Y Pueblo de Paz fundaron 
Para perpetua. memorial 

The discordances, met together, 
United themselves in peace and love: 
And founded a settlement of peace 
In perpetual remembrance. 

It is 288 miles s. s. e. from Cuzco, 218 s. e. from 
Arequipa, 612 s. e. from Lima, and 234 w. of 
Sta. Cruz de la Sierra, and in lat. 17 30 s. long. 

68 25 a). 

Bishops who have presided in La Paz. 

1. Don Fr. Domingo deValderrama, of the order 
of Santo Domingo, native of Quito, a celebrated 
preacher and professor in the university of Lima: 
promoted from the archbishopric of Santo Do 
mingo to be first bishop of La Paz in 1606. He 
died in 1615. 

2. Don Pedro de Valencia, native of Lima; in 
which university he studied civil law and canons. 



and in both graduated as doctor : was chanter of 
that holy metropolitan church ; elected bishop of 
La Paz in 1616. After a most laudable zeal in 
the discharge of his duty, he died at 80 years of 
age in 1631. 

3. Don Feliciano de la Vega, native of Lima ; 
a man of extraordinary literature and talent : he 
was canon in his native place, chanter and pro- 
visor of the archbishop Don Bartolome Lobo 
Guerrero, and made governor of the archbishopric 
by Don Fernando Arias de Ugarte, commissary 
of crusade and of the inquisition, morning pro 
fessor of canons in that university ; and so pro 
found a lawyer, that Fr. Buenaventura de Salinas 
asserts, that of the four thousand sentences which 
he gave, civil or criminal, not one w r as ever re 
voked. He was elected bishop of Popayan, and 
from thence translated to the see of La Paz in 
1639, and promoted in the same year to the arch 
bishopric of Mexico. 

4. Don Alonso Franco de Luna, native of Ma 
drid ; collegiate in the chief college of San Ilde- 
fonso de Alcala, curate of the parish of San An 
dres in his native place, bishop of Nueva Viz- 
caya, and promoted to La Paz, where he died in 
1644. 

5. Don Fr. Francisco de la Sena, of the order 
of San Agustin, native of the city of Leon de 
Guanuco in Peru : he studied and read arts and 
theology, was master of studies, and in the uni 
versity of Lima noon and evening lecturer ; twice 
provincial in his religion and cdificador of the 
holy office ; presented to the bishopric of La Paz 
in 1645. He died before he took possession. 

6. Don Antonio de Castro y Castillo, native 
of Castro Xeris in the archbishopric of Burgos : 
he commenced his studies in the university of 
Alcala, and finished them at Salamanca, where 
he graduated as bachelor; also in Lima as licen 
tiate : he was curate of the grand church of Po- 
tosi, inquisitor of Lima for 20 years ; presented 
to the bishopric of Guamanga, which he re 
nounced, and afterwards to that of La Paz in 
1648. 

7. Don Fr. Francisco de Gamboa, of the order 
of San Agustin, evening theological lecturer; 
presented to the bishopric, but refused it. 

8. Don Martin de Velasco y Molina, native of 
the town of this name in Aragon; canon of Trux- 
illo, dean of Arequipa, penitentiary canon and 
chanter in the holy church of Lima ; morning 
lecturer in its university, provisor of the archbi 
shop Don Pedro de Villagomez; presented to 
the bishopric of Santa Marta, but which he did not 
accept, although he did of that of La Paz, in 1654, 

M 2 



84 



PAZ 



PAZ 



9. Don Fr. Bernardino de Cardenas, of whom 
we have spoken in the catalogue of the bishops 
of Paraguay ; and although it is there observed, 
that he was promoted to the church of Santa 
Cruz de la Sierra ; yet was he removed to that 
of La Paz in the same year of 1666, where he 
enjoyed greater quietude than he did in the 
former, and where he died. 

10. Don Fr. Gabriel de Guillistegui, also of 
the order of San Francisco, and bishop of Para 
guay ; promoted to the bishopric of La Paz in 
1671 : he died in 1675. 

11. Don. Fr. Bernardo Carrasco, of the order 
of S. Domingo, native of Lima, and provincial of 
his order ; presented to the bishopric of this dio- 
cess from that of La Paz in 1676. 

12. Don Fr. Diego Morcillo, of the order of 
La Santisima Trinidad Calzada, native of Rob- 
ledo in La Mancha, provincial of his religion ; 
elected bishop of Nicaragua, removed to that of 
La Paz in 1708, and promoted to the archbishop 
ric of Charcas in 1711. 

13. Don Mateo Villafane, of whom mention is 
made in the bishops of Popayan : he passed 
promoted from that church to this of La Paz 
in 1711. 

14. Don Agustin Rodrigueze Delgado ; pro 
moted from the bishopric of Panama in 1731. 

15. Don Salvador Bermudez ; promoted from 
the archbishopric of Charcas in 1746. 

16. Don Fr. Joseph de Peralta, of the order 
of St. Domingo ; promoted from the bishopric 
of Buenos Ayres in the aforesaid year, 1746, and 
died in the following. 

17. Don Matias de Ibanez, elected in 1748 : 
he died in 1752. 

18. Don Diego Antonio de Parada, canon of 
the cathedral of Astorga, many years pro visor of 
its bishopric ; elected to this of La Paz in 1752, 
and promoted to the metropolitan see of the 
archbishopric of Lima in 1761. 

19. Don Gregorio Francisco de Campos, 
elected in 1762, and who was actually govern 
ing in 1788. 

PAZ, SAN Luis DE LA, an alcaldia mayor and 
district of the kingdom and bishopric of Mechoa- 
can ; bounded s. e. by the jurisdiction of the town 
of Cadereita, w. by that of San Miguel el Grande, 
s. by that of Queretaro, and n. by that of San 
Luis de Potosi. It is very fertile, and abounds 
in vegetable productions, especially in vines, of 
which much wine and brandy are made, consti 
tuting the principal branches of the commerce of 
its limited jurisdiction ; this consisting of only 
the following settlements : 



Real de Pozos, 

San Francisco de los 

Amues, 

Real de Targea, 
PAZ, the capital of 



San Juan Baptista 

Tzichu, 
San Tomas Tierra 

Blanca. 
the same name, was 



founded by the Jesuits for the conversion of the 
infidels, and had in it a very good college. Its 
population is composed of 42 families of Spa 
niards, 68 of Mustees and Mulattoes, and 614 
of Indians, applied to the cultivation of maize ? 
which the territory produces in abundance ; as 
also of vines, from which they make great quan 
tities of wine and brandy, much esteemed through 
out the kingdom. It is 120 miles n. with an in 
clination to n.w. of Mexico, iu lat. 20 J 59 / n. 
long. 10028 / aj. 

PAZ, a settlement, with the dedicatory title of 
San Nicholas, in the province and government 
of Cartagena and Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It 
is of the district of the town of Sinii, and one of 
those new settlements founded by the governor 
Don Francisco Pimienta in 1776. 

PAZ, another, of the missions which were held 
by the Jesuits in California ; situate on the shore 
of the bay of the same name, at a small distance 
from the inner coast of the gulf. 

PAZ, another, with a good port, which is a 
parish of the French, in the part which they pos 
sess in the island St. Domingo : on the n. coast, 
between the bay of Mosquito and the settlement 
of San Luis. 

PAZCA. See PASCA. 

PAZCALA, a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district of Clanapa, and alcaldia 
mayor of Tlapa in Nueva Espana. It contains 
38 families of Indians, who live by cultivating 
and trading iu grain. Six leagues from its head 
settlement. 

[PAZQUARO, a lake in Mexico or New 



PA2UELOS, a settlement of the province 
and government of Cumana or Nueva Anda- 
lucia; situate on the coast, at the mouth of the 
river Nervi, and e. of the city of Barcelona. 

PAZULCO, a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district of Tepoxtlan, and alcaldia 
mayor of Cuernavaca in Nueva Espana. It con 
tains 130 families of Indians, is annexed to the 
curacy of Ayacapixtla, and is situate on an en 
tirely barren plain, so that it is without all com 
merce, and supported by the mere labour of the 
inhabitants. It has been in a state of great dila 
pidation, or nearly depopulated since the year 
1744, when on one of the nights of Shrove-tide 
were murdered there of the ministers of justice 






P E B 

of the district of Ayotapec, who came in an un 
timely manner amongst the people whilst they 
were enjoying themselves. 

[PEACE, an island on the coast of Nova 
Scotia, a little to the s. of Mirachi point] 

[PEACE River, in N. America, was visited by 
Mackenzie in the year 1789 ; he ascended it to 
its source, and thence to the Pacific ocean, mak 
ing many discoveries, which he judiciously nar 
rated in his journal. Previously to this voyage 
this celebrated traveller had embarked from fort 
Chepewyan, in lat. 58 n. long. 110 w. from 
Greenwich, and with the greatest fortitude, un 
der embarrassing and perilous circumstances, ex 
plored with assiduity the n. region to nearly lat. 
70 n. where obstruction by ice compelled him 
to return to fort Chepewyan.] 

[PEACHAM, a township in Caledonia county, 
Vermont ; lies w. of Barnet on Connecticut river. 
It contains 365 inhabitants.] 

[PEACOCK, a township in Buck s county, 
Pennsylvania.] 

PEAD, a settlement of the island of Barba- 
does, in the s. part near the coast. 

[PEAKS OF OTTER, are thought to be the 
highest part of the Blue Ridge, or any other of 
that part of N.America, measuring from their 
base. The height is 4000 feet ; which, however, 
is not one-fifth of the height of the mountains of 
S. America.] 

[PEARL, an island in the >-ulf of Mexico, 
towards the mouth of the Mississippi, a few 
leagues from Dauphin island ; about six or seven 
miles in length, and four in breadth.] 

[PEARL, a river which rises in the Chactaw 
country, in the w. part of Georgia, has a s. 
course to the gulf of Mexico, and is navigable 
upwards of 150 miles. Its principal mouths are 
near the entrance at the e. end of the Regolets, 
through which is the passage to lake Ponchar- 
train. It has seven feet at its entrance, and deep 
water afterwards. In 1769 there were some set 
tlements on this river, where they raised tobacco, 
indigo, cotton, rice, Indian command all sorts of 
vegetables. The land produces a variety of tim 
ber, fit for pipe and hogshead staves, masts, 
yards, and all kinds of plank for ship-building.] 

[PEARN S Point, on the w. side of the island 
of Antigua, and the w. side of Mosquito cove. 
Off it are the Five Islands.] 

PEBAS Y CAUMARES, SAN IGNACIO DE, 
a settlement of the province and government of 
Mainas in the kingdom of Quito ; situate at the 
mouth of the river Shiquita, at its entrance into 
the Maraiion. 



FED 



85 



PEBOKE, a small river of Nova Scotia or 
Acadia in N. America, which runs e. between 
the coast and the bay of Fundy, and enters the 
Cheben. 

PECA, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Jaen de Bracamoros in the kingdom 
of Quito. 

PECHE, ANCE DE LA, a bay on the e. coast 
of lake Superior in N. America. 

PECHELIN, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Cartagena in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. It rises close to the town of Maria, 
runs w. and enters the sea near the town of San 
tiago de Tolu. 

PECHERA, a settlement of the missions which 
were held by the Jesuits, in the province of Ta- 
raumara and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya. Thirty- 
two leagues w. s. w. one quarter s. of the town 
and real of mines of San Felipe Chiguagua. 

PECHEURS, an island of the N. Sea, near 
the coast of Guayana, in the part possessed by 
the French ; situate at the mouth of the river 
Aprovak. It is half a league long, but is very 
narrow, covered with trees, and having a sand 
bank, which extends another half league to the 
n. and forms two channels, of which that to the 
left is the best, as it has three fathoms depth of 
water, whereas the other has only two. 

PECKS, a small island of the N. Sea, near the 
coast of New Jersey ; between port Great Egg 
and the island of Sudley. 

[PECWALKET, an ancient Indian village, 
now called Fryburg. Sixty miles from the sea.] 
PECLLAN SIMIQUIES, a barbarous nation 
of Indians, descendants of the Mautas, who used 
to occupy the country of the coast in the pro 
vince called, at the present day, Puerto Viejo, 
in the government of Guayaquil ; subjected by 
the emperor Hayna Capac, thirteenth monarch 
of Peru. It is at present entirely extinguished. 

PECOIQUEN, a river of the island of La 
Laxa in the kingdom of Chile, which runs zp. and 
enters the Vergara. 

PECOMPTUCK, an abundant river of the 
province and colony of New England in N, 
America. 

PECOS, a settlement of the kingdom of 
Nuevo Mexico in N. America; situate at the 
source of a river which enters the Grande del 
Norte, between the settlements of Tesuque and 
Santa Fe, 

PECURIES, a settlement of the missions which 
are held by the religious of San Franciso in the 
kingdom of Nuevo Mexico. 

[PEDEE, a river which rises in N. Carolina, 



86 



FED 



where it is called Yadkin river. In S. Carolina 
it takes the name of Pedee ; and receiving the 
waters of Lynche s creek, Little Pedee, and 
Black river, it joins the Wakkamaw river near 
Georgetown. These united streams, with the 
accession of a small creek on which George 
town stands, from Winyaw bay, which, about 
12 miles below, communicates with the ocean.] 

PEDERNALES, a small river of the island 
St. Domingo, which rises in the sierras of Ba- 
ruco, runs w. through a long strip of land of 
the s. coast, and enters the sea between cape 
Colorado and the bay of Puer. 

PEDERNALES, another river, of this name, in 
the province and government of Florida, which 
runs s. and enters the sea between the Apalachi- 
cola and the point of Perro. 

PEDERNALES, a point of land or extremity of 
the coast, which looks to the e. of the island of 
Cuba. 

PEDERNALES, another, of the s. coast of the 
same island, close to that of Maisi. 

PEDI, an abundant river of S. Carolina, 
which runs s. e. for many leagues, and enters the 
sea by different mouths. 

PEDI, another, a small river in the same pro 
vince, which runs s. and unites itself with the 
Petite to enter the Pedi. 

[PEDRA Shoals, in the W. Indies, to the s. 
of Jamaica, extend from lat. 16 45 to 17 30 n. 
and from long. 76 28 to 78 W w.~] 

PEDRAL, S. JOSEPH DEL, otherwise called 
CHAMPAN, a settlement of the government of 
San Juan Jiron in the Nuevo Reyno de Gra 
nada, on the shore of the river Grande la Mag 
dalena, 16 leagues below the port of Carare, and 
eight above the fort of Morales, and 24 from its 
capital. It is of an hot and sickly temperature, 
but abounding in cacao, of which the inhabi 
tants, amounting to about 100, reap a great crop. 

[PEDRAS Point, on the coast of Brazil, is 
seven leagues e. s. e. from the strait of St. John s 
island, and 75 from cape North. Also a point 
on the same coast 10 leagues zo.n.w. of Bran- 
dihi bay.] 

[PEDRAS, a river on the n. w. side of Punta 
des Pedras, at the s. extremity of Amazon river.] 
PEDRAZA, a small city of the province and 
government of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; founded by Gonzalo Liduena, in 
1591, who gave it the name in honour of his na 
tive place in Estremadura. The infidel Indians 
destroyed it in 1614, and it was afterwards re 
built by Captain Diego de Luna. It is in the 
district of the city of Merida ; situate amidst 



P E I) 

some lofty and craggy mountains, and is fertile 
in cacao, tobacco, maize, yucas, plantains, &c. 
Its temperature is hot and very sickly, so that it 
was abandoned by the curate and the rest of the 
inhabitants, save by some 30 barbarian and un 
civilized Indians. 

PEDRAZA, a settlement of the province and 
government of Santa Marta in the same king 
dom, of the district of the Rio del Hacha ; si 
tuate on the shore of a river which enters the 
sea in the point of San Agustin. 

PEDREGAL, a small reduced settlement of 
the district of Tocaima, and government of Mari- 
quita in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada ; situate 
on the further shore of the river Bogota, which 
is passed there en tarn-vita. It is of an hot tem 
perature, but healthy ; abounding in sugar canes, 
maize, yucas, plantains, &c. 

PEDREGAL, another, in the province and go 
vernment of Venezuela, of the same kingdom as 
the former ; situate s. one ciuarter w. of the citj 
of Coro, between the rivers seco and Tamayo. 

PEDREGAL, another, of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Tacunga in the kingdom of Quito ; 
situate e. of that of Alausi. 

PEDRERA, a settlement of the missions which 
are held by the Carmelite fathers of Portugal, in 
the province and country of Las Amazonas ; si 
tuate on the shore of the Rio Negro. 

PEDRERO, a settlement of the province and 
country of Las Amazonas in the territory of the 
Portuguese ; situate on the shore of the Negro, 
as is the former, opposite the mouth of the river 
Paravillanas. 

PEDRITO, a settlement of the province and 
government of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; on the shore of the Rio Grande de 
la Magdalena. 

PEDRO, S. a settlement of the head settle 
ment of the district, and alcaldia mayor of Hue- 
jutla, in NuevaEspana; inhabited by 35 fami 
lies of Indians, who live by sowing maize, French 
beans, and cultivating many fruit trees. It is 
annexed to the curacy of its capital, from whence 
it lies eight leagues to the n. In its district are 
found 10 cultivated estates, in the which are In 
dians distributed in the following proportions ; 
in La Candelaria are 67, in La Herradura 24, 
in Tepozteco 20, in Tecal 12, in Tepanctlican 20, 
in Tuzantla 64, in Canchitlan 140, in Zitlan 25, 
in Los Romeros 43, and in San Felipe 45. In 
all these they make loaf-sugar, selling to the 
amount of lOOOcargas (loads) annually, this being 
their only commerce, owing to the drought and 
want of pastures. 



FED 

PEDRO, S. another settlement, of the pro 
vince and government of Santa Marta in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada ; situate on the shore 
of the river Grande de la Magdalena, e. of the 
town of Tamalameque. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
the district of Amatepec, and alcaldia mayor of 
Zultepec in Nueva Esparla ; of a warm and moist 
temperature. It contains 11 families of Indians, 
who maintain themselves by breeding the larger 
cattle, and by sowing maize and some fruits. 
Five leagues s. of its head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another of the head settlement of 
Quechula, and alcaldia mayor of Tepeaca in the 
same kingdom. It contains nine families of 
JWustces, and 18 of Indians ; and is very close to 
its head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the alcaldia mayor of 
Huamelula in the same kingdom ; situate on the 
top of a mountain. It is of a mild temperature, 
and has various streams of sweet water, which 
fertilize its district. It is inhabited by 25 fami 
lies of Indians, who trade in cochineal, in rosa 
ries, which they make of a fruit called tepexilote. 
Three leagues w. of Pochutla. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
the district of Huehuetlan, and alcaldia mayor of 
Cuicatlan in the same kingdom : situate between 
two lofty mountains, with 97 families of Indians, 
employed in the cultivation and commerce of 
cochineal and cotton, of which they make woven 
stuffs. One league from its head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
Zanguio, and alcaldia mayor of Zamora in the 
same kingdom ; situate on the skirt of a lofty 
and woody mountain, of a somewhat hot and 
moist temperature, and containing 22 families of 
Indians. Three leagues n. of its head settle 
ment. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
Taximaroa, and alcaldia mayor of Maravatio in 
the same kingdom, and in the province and bi 
shopric of Mechoacan. It contains 46 families 
of Indians, and is a little more than three leagues 
s. of its head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another, which is the head settle 
ment of the district of the alcaldia mayor of Vil- 
lalta in the same kingdom : of a cold tempera 
ture, containing 82 families of Indians, and being 
distant somewhat more than eight leagues s. of 
its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
Papalotipac, and alcaldia mayor of Cuicatlan in 
the same kingdom. It contains 15 families of 
Indians, occupied in the collecting and prepar- 



P E D 



87 



ing of saltpetre, cochineal, and cotton, of which 
they make various woven stuffs. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
the alcaldia mayor of La Barca in the kingdom of 
Nueva Galicia. Three leagues e. of the capital, 
and in its district, are many opulent cultivated 
estates, occupying a space of 17 leagues to the e. 
as far as Tarimoro. 

PEDRO, S. another, with the surname of Apos- 
tol, of the head settlement of the town of the 
Marquiseate del Valle, and the alcaldia mayor of 
Quatro Villas. It has 82 families of Indians, 
employed in the cultivation and commerce of 
wheat, cochineal, maize, fruits, woods, coal, and 
lime. In its vicinity are various ranchos (tempo 
rary habitations) for labour, belonging to the 
different merchants of the city of Oaxaca. Two 
leagues s.e. of its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, which is the head settle 
ment of the district of the alcaldia mayor of To- 
nala. It is of a cold temperature, contains 83 
families of Indians, who cultivate the seeds and 
fruits of the country, in which consists their com 
merce, and it is two leagues K>. of its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement, 
and alcaldia mayor of Compostela in the king 
dom of Nueva Galicia : on the shore of the 
river Tepee, and 10 leagues from its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement 
and alcaldia mayor of Barca in the same kingdom 
as the former, close to its capital to the w. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement 
and alcaldia mayor of Toluca in Nueva Espana, 
with 141 families of Indians; at a small distance 
w. of its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
Zumpahuacan, and alcaldia mayor of Marinalco 
in the same kingdom ; distant a short league 
from its capital. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement and 
alcaldia mayor of Tetela Xonotla in the same 
kingdom : a league and a half w. of the same 
head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement 
and alcaldia mayor of Tecali in the same king 
dom ; with 17 Indian families. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the alcaldia mayor of 
Nexapa in the same kingdom ; with 51 Indian 
families. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Guanta in Peru ; annexed to the 
curacy of Tiellas. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and cor- 
regimiento ) of Lucanas in the same kingdom ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Pucquin, 



88 



FED 



PEDRO, S. another, of the province and cor- 
regimicnto of Tomina in the same kingdom ; an 
nexed to the curacy of Sopachui. 

PEDRO, S. another, a small settlement or ward 
of the district and jurisdiction of the city of Val- 
ladolid in the province and bishopric of Mecho- 
acan and kingdom of Nueva Espana. 

PEDRO, S. another, with the surname of Mar- 
tir, in the head settlement of Tepalcaltepec, and 
alcaldia mayor of Nejapa in Nueva Espana; si 
tuate on the plain of a deep glen, surrounded by 
many mountains of a great height, and on which 
the Indians, the inhabitants, plant their fig trees. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Popayan in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada : on the shore of the river Caquetii, 
near its source. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the island and govern 
ment of Margarita : on the s. coast, opposite the 
coast of Tierra Firme. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Sonora in Nueva Espana, in the 
country of the [Cocomaricopas Indians ; on the 
shore of the river Grande de Gila. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and alcaldia 
mayor of Vera Paz in the kingdom of Gua 
temala. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Quillota in the kingdom of Chile ; 
on the shore of the river Quillota. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Tucuman in Peru ; of the jurisdic 
tion of the city of Cordoba ; on the shore of a 
river. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Buenos Ayres, in the same king 
dom as the former ; on the shore of the river 
Parana, and at the mouth where it enters the 
Sala. [This settlement constitues a parish, lying 
on the w. bank of the Parana, about 70 miles 
n.w. of Buenos Ayres. Lat. 33 39 / 47" s. Long. 
59 53 w.~\ 

[PEDRO, S. a settlement of Indians, of the pro 
vince and government of Buenos Ayres ; situate 
on a branch of the Parana, about 100 miles n. of 
Santa Fe. Lat. 29 57 s. Long. 60 17 a).] 

PEDRO, S. another, of the head settlement of 
the alcaldia mayor of Juchipila in Nueva Espana. 
Six leagues w. of its head settlement. 

PEDRO, S. another, a small settlement or ward 
of the head settlement of Texmelucan, and al 
caldia mayor of Guajozingo in the same kingdom. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the missions which were 
held by the Jesuits, in the province of Tepe- 
guana and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya. 



FED 

PEDRO, S. another, which is a real of mines 
of silver, of the province of Taraumara and king 
dom of Nueva Vizcaya; on the shore of a river 
which enters the Conchos, and 120 leagues from 
the capital Guadiana, in about lat. 28 . 

PEDRO, S. another, of the missions which were 
held by the Jesuits in the province of Topia and 
kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya; in the midst of a 
sierra of that name, and on the shore of the 
river Piastla. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Venezuela in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada: founded in the sierra in the seven 
teenth century. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Quijos and Macas in the kingdom 
of Quito : one of the missions of the Sucumbios 
Indians, which were founded and held under the 
charge of the Jesuits. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Maracaibo in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada ; between the coast and the great lake. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and corre- 
{rimiento of Rancagua in the kingdom of Chile ; 
in the district of which, towards the coast, is a 
lake called de Santo Domingo, as it is between 
an estate which belongs to the convent of the re 
ligious of this order in the city of Santiago, and 
another called Bucalemu, where the Jesuits had 
a good college, and the rich and abundant gold 
mine which was discovered 50 years since. 

PEDRO, S. another, with the addition of No- 
lasco, of the missions which were held by the 
Carmelite fathers of Portugal, in the territory 
and country of Las Amazonas ; on the shore of 
this river. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the missions which were 
held by the Jesuits in the province and govern 
ment of Mainas and kingdom of Quito ; situate 
on the shore of the river Napo, and at the mouth 
where this is entered by the Aguarico. 

PEDRO, S. another, which is a real of silver 
mines, of the province and government of So- 
nora. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Santa Marta in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada ; on the shore of the river Canas, 
near the coast, in the country of the Taironas 
Indians. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Honduras in the kingdom of Gua 
temala. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the island of Guada- 
lupe, one of the Antilles ; situate at the n. head, 
with a good fort for its defence. 



FED 

PEDRO, S. another, of the island Martinique, 
where the French have a fort. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the missions which were 
held by the Jesuits in the province and govern 
ment of Mainas, of the kingdom of Quito ; si 
tuate on the shore of the Maranon, and distinct 
from the other of the same name, of which we 
have already spoken. It is near the settlement 
of San Pablo de los Omaguas. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Moxos in the same kingdom as the 
Ibrmer. It was the military rendezvous of the 
expedition unsuccessfully undertaken by briga 
dier Don Francisco Pestana in 1768. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the island of Curazao ; 
situate on the coast of a bay in the n. part. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Maracaibo ; on the shore of the lake 
of this name, and the river Cuervo to the s.. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and alcal- 
dia mayor of Zacapula in the kingdom of Gua 
temala. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and alcal- 
dia mayor of Chiapa in the same kingdom. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and alcal- 
dia mayor of Zacatopeques in the same kingdom. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and corre- 
gimiento of Vera Paz in the same kingdom. 

PEDRO, S. another, with the addition of Nuevo, 
in the province and captainship of Todos Santos 
and kingdom of Brazil ; situate on the shore of 
the river Paraguaca, near the bay. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and king 
dom of Guatemala. 

PEDRO, S. a large city in the province and 
captainship of Rey in Brazil ; at the mouth of the 
great lake of Los Patos. 

PEDRO, S. a town of the province and corre- 
gimicnto of Quillota in the kingdom of Chile. 

PEDRO, S. a large river of the province of Ta- 
raumara and kingdom of Nueva Vizcaya in N. 
America. It rises in lat. 28, runs nearly from 
e. to w. and enters the Grande del Norte on the 
confines of the province of Coaguila, where this 
province is divided from the kingdom of Nuevo 
Mexico. It is very pleasant, since its shores are 
covered with poplar trees, and as it has in one 
part an extensive pasture where neat cattle are 
bred. 

PEDRO, S. another river, of the province and 
government of Veragua in the kingdom ofTierra 
Firme. It rises in the part of the s. coast by the 
mountain of Tabaraba, and following its course 
to that rhumb, enters the Martin Grande just 
before this runs into the sea. 

VOL. IV. 



FED 



89 



PEDRO, S. another, of the province and king 
dom of Quito, which rises near the settlement of 
St. Domingo, and runs n. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Venezuela in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. It rises in a mountain near the city 
of Nirua, runs nearly from n. to s. and unites it 
self with another to enter the Coxede. 

PEDRO, S. another, a large and abundant river 
of the kingdom of Brazil, formed from several 
which rise in the mountains of the country and 
territory of the Guaranis Indians in various di 
rections. It follows its course along the coast, 
and very close to it, resembling a large lake, 
until it enters the sea, close to the fort of San 
Pedro ; but detaching another arm to form the 
lake ImerK 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Texas in Nueva Espaiia. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the kingdom of Nueva 
Vizcaya in N. America. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the name of San Pablo, 
in the province and alcaldia mayor of Tabasco, 
which at its source is called Lodazal. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Venezuela in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. It rises in the sierra, runs n. and en 
ters the lake Maracaibo. 

PEDRO, S. another, of the province and go 
vernment of Florida, which runs w. and enters 
the sea between the fall of Anclote and those of 
St. Martin. 

PEDRO, S; another, called also De San Pablo, 
in the province and government of Vera Cruz, 
in the alcaldia mayor of Tabasco. It enters the 
sea close to the settlement of Almeria. 

PEDRO, S. a bay in the s. coast of the straits 
iof Magellan, close to the cape of La Perdicion. 
It is called also by some, De la Navidad. 

PEDRO, S. another, on. the c. coast of Florida-, 
without the channel of Bahama. , fc^ 

PEDRO, S. a port on the s: coast of the island 
of Cuba; between the Capilia.de Santiago and 
the river De Sevilla. 1 *T 

PEDRO, S. another bay, on! the s. coast of the 
island of Jamaica. e/[J 

PEDRO, S. a bay on the coast, which lies be 
tween the river La Plata and the straits of Ma 
gellan. It is in lat. 51 20 s. between the river 
of Los Gallegos and the bay Grande. 

PEDRO, S. a small island of the S. Sea, in 
the bay of Panama, of the province and king 
dom of Tierra Firme; opposite the gulf of San 
Miguel. 

PEDRO, S. another island, also small, of the 

N 



90 P E H 

gulf of California ; situate in the interior of the 
same, and close to the coast of Nueva Espana. 

PEDRO, S. a fort of the kingdom of Chile ; si 
tuate on the opposite side of the river Biobio, as 
a frontier to the Araucanos Indians, who burnt 
and destroyed it in 1599. 

PEDRO, S. a lake in the kingdom of Nueva 
Vizcaya, formed from the river Las Nasas. 

[PEDRO POINT, Great, is on the s. coast of 
the island of Jamaica. From Portland point to 
this point, the course iso>. by n. about 11 leagues. 
About s. three-quarters e. distance 14 leagues 
from point Pedro, lies the easternmost Pedro 
keyj 

[PEDRO POINT, Little, on the s. coast of the 
same island, lies e. of great Pedro point, within 
a shoal partly dry ; but has five fathoms within, 
and 10 on the outer edge of it.] 
[PEDRO. See PETER.] 

PEDROSA, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of San Vincente in Brazil ; situate be 
tween the settlements of Cubar and Escamel. 

PEE, Port, a settlement of the French, in the 
part they possess in the island St. Domingo. 
Fourteen leagues from Guarico. 

[PEEK S Kill, a small post-town in W. Ches 
ter county, New York ; on the e. side of Hud 
son s river, and n. side of the creek of its name, 
four miles from its mouth.- It is 14 miles s. of 
Fish Kill, and 40 n. of New York. In the winter 
of 1780, General Washington encamped on the 
strong grounds in this vicinity.] 

PEGEBSCUL, a fall of the river Amaris- 
coggin in the province of Continent, near its 
mouth. 

PEGUAS, a barbarous nation of Indians of 
the province and government of Quixos and 
Macas in the kingdom of Quito, who dwell 
between the rivers Chamangui to the e. and Pu- 
ninu to the w. It was anciently very numerous, 
and occupied nearly the whole of the province. 
The principal settlement had the name of the 
former of the two rivers aforesaid, as being si 
tuate on its s . shore. This nation is at present 
reduced to a few Indians, who wander about the 
woods in the vicinity of the river Napo, main 
taining themselves by fishing and the chase. 

[PEGUNNOCK, a n. w. branch of Passaik 
river in New Jersey, which rises in Sussex 
county. The town of its name lies between it 
and Rockaway, another branch 5. of this river, 
n. w. of Morristown.] 

[PEHUENCHES, a valley of the Andes, in 
habited by Indians of this name in lat. 34 40 s. 
in the kingdom of Chile, In it are 11 springs of 



PEL 

very clear and limpid water, which overflow 
the surface, and become crystalized into a salt 
as white as snow. This valley is about 15 miles 
in circumference, and is entirely covered, for the 
depth of six feet, with a crust of salt, which is 
collected by the inhabitants in large pieces, and 
used for all domestic purposes. 

For a description of the Indians inhabiting 
these parts, see Index to additional matter con 
cerning CHILE. Chap. IV.] 

PEINE, a settlement of the province and cor- 
regimiento of Atacama in Peru, and of the arch 
bishopric of Charcas ; annexed to the curacy of 
its capital. 

PEJENA, a small river of the province and 
government of Guayana or Nueva Andalucia. 
It runs w. and enters the Orinoco close to the 
settlement and torrent of the Carichana. 

PEJ ENDING, a settlement of the province 
and government of Popayan in the kingdom of 
Quito ; belonging to the district of the town of 
Pasto. 

[PEJEPSCOT, or PEJIPSKAEG Falls, in An- 
droscoggin river. See KENNEBECK River, &c.] 

PEL A DO, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of Rey in Brazil ; situate w. of the 
settlement of Porcos. 

PEL ADO, a very lofty mountain, destitute of 
tree or plant, in the province and government of 
Darien and kingdom of Tierra Firme, on the 
coast of the S. Sea, on the side of the point of 
Garachine ; which may be discovered at a great 
distance at sea. 

PELADO, a river, called Cano Pelado, of the 
province and captainship of Rey in Brazil. It 
runs s. s. e. and enters the great lake of Los 
Patos. 

PELAGATOS, CERRO DE, a lofty mountain 
of the province and corregimiento of Truxillo in 
Peru. 

PELAN, a small river of the island St. Chris 
topher, one of the Antilles. It enters the sea on 
the s. w. coast, between the great road and the 
point of Palmites. 

PELAYO, S. a settlement of the province and 
government of Cartagena in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada, and of the district of the town of 
Tolu ; founded in 1776 by the governor D. Fran 
cisco Pimienta. 

(TELDEHUES, a mine of the kingdom of 
Chile, near Santiago. It produced daily upwards 
of 1500 pounds weight of gold, but being sud 
denly inundated the workmen were compelled 
to abandon it.] 

PELECAHUIN, a settlement of the govern- 



PEL 

uient of Valdivia in the kingdom of Chile ; 
situate on the shore and at the source of the 
river Valdivia. 

PELE, PELER or PELADA, a remarkable point 
of the . coast of lake Erie in Canada. 

PELE, also an island near the same point in 
the above lake. 

PELECHUCO, a settlement of the province 
and corre%imiento of Larecaja in Peru. 

PELEHUE, a settlement of Indians of the 
kingdom of Chile : near the sea coast, and on the 
shore of the river Tolten. 

PELEHUE, another settlement, of the same 
kingdom, in the island of Laxa ; on the shore of 
the river of Los Sauces. 

PELEPELQUA, a creek on the coast of the 
straits of Magellan, on the side of the river of 
the Pasage. 

PELES, a settlement of the province of Pen- 
sylvania in N. America, where the English have 
built a fort for the defence of the establishment 
which they founded there ; e. of the fort of Quene 
of the French, and not far from the river Ohio. 

[PELESON, a name sometimes applied to 
Clinch River ; which see.] 

[PELHAM, a township of Massachusetts, in 
Hampshire county, 1 1 miles n. e. of Northampton, 
and 78 w. of Boston. It was incorporated in 
1742, and contains 1040 inhabitants.] 

[PELHAM, a township of Rockingham county, 
New Hampshire, situate on the s. state line, 
which separates it from Dracut in Massachusetts. 
It lies on the e. side of Beaver river, 25 miles s. 
w. of Exeter, and 27 n. of Boston. It was incor 
porated in 1746, and contains 791 inhabitants.] 

[PELHAM, a township of New York, situate in 
W. Chester county, bounded s. and e. by the 
Sound, n. by the n. bounds of the manor of Pel- 
ham, including New City, Hart, and Applesby s 
islands. It contains 199 inhabitants ; of whom 
27 are electors, and 38 slaves.] 

[PELICAN, GREAT, an island a mile long and 
very narrow, e. of the bay of Mobile in the gulf 
of Mexico. Its concave side is towards the e. 
end of Dauphin island. Hawk s bay lies between 
these two islands. Little Pelican island is a 
small sand key, s. e. of great Pelican. Its e. curve 
meets a large shoal extending from Mobile Point.] 

[PELICAN, ISLANDS, on the s. coast of the island 
of Jamaica, are situate off the point so called, 
o. of Port Royal harbour.] 

[PELICAN, a small island at the s. w. point of 
the island of Antigua.] 

[PELICAN ROCKS, lie in Runaway bay, on the 
w. side of the island of Antigua, towards the 



P E M 



91 



n. a), they lie under water, and are very dan 
gerous.] 

[PELICAN SHOALS, small patches of sand banks 
about half a mile from the shore of the s. w. coast 
of the island of Barbadoes.] 

PELILEO, a settlement of the province and 
corre<rimiento of Riobamba, in the district and 
jurisdiction of Ambato of the kingdom of Quito; 
celebrated for the ability and ingenuity of the 
natives in carpenters work ; articles being made 
by them which vie in elegance with those of 
European manufacture. The climate here is 
benign and healthy. Its parish church is one of 
the best in the kingdom ; 10 miles 5. e of Ambato, 
and three w. of Palate, in lat. 1 21 s. 

PELINGARA, a river of the province and 
corregimiento of Piura in Peru. It runs w. and 
passes opposite the settlement to which it gives 
its name, and which is situate on its shore, and 
enters the Catamayu, opposite the settlement of 
Quirocotillo by the s. part, in lat. 4 44 *. 

PELISIPE, a river of N. Carolina, which runs 
s. s. w. and enters the Cherakees. 

PELOTAS, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of Rey in Brazil, near the coast, and 
at the source of the river Uruguay. 

PELOTAS, a river of the above province and 
kingdom ; which runs s. s. e. and enters the 
great lake of Los Patos. 

[PEMAGON, a settlement of the district of 
Maine, seven miles from Denney s river, and 14 
from Moose island.] 

[PEMAQUID, a bay on the sea-coast of Lin 
coln county, district of Maine. It lies e. of 
Sheepscot river, and contains a number of islands, 
many of which are under cultivation.] 

[PEMAQUID POINT, on the w. side of the above 
bay, lies two miles e. of Booth bay, and about 
four leagues n. w. of Menhegan island. Lat. 43 
48 n. Long. 69 27 a>.] 

[PEMBROKE, a township of Massachusetts, 
in Plymouth county, 31 miles s. by e. of Boston- 
It was incorporated in 1712, and contains 1954 
inhabitants. It lies IS miJtea.fihpm the mouth of 
the North river, and vessels? pf 300 tons have 
been built here. See NORTH RIVER.] 

[PEMBROKE, the Suncook of the Indians, a 
township of New Hampshire, in Rockingham 
county, on the e. side of Merrimack river, four 
miles s. e. of Concord. It lies upon two small 
rivers, Bowcook and Suncook, which run a s. by 
w. course into Merrimack river. In 1728, it was 
settled, and called Lovewell s town. It was incor 
porated in 1759, and contains 956 inhabitants.] 

[PEMIGEWASSET, a river of New Hamp- 



02 PEN 

shire, which springs from the e. part of the ridge 
called the Height of Land. Moose-hillock 
Mountain gives it one branch ; another comes 
from the s. w. extremity of the White Mountains, 
and a third comes from the township of Fran- 
conia. Its length is about 50 miles ; its course 
generally s. and it receives from both sides a 
number of streams. Winnipiseogee river, comes 
from the lake of that name, and unites its waters 
with the Pemigewasset at the lower end of San- 
born town. From this junction, the confluent 
stream bears the name of Merrimack, to the sea. 
See MERRIMACK.] 

PEMBERRY, a river of the province of 
Pennsylvania, in N. America. 

PEMAPECKA, a river of the same province 
as the former. 

PEMNAQUID, a river of the province of 
New England in N. America. 

PENA, LA, a settlement of the jurisdiction of 
the city of La Palma, in the corregimiento of 
Tunja in the Nuevo Reyno de Granada ; situate 
in a country rough and mountainous, and full of 
swamps. It produces cotton, tobacco, maize, 
sugar cane, plantains and yucas, and breeds much 
swine cattle : this being its principal commerce. 
It contains 300 housekeepers and a few Indians. 

PENA, BLANCA, another settlement, of the 
province and corregimiento of Coquimbo in the 
kingdom of Chile. 

PENA, another, with the surname of Oradada, 
in the coast of the province and corregimiento of 
Oercado in Peru, opposite the island of Fronton. 

PENA, another, called Rancho de la Pena, in 
the missions which are held by the religious of 
San Francisco of Nuevo Mexico. 

PENA, a cape or point of land on the n. coast 
of the island St. Domingo, between the bay of 
Balsamo and cape Frances the old. 

PENA, another point, on the coast of the pro 
vince and captainship of Seara in Brazil, between 
the coast of Porcelados and the bay of Iguape. 

PENACHI, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Piura in the kingdom of Quito. 

PENAGARA, a very lofty mountain of the 
province and country of Guayana, towards the w. 
It is celebrated for the brilliant appearance of its 
sides, which gave rise to the fable of its being 
entirely of gold and precious stones. The fact is, 
that it abounds in the metal called marcasite, and 
that from this arises the glitter which is so uni 
versal on every part of it. 

PENALOLEN, a settlement of the kingdom 
of Chile ; situate in the llano, or plain of Tango. 

PENAS, CABO DE, a point of land on the 



coast of the island of Fuego, between the points 
of Arenas and Santa Ines. 

PEN AS, a settlement of the province and corre-> 
gimiento of Paria in Peru ; e. of the capital. 

PENAS, NUESTRA SENORA DE LAS, a cele 
brated sanctuary of the province and corregimi 
ento of Omasuyos in Peru ; annexed, as a chapel 
of ease, to the curacy of Huariiia. 

PENAS, a very lofty mountain of the province 
and country of Chaco in Peru; on the shore of 
the channel of Galban. 

PENASCO, SAN MATEO DEL, a settlement 
and head settlement of the district, and alcaldia 
mayor of Tepozcolula, in Nueva Espana. It 
contains 600 families of Indians, with those of 
the wards of its district, who are employed in 
cultivating wheat and cochineal; five leagues 
s. of its capital. 

PENASCO, a small river of the district of Re- 
pocura in the kingdom of Chile. 

PENCO. See CONCEPCION DE CHILE. 

PENDELEC, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Cuenca in the kingdom of Quito, 
in the district of which are the estates of Lluglul 
and Quinaloma. 

[PENDLETON, a country of Virginia, bound 
ed n. w. by Randolph, and s. by Rockingharn 
countries ; watered by the s. branch of the Pa- 
towmack. It contains 2452 inhabitants, includ 
ing 73 slaves. Chief town, Frankford.J 

[PENDLETON, a country of Washington district, 
S. Carolina, on Keowee and Savannah rivers. It 
contained, in 1795, 9568 inhabitants, of whom 
834 are slaves ; and sends three representatives 
and one senator to the state legislature. The 
court-house in this county is 22 miles n. n. e. of 
Franklin court-house in Georgia, and 45 w. of 
Cambridge. A post-office is kept at this court 
house.] 

PENE, a cape on the s. coast of the island of 
Newfoundland ; one of those which form the 
bay of Trespasses. 

PENEDO, a large settlement of the province 
and captainship of Perambuco in Brazil ; situate 
on the shore of the river Grande S. Francisco, 
19 miles from its entrance into the sea ; and 
here the Portuguese have the fort of S. Mauricio 
to defend the pass of the river. 

PENEHUE, or PENHUE, a settlement of In 
dians of the district of Boroa in the kingdom of 
Chile ; on the shore of the river Tolten. 

PENENIO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Quixos and Macas in the kingdom of 
Quito ; it enters the Putumayo just after its 
source. 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



[PENGUIN, an island in the Atlantic Ocean, 
about 10 miles w. e. of the coast of Newfoundland. 
It has this name from the multitude of birds of 
that name which frequent it. Lat. 50 5 X . n. 
Long. 50 30 X w. There is also an island of the 
same name, on the coast of Patagonia, in the S. 
Atlantic Ocean, three leagues s .e. of Port Desire. 
It is an uninhabited rock, high at the ends and 
low in the middle, and is the largest and outer 
most of a number of small isles or rocks, and is 
about a musket shot from the main land. It 
abounds in an extraordinary manner with pen 
guins and seals. It is three-fourths of a mile in 
length, and half a mile in breadth from e. to w.~] 

PENGUIN, some islands near the s. coast of 
Newfoundland, close to point Hune. 

PENIPE, a settlement of the province and 
corregimiento of Riobamba in the kingdom of 
Quito, near the river Achambo, which it has to 
the w. and to the n. the river of its name. It is of 
a small population, but delightful and healthy cli 
mate ; five leagues n. e. of Riobamba, and in lat. 
1 35 s. 

PENITENCIA, an island of the N. Sea, at 
the mouth of the river of Las Amazonas, between 
the coast of Guayana and the great island of 
Joanes or Marajo. 

PEN JAMO, a settlement and head settlement 
of the district of the ulcaldia mayor of the town 
of Leon in Nueva Espana, and province and 
bishopric of Mechoacan. It contains 58 families 
oflndians. 

PENJAMILLO, a settlement of the head 
settlement of the district and alcaldia mayor of 
Tlazasalca in Nueva Espana. It contains 10 
families of Spaniards and Mustees, and 63 of 
Indians, in some ranches (temporary habitations 
for labourers) in its district ; also 133 of Spa 
niards, Mustees, and Mulatoes, who trade in 
maize, French beans, and other seeds, which, 
together with some horse-cattle, are produced 
here in abundance, five leagues n. of its capital. 

PENNSYLVANIA, a province of N. Ame 
rica, one of those which compose the United 
States ; situate between New York to the n. 
New Jersey to the e. Virginia and Ohio to the w. 
and Maryland, Virginia, and Delaware to the s. 
It is about 265 miles long, and 158 wide ; between 
lat. 39 43 and 42 20 n. and long. 74 47 and 
80 37 X o>. This province is watered by several 
rivers, amongst the most considerable of which 
are the Delaware, Susquehannah, and Schuilkill. 
The first of these rises to the n. in the country of 
the Iroquees Indians, and of Bristol. The other 



two rivers have their origin in the same country, 
and are navigable to a greater extent, facilitating 
the internal commerce. This province is divided 
into the following counties : 

Philadelphia, Bucks, 

Northampton, York, 

Chester, Berks, 

Lancaster, Cumberland ; 

and the other part of the river Delaware into the 
counties of Newcastle, Kent, and Sussex. It was 
granted to the celebrated William Penn, son of 
the great admiral of the same name, in the time 
of the protector Cromwell and of king Charles 
II. of England, in 1680. It was first ceded to the 
admiral in reward for his services, but he dying, 
the son did not solicit the title, until the persecu 
tion of the Quakers in England had become 
general ; and he then set out for America, and 
bought this territory of the Indians at a very low 
rate. He afterwards entered into commercial 
dealings to a small extent with these natives, and 
impressed them with very favourable ideas of 
him ; and under such auspicious beginnings, he 
proceeded in peopling the country thus newly ac 
quired ; the disgust which the Quakers began to 
feel to their native home, and their consequent 
emigration, greatly conducing to this end. The 
territory was, to be sure, uncultivated, and the 
climate strange and unknown to them, but Penn 
did not cease to animate and increase his new 
colonists. He spent large sums of money in 
transporting and providing them with every 
necessary ; and, not aspiring to enrich himself 
suddenly, he sold at a fair price a piece of terri 
tory to each ; with the which, and by the letter of 
privilege which he gave them, he transformed 
the country from a forest into a garden. Thus 
it has been, and is, one of the most flourishing 
colonies of the New World, and where the name 
of Penn is held in grateful remembrance. 

The climate of Pennsylvania is very delightful, 
and the air soft and mild. The autumn begins 
here on the 20th of October, and lasts till the be 
ginning of December, when the winter commences. 
The cold and frosts are considerable, so that the 
river Delaware, although very wide, is frequently 
frozen, but the air is dry and healthy. The 
spring lasts from March till June, and then the 
weather is more fickle than at other times. The 
heat in the months of July, August, and Sep 
tember, is very great, but it is much mitigated by 
the cool refreshing breezes. The 5. w. wind 
lasts the greater part of the summer, and the n. 
and n. w. blow in the winter and spring ; and 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



these, passing 1 over the lakes which are frozen, 
and through the snowy mountains of Canada, 
are the cause of the coldness in those seasons. 

The soil is, in some parts, of a yellow or black 
sand, and in some of a kind of light earth, and in 
others of a clay, similar to that of the valleys in 
England ; and which is found here more particu 
larly near the sources of the shores of the rivers 
which irrigate the country. The land is fertile, 
rich, and easily cultivated, and the roots of the 
trees shoot down to a very small depth. 

Pennsylvania is watered by many rivers, and 
produces in the greatest abundance whatever con 
tributes to the convenience or luxury of life. In 
a word there is not a part of N. America so flour 
ishing, nor where, in a few years, the population 
has experienced so rapid an increase. In 1729 
no less than 6208 persons, four or five hundred of 
whom were Irish, came to establish themselves 
here ; and it is not wonderful that since the time of 
Penn, the value of lands has greatly risen. It 
contains 35,000 inhabitants, including the county 
of Delaware. There is no established religion ; 
and with the mixture of Germans, Swiss, Dutch 
and English, we find here, besides Catholics, 
Quakers, Calvinists, Lutherans, Methodists, 
Menists, Moravians, Independents, Anabaptists, 
and Shakers ; this being a sect of German origin, 
who live in religious society, and wear the habit 
of friars. Nor is it unworthy of our admiration 
to see how, in such a diversity of nations, tongues, 
and faiths, so great and universal harmony pre 
vails ; and notwithstanding that each is aware, 
in his own mind, of the other s error, and even 
some times endeavours to convince him of it, yet 
does not this even endanger, if not that Christian 
unity of faith, that religious fraternity which is 
observed to prevail. Again, the Quakers, the 
founders of this colony, have never been seen to 
exercise any conspicuous authority, save in the 
case of one William Keith, whom they seized and 
banished from the province as a disturber of the 
peace : but he, who was before a minister of the 
protestant church, turned Quaker, and then re 
turned to his former ministry, making such 
innovations with regard to the Quakers -creed 
as to have given rise to great domestic troubles. 
The fertility of this province is such as to 
afford naturally, and with very little cultivation, 
an infinite variety of trees, flowers, plants, and 
fruits. It also abounds greatly in cattle, and the 
rivers are stocked with fish. Before the distur 
bances with England, and the war which gave 
rise to its independence, 25 vessels were built 



here annually for the export of its productions, 
namely, skins, iron, fruits, &c. to the amount of 
750,000 ; and there were goods imported from 
England to the amount of 611,000. The 
capital is Philadelphia. 

[The revolution which affected the whole of the 
United States, seems to have been felt by none 
of them more strongly than Pennsylvania. The 
above information we believe to be a correct 
view of its situation at the time described by our 
author, but its whole political and physical ener 
gies have been within the last 30 years so com 
pletely enlarged, that we shall not fear entering 
into some degree of repetition by endeavouring 
to afford a true picture of its present state. 

Pennsylvania (except the purchase mentioned 
below) lies in the form of a parallelogram. The 
n. w. corner of this state, containing about 202,000 
acres, was lately purchased of Congress by this 
state. Pennsylvania at present contains 44,900 
square miles, and is divided into 23 counties, viz. 
Philadelphia, Northumberland, 

Chester, Franklin, 

Delaware, Bedford, 

Bucks, Huntingdon, 

Montgomery, Mifflin, 

Berks, Westmoreland, 

Lancaster, Somerset, 

Dauphin, Fayette, 

Northampton, Washington, 

Luzerne, Alleghany, 

York, Lycoming. 

Cumberland, 

These are subdivided into townships, not by 
any special law of the legislature, but on applica 
tion of a sufficient number of the citizens, in any 
neighbourhood, to the judges of the court of Com 
mon Pleas and general quarter sessions of the 
county. In each township the citizens have the 
privilege of assembling once a year, to choose two 
overseers of the poor, two assessors, a collector of 
taxes, two supervisors of the roads, and a consta 
ble. The number of inhabitants, according to 
the census of 1790, was 434,373, including 3737 
slaves, and by that of 1810, the total population 
amounted to 810,163 souls. But the emigration 
of foreigners has ever been, and continues to be, 
so considerable, that the number will always- be 
far greater than could be expected from the na 
tural increase of population. 

There are six considerable rivers, which, with 
their numerous branches, peninsulate the whole 
state, viz. The Delaware, Schuilkill, Susque- 
hannah, Youghiogany, Monongahela, andAlleg-] 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



[hany. The bay and river Delaware are naviga 
ble up to the Great or Lower Falls at Trenton, 
155 miles from the sea, and a ship of the line can 
ascend to Philadelphia, the metropolis, 120 miles 
from the sea, by the ship channel of the Del 
aware. 

A considerable part of the state may be called 
mountainous ; particularly the countries of Bed 
ford, Huntingdon, Cumberland, part of Franklin, 
Dauphin, and part of Bucks and Northampton, 
through which pass, under various names, the 
numerous ridges and spurs which collectively 
form the great range of Alleghany mountains. 
The principal ridges here are the Kittatinny, or 
Blue mountains, which pass n. of Nazareth in 
Northampton county, and pursue a s. w. course 
across the Lehigh, through Dauphin county, just 
above Harisburg, thence on the w. side of the 
Susquehannah, through Cumberland and Franklin 
counties. Back of these, and nearly parallel 
with them, are Peter s, Tuscarora, and Nescopek 
mountains, on the e. side of the Susquehannah ; 
and on the w. 9 Shareman s hills, Sideling hills, 
Ragged, Great Warriors, Evits and Wills moun 
tains ; then the great Alleghany ridge ; w. of this 
are the Chesnut ridges. Between the Juniatta 
and the w. branch of the Susquehannah are Jack s, 
Tussy s, Nitting, and Bald-Eagle mountains. 
The vales between these mountains are generally 
of a rich, black soil, suited to the various kinds 
of grain and grass. Some of the mountains will 
admit of cultivation almost to their tops. The 
other parts of the state are generally level, or 
agreeably variegated with hills and valleys. 

The soil of Pennsylvania is of various kinds ; 
in some parts it is barren, but a great proportion 
of the state is good land ; and no inconsiderable 
part of it is very good. The richest track that is 
settled, is Lancaster county, and the valley 
through Cumberland, York, and Franklin. The 
richest that is unsettled, is between Alleghany ri 
ver and lake Erie, in the n, w. part of the state, and 
in the country on the heads of the e. branches of 
the Alleghany. Pennsylvania includes the greater 
part of the kinds of trees, shrubs, and plants, that 
grow within the United States. Oaks, of several 
species, form the bulk of the wood. Hickory 
and walnut make a greater proportion than in 
the . tates. Sassafras, mulberry, tulip-tree, and 
cedar, are common, and grow to perfection. 
The magnolia glauca, or swamp-sassafras, are 
found in low grounds ; the twigs and roots are 
used both in bath and decoction for removing the 
rheumatism . The magnolia acuminata, or cucum 



ber-tree, grows very tall about the w. mountains. 
The magnolia tripetala, or umbrella-tree, is found 
in some parts 16 or 20 feet high. The bark is 
smooth, and the leaves sometimes exceed 12 or 
15 inches in length, and five or six in breadth, 
terminating in a point at each extremity. The 
leaves are placed at the ends of the branches, in 
a circular form, resembling an umbrella ; hence 
the name. The bark of the tulip-tree is esteemed 
a tolerable substitute for the Peruvian bark ; 
but the cornus Jlorida, or dog-wood, which is fre 
quent in the state, is preferred. Besides many 
other valuable trees and shrubs, are the several 
species of maple ; of these the scarlet-flowered 
and sugar maple are the most useful ; they are 
common in the n. and w. parts of the state, and 
are larger than the other species, growing from 
50 to 60 feet high, and yiela abundance of sap for 
the making of sugar. The ash-leaved tooth-ach 
tree, is found here and in Maryland. The bark 
and capsules have an acid taste, and are used in 
relieving the tooth-ach, whence it has got its 
name. The shrubby bithwort grows near Fort 
Pitt. It thrives in the shade, in a rich soil ; 
grows about 30 feet high, and sends off many 
twining branches. The roots have a lively 
aromatic taste, and are thought to have equal 
medicinal virtue to the small Virginia snake-root. 
The sambucus canadensis, or red-berried elder, is 
found here. Among the Indians it is called 
fever-bush ; and a decoction of its wood and 
buds is highly esteemed by them. Ct would be 
endless to describe the beautiful flowering shrubs, 
and useful as also ornamental plants in this state. 
Grapes of several sorts are common : the late 
kind, when mellowed by frost, make, with the 
addition of sugar, good wine. At present, the 
cultivation of the vine is much in vogue in Penn* 
sylvania, and good wine has been already made. 

Iron ore abounds in this state : copper, lead, 
and alum appear in some places. Lime-stone 
is common, as also several kinds of marble. In 
the middle and w. country is abundance of coal. 
At the head of the w. branch of Susquehannah 
is an extensive bed, which stretches over the 
country s. w. so as to be found in the greatest 
plenty about Pittsburg. There are also consider 
able bodies on the head waters of the Schuilkill 
and Lehigh ; and at Wyoming there is a bed 
open, which gives very intense heat. 

Useftil quadrupeds, in the new districts, are 
deer, in great numbers, beavers, otters, racoons, 
and martins. Buffaloes rarely cross the Ohio, 
and elks seldom advance from the n. Panthers,"] 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



[wild cats, bears, foxes, and wolves are not rare ; 
the last do most mischief, especially in the 
winter ; but the fur and skins of all are valuable. 
In the thick settlements, rabbits and squirrels are 
frequent ; also minks and musk-rats in marshes : 
partridges are yet numerous, though the late 
hard winters have destroyed many, and wild 
turkeys in the new settlements ; pheasants and 
grouse are become scarce ; pigeons, ducks, and 
wild geese are generally found in plenty in their 
proper seasons. Here are a great number of 
singing birds, as many migrate to the state from 
n. and s. in certain seasons. 

Trout are common in the rivulets, in length 
seldom above a foot. In the e. rivers, the prin 
cipal fish are rock and sheep s-head, with shad 
and herring, which in the spring come up from 
the sea in great shoals. These are not found in 
the w. waters, which are said to have their own 
valuable kinds, especially a species of cat-fish, 
weighing from 50 to 100 pounds ; yellow perch 
and pike are also in them mucl^ larger and more 
numerous. 

The s. side of Pennsylvania is the best settled 
throughout, owing entirely to the circumstance 
of the w. road having been run by the armies, 
prior to 1762, through the towns of Lancaster, 
Carlisle and Bedford, and thence to Pittsburg. 
For the purpose of turning the tide of settlers 
from this old channel into the unsettled parts of 
the state, the government and landed interest of 
Pennsylvania have been, and are still, busy in 
cutting convenient roads. During the summer 
of 1788, they laid out a road n. from the former 
roads beyond Bethlehem, to the n. portage 
between Delaware and Susquehannah ; and 
thence n. 80 w. to the mouth of the Tioga, the for 
mer 70 miles, and the latter above 60. It has 
been in contemplation to cut a road from Sun 
bury, at the forks of the e. and w. branches of 
Susquehannah, w. 150 miles, to the mouth of 
goby s Creek, which empties into the Alleghany 
from the e. but we are not enabled to say whether 
the plan may have taken effect. A road is also 
cut from the mouth of the Tioga, s. to the 
mouth of Loyal, which empties into the a;, branch 
of Susquehannah. Another road is cut from 
Huntingdon town, on Frank s town branch of 
the Juniatta, w. 30 miles to Conemagh, a navi 
gable branch of the Alleghany. A turnpike road 
has been lately completed from Philadelphia to 
Lancaster, which shortens the distance between 
these places eight miles ; and others are in con 
templation. From Swetara to the Tulpehoken 



branch of the Schnilkill, a canal and lock navi 
gation is undertaken, and the works commenced, 
by an incorporated company, whose capital is 
400,000 dollars. This leads" through the Schuil- 
kill to Philadelphia. By this means, it was pro 
posed to open a passage to Philadelphia from 
the Juniatta, the Tioga, and the e. and w. bran 
ches of the Susquehannah, which water at least 
15.000,000 of acres. From this junction, the 
general course of the Susquehannah is about s. e. 
until it falls into the head of Chesapeak Bay at 
Havre de Grace. See TIOGA RIVER. On the 
completion of the present plans, the state will be 
as conveniently intersected by roads as any other 
of its size in the Union, which will greatly faci 
litate the settlement of its new lands. A slight 
view of the map of Pennsylvania will best show 
how finely this state is situated for inland naviga 
tion. Nature has done so much for inland land- 
carriage, that although Philadelphia and lake 
Erie are distant from each other above 300 miles, 
there is no doubt but that the rivers of the state 
may be so improved, as to reduce the land car 
riage between them nine-tenths. In the same 
way the navigation to Pittsburg, after due im 
provement, may be used instead of land-carriage 
for the whole distance, except 23 miles. By 
these routes it is clear, that a large proportion of 
the foreign articles used on the w. waters must 
be transported, and their furs, skins, ginseng, 
hemp, flax, pot-ash, and other commodities 
brought to Philadelphia. 

Pennsylvania has the various kinds of grain, 
&c. common to the neighbouring states, but wheat 
is the principal grain of very general cultivation. 
In the year 1786, the exports of flour were 150,000 
barrels ; in 1789 369,618 barrels ; and much 
greater quantities in years since. 

The manufactures of this state are of numer 
ous kinds. Iron works are. of long standing, and 
their products increase in quantity, and improve 
in quality. The furnaces are 16, and the forges 
37. There are 18 rolling and slitting mills, 
which are said to cut and roll 150 tons a year. 
The forges will, it is thought, if properly con 
ducted, manufacture each 170 tons of bar iron a 
year-^total 6290 tons. Beside pigs cast at the 
furnaces, there are pots, kettles, pans, ovens, 
ladles, tongs, shovels, and irons, plough-irons, 
spades, hoes> sheet-iron, hoops ; iron and steel 
work for pleasure and working carriages, nails, 
bolts, spikes ; various iron-work for ships, mills 
and buildings, cannon-balls, and some muskets ; 
scythes, sickles, axes, drawing-knives, some saws] 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



j and planes, and other tools. The other extensive 
manufactures are numerous, viz. those of leather, 
skins and fur, wood, paper, gunpowder, bricks, 
earthen-ware, copper, lead, tin-wares, pewter, 
cotton, sugar, molasses, tobacco, &c. &c. There 
are 52 paper-mills in the state ; and their annual 
product is computed at 25,000 dollars. Since 
the year 1770, 25 gunpowder mills have been 
erected. There are about 300,000 wool and fur 
hats manufactured annually in the state ; nearly 
one half of which are of fur. In the manufacture 
of iron, paper, pleasure carriages, and cabinet 
work, Pennsylvania exceeds not only New York, 
but all her sister states. Much cotton is worked 
up in families ; and imported linen is now printed, 
in an increasing degree. The manufactures of 
Pennsylvania have greatly increased within a few 
years, as well by master workmen and journey 
men from abroad, as by the skill and industry of 
the natives. Some persons have begun to press 
oil from hickory nuts. The Messrs. Marshalls 
of Philadelphia have commenced the making of 
Glauber s salt, sal ammoniac, and volatile salts ; 
they already supply the whole Union with the 
first article, and export a part of the others. A 
mill of Rumsay s (the improvement of Barker s) 
near that city, grinds, by water, flour, chocolate, 
snufY, hair-powder, and mustard ; shells choco 
late nuts ; presses tobacco for chewing and 
smoaking ; and bolts meal. The water-works 
near the falls of Trenton, which grind grain, roll 
and slit iron, and pound plaster of Paris, ex 
hibit great mechanism. Card manufactories are 
lately set up. The hand machines for carding 
and spinning cotton have been introduced and 
improved. Sir Richard Arkwright s famous 
water-mill for spinning cotton yarn has been ob 
tained ; also the machinery to sliver, rove, and 
spin flax and hemp into thread, fit for linen of 30 
cuts to the pound ; which will also serve for the 
roving and spinning combed wool into worsted 
varn. Screws for paper-mills are now cut from 
solid cast iron. Lanterns for light-houses are 
made by Mr. Wheeler of Philadelphia ; who 
also executes work for sugar-mills in the W. 
Indies : during the war he made cannon from 
wrought iron. 

The commerce of Pennsylvania with the e. and 
s. states is, in great part, an exchange of staple 
commodities. Wheat flour and bar-iron are ex 
ported to New England for whale oil and bone, 
spermaceti, seal-skins, mackerel, cod fish, and sal 
mon ; to Rhode Island and Connecticut, cheese ; 
to S. Carolina and Georgia for live-oak, cedar, 

VOL. IY. 



cotton, rice, and indigo; to N. Carolina for tar, 
pitch, turpentine, and lumber. Much of the 
trade with the S. states arises from the superiority 
of Pennsylvania in manufactures and commerce. 
Great quantities of deer-skins, with those of 
otters, racoons, foxes, musk-rats, and beavers, 
are imported from the back country. Virginia 
sends a great deal of wheat and unmanufactured 
tobacco. In return, she receives many articles of 
clothing, furniture, farming utensils, equipage; 
some E. India and European goods ; and even 
W. India produce ; of all these, more or less, 
according to the local improvement and situation. 
Hats, saddlery, shoes, Windsor chairs, carriages, 
hewn stones, iron castings for domestic use, 
wheel tire, spades, hoes, axes, paper, books, tin 
ware, and brushes, constitute a great proportion 
of the exports to the s-. Numerous droves of 
lean cattle come from the w. parts of these states, 
where they have a wide range, but want mea 
dow. Virginia sends of late a considerable deal 
of coal, some lead, and peach brandy. This 
liquor also comes from Maryland ; but from both 
in quantity very small, considering the profit, 
and the facility of raising the fruit. The e. shore 
of Maryland sends to Philadelphia considerable 
quantities of wheat and Indian corn : from the 
w. comes the kite-foot tobacco. This state has 
also some trade with the s. of Pennsylvania, by 
the way of Chesapeak Bay ; some parts of it 
receive the same commodities as Virginia, espe 
cially pleasure carriages. The trade with New 
York depends chiefly on the fluctuation of the 
market ; American and foreign goods, of the 
same kinds, are carried between the two capital 
cities, as their prices fall and rise. Albany peas 
and craw-fish are, however, articles in regular 
demand from New York. Great part of New 
Jersey and Delaware state have, as neighbours, 
much intercourse with Pennsylvania. The first 
supports in a great measure the market of Phila 
delphia, furnishes rye-meal, much Indian corn 
and lumber, and some iron bloomery : the other 
sends great quantities of excellent flour from 
the mills of Brandy wine, lumber from the district 
on the bay, and fat cattle from the pastures ad 
joining Delaware. Many of these, and of those 
fattened in the vicinity of Philadelphia, are 
brought from the s. ; and also from the countries 
on the n. and Connecticut Rivers, as far as Ver 
mont and Massachusetts. 

The commerce of Pennsylvania, in the w* is by 
the Ohio with the Spanish, and by the lakes with 
the British, dominions ; and both ways with the] 



98 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



[Indian tribes. This trade mil probably be 
considerable, since commercial stipulations are 
formed with those powers, and peace is concluded 
with the Indians. At present nearly the whole 
foreign commerce is carried on by the port of Phi 
ladelphia. Its distance from the sea, and its 
closing by ice in the winter, are disadvantageous ; 
but the first is lessened by improved pilotage ; 
the other by the construction of the piers below, 
and by the occasional thaws which permit vessels 
to clear their way during the winter. In com 
mon seasons the navigation is obstructed six 
weeks ; a shorter period is as probable as a 
longer ; though, in the late hard winters, loads 
of wood have passed the river, near the city, in 
the first days of March. 

The population of this state has been already 
mentioned ; it is nearly 20 for every square 
mile. The number of militia is estimated at 
upwards of 90,000, between 18 and 53 years of 
age. The inhabitants are principally the de 
scendants of English, Irish, and Germans, with 
some Scotch, Welsh, Swedes, and a few Dutch. 
There are also many of the Irish and Germans 
who emigrated when young or middle aged. 
The Friends and Episcopalians are chiefly of 
English extraction, and compose about one-third 
of the inhabitants. They live chiefly in the me 
tropolis, and in the counties of Chester, Phila 
delphia, Bucks, and Montgomery. The Irish arc 
mostly Presbyterians, but some are Roman Ca 
tholics : their ancestors came from the n. of 
Ireland, which was latterly settled from Scotland; 
hence they have been sometimes called Scotch 
Irish, to denote their double descent. They in 
habit the w. and frontier countries, and are nu 
merous. The Germans composed about one 
quarter of the inhabitants of Pennsylvania. They 
are most numerous in the n. parts of the metro 
polis, and the counties of Philadelphia, Montgo 
mery, Bucks, Dauphin, Lancaster, York, and Nor 
thampton ; mostly in the four last, and are spread 
ing in other parts. They consist of Lutherans 
(who are the most numerous sect), Calvinists, or 
Reformed Church, Moravians, Roman Catholics, 
Mennonists, Tunkers, and Zwingfelters, who are 
a species of Quakers. These are all distin 
guished for their temperance, industry, and 
economy. The Baptists, except the Mennonists 
and Tunker Baptists, who are Germans, are 
chiefly descended of emigrants from Wales, and 
are not numerous. A proportionate assemblage 
of the national prejudices, the manners, customs, 
religions, and political sentiments of all these, 
will form the Pennsylvanian character. 



The number of congregations in the state is as 
follows : Presbyterians, 86 ; German Calvinists, 
84 ; nearly 84 of German Lutherans ; Friends or 
Quakers, 54 ; Episcopalians, 26 ; Baptists, 15 ; 
Roman Catholics, 11; Scotch Presbyterians, 8 ; 
Moravians, 8 ; Free Quakers, 1 ; Universalists, 
1 ; Covenanters, 1 ; Methodists, 3 or 4 ; and a 
Jewish Synagogue ; the whole amounting to 
384. The literary, humane, and other useful 
societies, are more numerous and flourishing in 
Pennsylvania than in any of the 16 states. The 
seminaries of learning are respectable. There is 
an university at Philadelphia, and colleges at 
Carlisle and Lancaster. The Episcopalians have 
an academy at Yorktown in York county. There 
are also academies at Germantown, at Pittsburg-, 
at Washington, at Allen s-Town, and other 
places ; these are endowed by donations from 
the legislature, and by liberal contributions of in 
dividuals. The legislature have also reserved 
60,000 acres of the public lands for the public 
schools. The United Brethren, or Moravians, 
have academies at Bethlehem and Nazareth, on 
the best establishment of any schools perhaps in 
America. Besides Philadelphia, the metropolis, 
the chief towns are Lancaster, the largest inland 
town of the United States, Carlisle, Pittsburg, 
Sunbury, Bethlehem, Reading, Yorktown, Har- 
risburg, Washington, &c. 

The first frame of government for Pennsylvania 
is dated in 1682. By this form, all legislative 
powers were vested in the governor and free 
men of the province, in the provincial council, 
and a general assembly. The council was to 
consist of 72 members, chosen by the freemen ; 
of which the governor, or his deputy, was per 
petual president, with a treble vote. One third 
of this council went out of office every year, and 
their seats were supplied by new elections. 

The general assembly was at first to consist 
of all the freemen, afterwards of 200, and never 
to exceed 500. 

In 1683 Mr. Penn offered another frame of 
government, in which the number of represen 
tatives was reduced, and the governor vested with 
a negative upon all bills passed in assembly. By 
several specious arguments the people were per 
suaded to accept this frame of government. 

Not long after, a dispute between Mr. Penn 
and Lord Baltimore required the former to go to 
England, and he committed the administration of 
government to five commissioners taken from the 
council. In 1686 Mr. Penn required the com 
missioners to dissolve the frame of government ; 
but not being able to effect his purpose, he, inj 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



("1688, appointed Captain John Blackwell his de 
puty. From this period the proprietors usually 
resided in England, and administered the govern 
ment by deputies, who were devoted to their 
interest. Jealousies arose between the people 
and their governors, which never ceased till the 
late revolution. The primary cause of these jea 
lousies was an attempt of the proprietary to ex 
tend his own power, and abridge that of the 
assembly ; and the consequence was, incessant 
disputes and dissensions in the legislature. 

In 1689, Governor Blackwell, finding himself 
opposed in his views, had recourse to artifice, 
and prevailed on certain members of the council 
to withdraw themselves from the house ; thus 
defeating the measures of the legislature. Two 
instances of a secession of members from the 
assembly, with similar views, have taken place 
since the revolution, and seem to have been 
copied from the example in 1689. 

In 1693, the king and queen assumed the 
government into their own hands. Colonel 
Fletcher was appointed governor of New York 
and Pennsylvania by one and the same commis 
sion, with equal powers in both provinces. By 
this commission, the number of counsellors in 
Pennsylvania was reduced. 

Under the administration of Governor Mark- 
ham in 1696, a new form of government was 
established in Pennsylvania. The election of the 
council and assembly now became annual, and 
the legislature, with their powers and forms of 
proceeding, was new modelled. 

In 1699, the proprietary arrived from England, 
and assumed the reins of government. While he 
remained in Pennsylvania, the last charter of 
privileges, or frame of government, which con 
tinued till the revolution, was agreed upon and 
established. This was completed and delivered 
to the people by the proprietary, October 28, 
1701, just on his embarking for England. The 
inhabitants of the Territory, as it was then called, 
or the lower counties, refused to accept this 
charter, and thus separated themselves from the 
province of Pennsylvania. They afterwards had 
their own assembly, in which the governor of 
Pennsylvania used to preside. 

In September 1700, the Susquehannah Indians 
granted to Mr. Penn all their lands on both sides 
the river. The Susquehannah, Shawanese, and 
Patomak Indians, however, entered into articles 
of agreement with Mr. Penn, by which, on 
certain conditions of peaceable and friendly be 
haviour, they were permitted to settle about the 



head of Patomak, in the province of Pennsylvania. 
The Conostoga chiefs also in 1701 ratified the 
grant of the Susquehannah Indians made the 
preceding year. 

In 1708, Mr. Penn obtained from the Sachems 
of the country, a confirmation of the grants made 
by former Indians, of all the lands from Duck 
Creek to the mountains, and from the Delaware 
to the Susquehannah. In this deed, the Sachems 
declared that " they had seen and heard read 
divers prior deeds, which had been given to Mr. 
Penn by former chiefs." 

While Mr. Penn was in America, he erected 
Philadelphia into a corporation. The charter 
was dated October 25, 1701, by which the police 
of the city was vested in a mayor, recorder, alder 
men, and common council, with power to inquire 
into treasons, murders, and other felonies ; and 
to inquire into and punish smaller crimes. The 
corporation had also extensive civil jurisdiction ; 
but it was dissolved at the late revolution, and 
Philadelphia was governed like other counties in 
the state, till 1789, when it was again incorpo 
rated. 

By the favourable terms which Mr. Penn 
offered to settlers, and an unlimited toleration of 
all religious denominations, the population of the 
province was extremely rapid. Notwithstanding 
the attempts of the proprietary or his governors 
to extend his own power, and accumulate pro 
perty by procuring grants from the people, and 
exempting his lands from taxation, the govern 
ment was generally mild, and the burdens of the 
people by no means oppressive. The selfish 
designs of the proprietaries were vigorously and 
constantly opposed by the assembly, whose 
firmness preserved the charter rights of the pro 
vince. 

At the revolution, the government was abo 
lished. The proprietaries were absent, and the 
people, by their representatives, formed a new 
constitution on republican principles. The pro 
prietaries were excluded from all share in the 
government, and the legislature offered them 
130,000 in lieu of all quit-rents, which was 
finally accepted. The proprietaries, however, 
still possess in Pennsylvania many large tracts of 
excellent land. 

It is to be regretted, that among all the able 
writers in this important state, none has yet 
gratified the public with its interesting histoiy. 

The present constitution of this state was ra 
tified June 12th, 1792. A convention, to amend 
the constitution, may be called where the ma-] 






V^rri^tfl^ 



PENNSYLVANIA. 



Hority of the people shall signify their wish for it. 
The expense of the government of this state 
amounts to ^22,280 annually. For an account 



of Exports and Imports of the state, see PHI 

LADELPHIA.] 



A LIST of the several PROPRIETORS, GOVERNORS, LIEUTENANT-GOVERNORS, and PRESIDENTS 
of the PROVINCE, with the times of their respective Administration. 

Proprietors. 

The Honourable William Penn, born 1644, died 1718. 
f Thomas Penn, and 
1 Richard Penn, died 1771. 

f John Penn, sen. and 
( John Penn, jun. 



Lieutenant Governor, 

Pesident, 

Deputy Lieutenant Gov. 
President and Gouncil, - 
Deputy Governor, - - 
Lieutenant Governor, - 
Lieutenant Governor, - 
Deputy Lieutenant Gov. 
President and Council, -- 
Deputy Lieutenant Gov. 



President, - - - - 
Deputy Lieutenant Gov. 



Governors, < 

William Penn, Proprietor, 

Thomas Lloyd, - - - 

John Blackwell, - - - 

governed, 

Benjamin Fletcher, - - 
William Markham, 
William Penn, Proprietor, 
Andrew Hamilton, 

governed, - - - - - 
John Evans, ----- 

Charles Gookin, - - - 

Sir William Keith, Bart. - 

Patrick Gordon, - - - 

George Thomas, - - - 

Anthony Palmer, - - - 

James Hamilton, - - - 

Robert Hunter Morris, - 

William Denny, - - - 

James Hamilton, - - 

John Penn, - - - - - 

President, .... James Hamilton, - - ^ 

Lieutenant Gov. - - - Richard Penn, - * - - 

( Thomas Wharton, - - - 

President of the Supreme! Joseph Reed, - - - - 

Executive Council of) William Moore, - - - 

the state of Pennsyl- ] John Dickinson, - - 

"vania, f Benjamin Franklin, ^ - * 

^Thomas Mifflin, - - - 

Governor, Thomas Mifflin, - - - 

[PENN Fort, stands at the mouth of a small 
creek, on the w. side of Delaware river, in North 
ampton county, about 20 miles n. of the town of 
Easton, and near 65 n. of Philadelphia. Lat. 



from October 1682, to August 1684 
from August 1684, to December 1688 
from December 1688, to February 1689-90 
from February 1689-90, to April 26, 1693 
from 26 April 1693, to 3 June 1693 
from 3 June 1693, to December 1699 
from 3 December 1699, to 1 November 1701 
from 1 November 1701, to February 1702-3 
from February 1702-3, to February 1703-4 
from February 1703-4, to February 1708-9 
from March 1708-9, to February 1717 
from March 1717, to June 1726 
from June 1726, to June 1736 
from June 1738, to June 1747 
from June 1747, to June 1748 
from June 1748, to October 1754 
from October 1754, to 19 August 1756 
from 19 August 1756, to 17 November 1759 
from 17 November 1759, to 21 October 1763 
from 31 October 1733, to 6 May 1771 
from 6 May 1771, to 16 October 1771 
from 16 October 1771 
from March 1777, to April 1778 
from October 1778, to October 1781 
from November 1781, to November 1782 
from November 1782, to October 1785 
from October 1785, to October 1788 
from October 1788 to October 1790 
from October 1790.] 



40 59 . n. long. 75 12 w. The road from Phi 
ladelphia to Tioga Point passes through the 
opening in the Blue Mountains, called Wind Gap, 
about nine miles s. w, of this fort.] 



PEN 

{PENN, Port, in Newcastle county, Delaware, 
is situated on the w. bank of Delaware river, op 
posite to Reedy Island.] 

{TENN S, a township of Pennsylvania, on Sus- 
quehannah river. See Northumberland.] 

[PENN S Neck, in Salem county, New Jersey, 
lies on Old Man s Creek, which is part of the 
boundary between Salem and Gloucester coun 
ties. It is 12 miles n. e. by n. of Salem, 3y miles 
from the Delaware, and five below Swedesbo- 
rough.] 

[PENN S Neck, the name of a range of farms 
of excellent soil, situated about 1| miles s. e. of 
Princeton in New Jersey, on a point of land 
formed by Millstone river and stony brook. It 
derived its name from the celebrated legislator, 
William Penn, who formerly owned this tract.] 

[PENN S Rocks, three clusters of islands in 
the broadest and s. w. part of Hudson s Bay, N. 
America ; distinguished by the names of E. W. 
and Middle Penns.] 

[PENNINGTON, or PENN YTOWN, a pleasant 
and flourishing village in Hunterdon county, 
New Jersey, six miles w. of Princeton, and 27 
-n. e. by n. of Philadelphia. It contains a church 
for public worship, and about 40 houses.] 

[PENNSBOROUGH, E. and W. two town- 
ships in Cumberland county, Pennsylvania. 
There is also a township of this name in Chester 
county, Pennsylvania.] 

[P&NNSBURY, a small town of Pennsylva 
nia, in Buck s county, on a small creek of Dela 
ware river. It was a manor which the celebrated 
Mr. Penn reserved for himself. Here he built a 
house, and planted gardens and orchards ; which, 
with many additional buildings and improve 
ments, still continue.] 

PENNYCOOK, a river of the province of 
Hampshire, one of the four of New England. 
It rises in the White Mountain, runs s. then turns 
. and enters the sea opposite the bank of Jeffrey. 

[PENNYTOWN. See PENNINGTON.] 

PENOBSCOT, or PENTAGUET, a river of 
the province of Sagadahock in N. America ; it 
rises from various lakes, runs s. w. and enters 
the sea in the bay of its name. 

[The noble river which empties its waters into 
that bay, is the most considerable in the district 
of Maine, and rises by two branches in the high 
lands. The e. branch passes through several 
smaller lakes. From the Forks, as they are 
called, the Penobscot Indians pass to Canada, up 
either branch, principally the w. the source of 
which, they say, is not more than 20 miles from 



PEN 



101 



the waters which empty into the St. Lawrence. 
At the Forks is a remarkable high mountain : 
from thence down to Indian Old Town, situated 
on an island in this river, is about 60 miles (that 
is to say, by water), 40 of which the water flows 
in a still smooth stream, and in the whole dis 
tance there are no falls to interrupt the passage 
of boats : in this distance the river widens, and 
embraces a great number of islands. About 60 
rods below Indian Old Town are the Great Falls, 
where is a carrying-place of about 20 rods ; 
thence 12 miles to the head of the tide there are 
no falls to obstruct boats. Vessels of 30 tons 
come within a mile of the head of the tide. 
Thence 35 miles to the head of the bay, to the 
scite of Old Fort Povvnal, the river flows in a 
pretty straight course, and is easily navigated. 
Passing by Majabagaduse on the e. 7 miles, and 
Owl s Head 20 miles further, on the w. you en 
ter the ocean. It is high water here, at full and 
change, 43 minutes past 10. At the entrance of 
the river is 10 fathoms water. The Indians have 
a communication from this river to Scoodick ri 
ver by a portage of three miles. This river was 
the w. limits of Nova Scotia or Acadia, by the 
treaty of Utrecht.] 

PENOBSCOT. This bay is large, handsome, and 
convenient, and full of islands. [It lies on the 
coast of Hancock county, district of Maine, and 
was called Norombega by the first discoverer; is 
about 16 leagues wide from Naskeag Point and 
Burnt Coal Island, on the e. to the point near 
Musket s Island, on the w. side of the bay. The 
chief islands it encloses are Fox, Haut, Long, 
and Deer Islands, besides a number of small 
isles, rocks, and ledges. Through this bay to 
the mouth of the river of its name, the to. channel 
goes up by a head-land on the zv. called Owl s 
Head, and between Long^ Island on the w. and 
Cape Rosier on the e. to Bagaduce Point. The 
e. channel is between Haut Island on the w. and 
Burnt Coal Island on the e. and through a reach, 
called Long Reach, formed by the shores of 
Naskeag, or Sedwick, on the c. or n. e. and Deer 
Islands on the w. or s. w. till it unites with the 
other channel, between Point Rosier and Long 
Island. On a fine peninsula on the e. side of 
the bay the British built a fort, and made a set 
tlement, which is now the shire-town of the 
county of Hancock, and is a commodious place 
for the lumber trade. Haut Island, or Isle of 
Holt, lies in lat. 44 n. and long. 68 28 / w. and 
is the southernmost of the large isles.] 

[PENOBSCOT, a post-town of the district of 



102 



PEN 



PEN 



Maine, on the e. side of the bay of its name, situ 
ated in lat. 44 27 n. eight miles n. by w. of Blue 
Hill, 88 n. e. of Portland, 169 n. by e. of Boston, 
and 402 from Philadelphia. It is a port of en 
try, and carries on a small trade in fish and lum 
ber. The exports in 1794, ending- September 30, 
amounted to 5825 dollars. This township con 
tained, in 1790, 1048 inhabitants. In February, 
1796, it was divided into two towns ; the one re 
taining the name Penobscot ; the other, named 
Castine, was made the shire-town, is a port of 
entry, and contains the post-office.] 

fPENOBscox, a small tribe of Indians who live 
in Indian Old Town, on an island in Penobscot 
River. They aver, that they have possessed the 
island, on which their town stands, 500 years. 
It stands just above the Great Falls, and con 
sists of about 200 acres of land. See INDIAN 
OLD TOWN. In a former war this tribe lost their 
lands ; but at the commencement of the last war, 
the Provincial Congress forbad any person set 
tling on the lands from the head of the tide on 
Penobscot river, included in lines drawn six 
miles from the river on each side ; that is, a tract 
12 miles wide, intersected by the middle of the 
river. They, however, consider that they have 
a right to hunt and fish as far as the mouth of 
the Bay of Penobscot extends. This was their 
original right, in opposition to any other tribe, 
and they now occupy it.] 

PENOL, a city of Nuevo Mexico in N. Ame 
rica ; founded by the Indians in a situation so 
strong and singular, as to be without its equal. 
It formerly had 2000 houses so strong and large, 
that they were said to be inhabited by upwards 
of 7000 inhabitants. It stands in the middle of 
some extensive llanuras^ which extend upwards 
of 15 leagues in length, on the top of a rock, 
from whence it takes its name, and which is of 
such an extraordinary height as to be reckoned 
at a thousand fathoms, and is a league in length, 
entirely of rock, and with no other ascent than 
what is artificial, and where one person only can 
pass at a time, with some niches that one may 
retire should two happen to meet. At the top 
are several cisterns for catching water, and be 
low, in the plain, are the crops of corn and seeds. 

PENOL DEL MARQUES, an island of the lake 
of Mexico, situate in the middle of the lake, 
and s. of the capital. Here is a mountain, on 
which Herman Cortes, Marquis del Valle, or 
dered some baths to be constructed. 

PENOLES, an alcaldia mayor of the province 
nnd bishopric of Oaxaca, in the Nueva Espana. 



The whole of its territory is rough, cold, moun 
tainous, and barren ; so much so, that the na 
tives have no other commerce, save that of which 
arises from a little maize, and the cutting of tim 
ber in its serraniaS) which are covered with large 
firs and other trees, by which the neighbouring 
provinces are supplied. This consists, besides 
the capital, which is Ixquintepec, of the follow- 



S. Pedro Chilapa, 
S. Mateo Tepautepec, 
S. Pedro Totoma- 
chapa. 



ing settlements : 

S. Juan Elotepec, 

Santa Maria Hui tepee, 

Santiago Gajo otipac, 

Sta. Catarina Estella, 

Santiago Ilazoyaltepec, 

PENOLES, an unpeopled track of the province 
of Tepeguana and kingdom of Nueva Vizcava, 
in the direct road to the garrisons. At the dis 
tance of eight leagues to the n. w. is an estate 
called Sarca, very abundant in fowl and cattle ; 
23 leagues from the garrison and settlement of 
Mapimi. 

PENON, a settlement of the province and 
government of Cartagena in the Nuevo Reyno 
de Granada : situate on the shore of the river 
Grande de la Magdalena, opposite the mouth of 
the river Cesare. 

PENON, another settlement of the province 
and government of Venezuela, in the same king 
dom as the former ; on the coast near the port of 
Cabello. 

PENONES SIETE, a settlement of the pro 
vince and government of Antioquia in the Nuevo 
Reyno de Granada, on the shore of the river 
Grande de la Magdalena. 

PENONOME, a settlement of the district and 
alcaldia mayor of Nata in the province and king 
dom of Tierra Firme; thus called from the name 
of a cacique, the master of that district. It is 
situate in a pleasant valley surrounded bv moun 
tains, and on the shore of the river Sara{i, which 
renders it fertile and delightful, abounding in 
maize, plantains, pulse, pigs, and tame fowl ; 
with all of which it supplies the city of Panama, 
the capital of the kingdom ; from whence it lies 
62 miles to the w, s. w. in lat. 8 42 n. 

PENONOME, a river of this province and kino-- 
dom, which rises in the mountains of the s. part, 
and, running n. enters the Cocle. Here there is 
nearly a communication between the N. and S. 
Seas, an isthmus of five leagues only inter 
vening ; and it was by this part that the contra 
band traders passed with their effects that they 
had bought of some foreigners in the N. Sea, and 
at the mouth of the Cocle. 



PEP 

PENSBURY. See PENNSBURY. 

[PENSACOLA, Harbour and Town. The 
harbour is on then, shore of the Gulf of Mexico, 
11 leagues e. of Port Lewis and Mobile. It is 
large, safe from all winds, and has four fathoms 
water at its entrance, deepening gradually to 
seven or eight. The bar lies in lat. 30 15 . 
and long. 87 14 w. The town of Pensacola, the 
capital of W. Florida, lies along the beach of 
the bay, is of an oblong form, about a mile in 
length, and a quarter of a mile in breadth. It 
contains several hundred habitations, and many 
of the public buildings and houses are spacious 
and elegant. The governor s palace is a large 
stone building, ornamented w ith a tower, built 
by the Spaniards. It is defended by a small fort, 
called St. Mary de Galve. The exports from 
this town, consisting of skins, logwood, dying- 
stufF, and silver dollars, amounted, while in the 
possession of the British, to ^63,000 annually. 
The average value of imports, for three years, 
from Great Britain, was 97,000. The town 
and fort of Pensacola surrendered to the arms of 
Spain in the year 1781, and with them the whole 
province. Escambria river, or Shambe, is the 
large stream which falls into Pensacola Bay. It 
admits shallops some miles up, and boats up 
wards of 50 miles.] 

PENTAGUET. See PENOBSCOT. 

[PENTECOST, an island in the Archipelago 
of the Great Cyclades, which see. It was dis 
covered by Bougainville, May 22, 1768, and 
named from the day, being the day of Pentecost. 
It is two leagues distant from Aurora Island, 
which is in lat. 15 8 $. and long. 165 58 e. from 
Paris.] 

PENTECOSTE, a river of the island St. 
Christopher, one of the Antilles ; it runs from 
. to s. and served as the limits on the coast of 
this rhumb, when the island was divided between 
the English and the French. It enters the sea 
between the point of Palmistes and the bay of 
Marigot. 

PENTUSOK, a city of the county of Hamp 
shire, in the province of Massachusetts of N. 
America, in the most w. part of the province ; 
on the arm of the river Housotouk, w r hich enters 
the strait of Long Island. 

[PENUCO, a province of Mexico ; separated 
from that of Angelos, or Tlascala, on the n. by 
Tuspa river.] 

PEOMO, a settlement of the province and 
corregimicnto of Rancagua, in the kingdom of 
Chile. 

[PEPCHIDIACHICH, a point or head-land, 



P E Q 



103 



on the s. shore of the Great Bay of Chaleurs 
near the n. e. extremity of the province of New 
Brunswick. It is also called Pepchidichi, and 
lies w. s. w. of Port David.] 

PEPETA, ESTERO DE, a lake in the same pro 
vince and kingdom as the former settlement, 
near the town of Alhuc. 

PEPIN, a lake of the province and govern 
ment of Louisiana, formed from the river Santa 
Cruz, before this enters the Mississippi. 

[PEPIN, a lake, or rather a dilatation of the 
river Mississippi, near where it receives the river 
Chippeway from the w. e. in lat. 43 43 n. and 
long. 91 48 w. below the Falls of St. Anthonv.] 

PEPIRI-GUAZU, a river of the province 
and government of Paraguay, which runs 5. and 
enters the Uruguay. 

PEPIRI-MINI, a river of the same province 
and government as the former, which runs s. s. w. 
and enters also the Uruguay. 

[PEPPERELL, a township of Massachusetts, 
on the e. branch of Nashaway river, and on the 
n. line of Middlesex county. It joins Groton on 
the s. e. and is 40 miles n. by w. of Boston. It 
was incorporated in 1753, and contains 1132 in 
habitants.*] 

[PEPPERELBORqUGH,atownshipinYork 
county, district of Maine, on the n. e. side of 
Saco river, near the mouth, and which separates 
it from Biddeford to the s. It is about 12 miles 
s. w. of Portland, and 80 n. of Boston. It was 
incorporated in 1772, and contains 1352 inhabi 
tants.] 

[PEPSIGUIACH Point, on the n. side of 
Chaleur Bay, now called Paspibiac Point, is about 
three leagues w. n. w. of East Nouville. It is a 
barren plain that is nearly a league in length. 
A very extensive fishery is carried on here, for 
such a small place.] 

[PEPSIGUIACHE, now called New Carlisle, 
is about three leagues from Paspibiac, on the n. 
side of Chaleur Bay.] 

[PEPY S Islands, the same with Falkland 
Islands. Pepy s Island, described in Commodore 
Anson s voyage, lies in lat. 47 s. eight leagues e. 
of Cape Blanco, on the coast of Patagonia, and 
was discovered by Captain Cowley in 1680, who 
represents it to be commodious for taking in 
wood and water, and provided with a harbour 
capable of holding 1000 sail of ships; abounding 
with fowls, and promising great plenty offish.] 

[PEQUANACK, a township of Morris county, 
New Jersev ; perhaps the same as in some maps 
is called regunnock, which is separated from 
Bergen county northward by Pegunnock river.] 



104 



P E Q 



[PEQUANNOCK Point and River. The ri 
ver is a small stream which runs s. through the 
towns of Huntington and Stratford, in Fairfield 
county, Connecticut, and empties into a bay in 
the Sound where vessels may anchor. The point 
forms the w. extremity of the bay, near which 
are some rocks ; from thence the outer bar ex 
tends n. by n. e. The point is five miles s. w. of 
Stratford River.] 

PEQUE, a small river of the province of 
Pennsylvania in N. America, which runs s. w. and 
enters the Susquehannah. 

PEQUENA, a bay on the e. coast of the island 
Jamaica, between those of Manchancel and Larga. 

PEQUENCHES, a barbarous nation of In 
dians of the kingdom of Chile, who dwell in the 
mountains of the Andes to the e. of the city of 
La Concepcion : it is ve/y numerous, robust, and 
warlike, but cruel and treacherous. It has been 
at various times attempted to reduce some of 
these Indians to the Catholic faith, and to a civi 
lized life, but always in vain. 

PEQUENI, an abundant river of the province 
and government of Tierra Firme in the kingdom 
of this name. It rises in the mountains of Man- 
dinga, near the point of S. Bias, and runs w. for 
many leagues till it enters the Chagre, increas 
ing its stream by several smaller rivers. 

PEQUENI, a small settlement of this province 
and kingdom, on the shore of the former river. 

PEQUENO, a river of the island of St. Do 
mingo, in the part possessed by the French ; it 
enters the sea on the n. coast, near the town of 
Leogan, between this town and the river Grande ; 
this name being given to the river to distinguish 
it from that of which we are treating. 

PEQUENO, another river, in the province and 
captainship of S. Vicente in Brazil ; it runs s. s. w. 
and enters the sea in the channel formed by the 
island of Nuestra Senora. 

PEQUENO, another river, of the province and 
captainship of Los Ilhers in the same kingdom ; 
it runs s. and enters the Tucombira. 

PEQUENO, a port of the French in the island 
St. Domingo, in the part which they possess on 
the s. coast, between the Bay of Peur aud the 
Trou Sal ado. 

PEQUERI, or ITAZU, a river of the province 
of Gaira, in the government of Paraguay; which 
runs w. for many leagues, and enters the Parana, 
in the part where it gives the great fall. 

PEQUI, a settlement of the province and go 
vernment of Antioquia, in the Nuevo Reyno de 
Granada. 

PEQUICAS, a barbarous nation of Indians 



PER 

of Peru, who dwell e. of the nation of the Chi- 
quitos, and w. of the river Paraguay : it is very 
numerous, and began to be reduced to the faith 
in 1701. 

PEQUIMA, a district and jurisdiction of the 
province and colony of Virginia, on the shore of 
the strait of Albemarle. 

PEQUIN, a small river of the province and 
government of Paraguay ; which rises in some 
mountains bounding the kingdom of Brazil, be 
tween the rivers Curituba and Uruguay, runs 5. 
and enters the latter. 

PERALILLO, a settlement of the province 
and corregimiento of Maule, in the kingdom of 
Chile ; situate on the shore of the river Mata- 
quino. 

[PERAMUS, or PER AMES, in Bergen county, 
New Jersey, lies on the point of land formed by 
the branches of Saddle river, a north water of 
Passaik ; about 18 miles n. of Bergen, 10 w. of 
Tappan, and 21 n. w. by n. of New York city.] 

PERAS, SAN MARTIN DE LAS, a settlement 
of the head settlement of the district and alcaldia 
mayor of Quatro Villas, in Nueva Espaiia. It 
contains 72 families of Indians, employed in the 
cultivation and commerce of coehineal, seeds, 
fruits, and coal, and in cutting of wood : a little 
more than seven leagues s. zo. of its head settle 
ment. 

PERAS, SAN PABLO DE, another settlement 
of this alcaldia mayor and kingdom ; inhabited 
by 22 families of Indians, employed in the same 
manner as the above ; and this is at a somewhat 
shorter distance from its head settlement. 

PERAY, an abundant river of Canada; which 
rises from lake Nepigon, runs e. and, turning n. 
enters Hudson s Bay, being very wide at its 
mouth. 

PERCA-HUMO, a settlement of the province 
and captainship of Para in Brazil, situate on the 
coast, between this and the river Caita-pera. 

[PERCEE, L IsLE, a small but remarkable 
island on the w. side of the gulf of St. Law 
rence, being a perpendicular rock, pierced with 
two natural arches, through which the sea flows. 
One of these arches is sufficiently high to admit 
a large boat to pass freely through it. It is 15 
miles s. of Cape Gaspee. It is asserted, that it 
was formerly joined to mount Joli, which lies, op 
posite to it on the continent. 

PERCEE, a point on the n. coast of the islancj 
St. Domingo, in the part possessed by the French, 
between the bay of Petit Goave and the isle oC 
Miraguana ; opposite the s. coast of the island 
Goanava. 



PER 

PERCIA, a large settlement of the province 
and government of San Juan de Los Llanos in 
the Nuevo Reyno de Granada ; situate near the 
river Sinaruco. It was of the Indians of the 
Saliva nation, and in 1684 was taken and burnt 
by the Caribes. 

[PERCIPANY, a village in Morris county, 
New Jersey, situated on a branch of Passaik ri 
ver, and six miles n. of Morristown.] 

[PERCY, an extensive township in Grafton 
county, New Hampshire, watered by the several 
branches of Upper Amonoosuck river, bounded 
w. by Northumberland, on Connecticut river. It 
was incorporated in 1774, and contains only 48 
inhabitants.] 

PERDAMO, a small river of the province and 
corregimiento of Cuenca, in the kingdom of Quito ; 
which rises w. of the capital, runs to that rhumb, 
and enters the S. Sea in the gulf of Guayaquil. 

PERDICION, a cape on the s. coast of the 
strait of Magellan : one of those of the island of 
Luis el Grande, which looks to the w. 

PERDICES, Creek of the, on the n. coast of 
the island of Cuba. 

PERDIDO, a river of the province and govern 
ment of Florida, which runs s. and enters the sea 
between Pensacola and Mobile. 

[There is a bay on the coast of W. Florida, 
of the same name as the river. The mouth of 
the river is about 10 leagues e. of Mobile Point, 
and four w. of the bar of Pensacola. The en 
trance is narrow, with a bar of six feet, but 
afterwards it widens considerably. This was for 
merly the boundary between Florida and Lou 
isiana, dividing the French and Spanish domi 
nions. The river stretches in one place n. e. 
where it goes within a mile of the great lagoon w. 
of the entrance of Pensacola harbour.] 

PERDOMO, a river of the province and go 
vernment of Guayaquil, in the kingdom of Quito 
and district of Machala ; it runs w. and enters 
the sea in the Gulf of Guayaquil in lat. 3 s. 

PERDOMO, some banks of sand which have 
been formed at its entrance by the wind, and 
which often, in some degree, shift their situation. 

PERE, LE, a small island near the coast of 
the province and government of Guayana. 

PEREBERA, a large river of the province 
and government of the Rio del Hacha in the 
Nuevo Reyno de Granada. It runs from s. to n. 
and laves on the n. the settlement of Ramada ; 
and then runs into the N. Sea, forming a great 
bay, but which is exposed and shallow : its mouth 
is in lat. 11 16 n. 

PEIiECIPE, a small river of the province 

VOL. IV. 



PER 



105 



and captainship of Portoseguro in Brazil : it rises 
near the coast, runs e. and enters the sea between 
the Querurupa and Paruipa. 

PpREDO, a point on the s. coast of the island 
of Jamaica. 

PEREGRIN A, a settlement and asiento of 
silver mines of the alcaldia mayor of Guanajuato, 
in the province and bishopric of Mechoacan and 
kingdom of Nueva Espana. 

PEREIRA, a settlement of the province and 
captainship of Paraiba in Brazil, on the shore of 
the river Aracai, near the coast. 

PEREIRAS, a bar of the coast of the pro 
vince and captainship of Maranan and kingdom 
of Brazil. It is close to the island Santa Ana, 
one of those at the mouth of the river Mara- 
ilon. 

PEREJA, a small river of the province and 
captainship of Maranan in Brazil ; which rises in 
the mountains near the coast, runs n. between 
the rivers Tapicuru and Canchug, and enters the 
sea in the bay of Maranon. 

PEREQUETE, a river of the jurisdiction and 
alcaldia mayor of Peronome, in the province and 
kingdom of Tierra Firme ; it rises in the moun 
tains of the settlement of Capira, and enters the 
S. Sea in the Bay and Gulf of Panama, opposite 
the island Taboga. 

PERES, River of the, in the island of Mar 
tinique, one pf the Antilles ; it rises at the foot 
of the great mountain of La Calebasse, runs from 
n. e. to s. w. and enters the sea between the river 
Blanches and fort S. Pierre. 

[PERES Island, or CONST ANTINE PERES, on the 
coast of Chile, S. America. It is opposite to 
Port Coral. On this island is a fort called Man- 
sera, and on the back of the island there is an 
entrance for boats into the harbour of Baldivia.] 

PEREZ, or CAYOS DE DIEGO, some shoals 
near the s. coast of the island of Cuba, opposite 
the bay of Cochinos. 

[PE RGAMINO, a town of the province and 
government of Buenos Ayrcs, situate on the road 
from Buenos Ayres to Cordova, and about 100 
miles from the former. Lat. 33 53 28", long. 
60 43 5".] 

PERGAMINO, a fortress of the province and 
government of Buenos Ayres. It is small and 
of wood, but having a good ditch and draw 
bridge, with four pieces of cannon, and a suffi 
cient number of arms to withstand the Pampas 
Indians of the frontier. Here resides an officer 
with four detachments from the capital, from 
whence the fortress is 44 leagues distant : in the 
road which leads to Lima. 



10(3 



PER 



PERGUICOS, a small river of the province 
and captainship of Maranan in Brazil ~, it rises 
near the coast, runs n. between the rivers Cai- 
mindey and Maripe, and enters the sea. 

PERIBAN, a settlement and capital of the 
nkaldia mayor of Xiquilpa in the province and 
bishopric of Mechoacan and kingdom of Nueva 
Espana ; it is of an hot temperature, and con 
tains a convent of the religious of San Fran 
cisco, with one of the best temples in that 
kingdom. The population is composed of 100 
families of Spaniards, Mitstees, and Mulattoes, 
and 66 of Tarascos Indians, who make many 
cups of pumpkins, in which the place abounds ; 
and these they paint in a very beautiful manner, 
so that they are greatly esteemed, and form the 
principal branch of the commerce of the place : 
80 leagues a>. of Mexico, in long. 270 30 , lat. 
21 15 . 

PERIBOACK, a small river of Canada in N. 
America, which rises from a small lake, runs s. 
and enters the lake San Juan. 

PERICO, a settlement of the province and 
government of Jaen de Bracamoros in the king 
dom of Quito. 

PERICO, another settlement, in the province 
and government of Tucuman, of the district of 
the city of Jujui, on the shore of the river of the 
same name. 

PERICO, some islands of the S. Sea in the 
Gulf of Panama, which forms a capacious port 
fit for smaller vessels, and well sheltered from 
the winds ; but these vessels cannot ride up to 
the road of the city, since the port is dry at low 
water. These islands are two leagues s